IQ Central Operating Manual - peektraffic.com Central Manual... · Operating Manual IQ Central® Advanced ... USTC, Traconex, Traconet, DTI, and Display Technologies, Inc. are trademarks

Operating Manual

Advanced Central System Software

®

CENTRALIQIQ

Operating Manual

IQ Central® Advanced Central Traffic System Software

11/14/2008

p/n: 99-429 Rev 2

Copyright © 2008 Peek Traffic Corporation. All rights reserved. Information furnished by Peek is believed to be accurate and reliable, however Peek does not warranty the accuracy, completeness, or fitness for use of any of the information furnished. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any intellectual property. Peek Traffic reserves the right to alter any of the Company's products or published technical data relating thereto at any time without notice. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or via any electronic or mechanical means for any purpose other than the purchaser’s personal use without the expressed, written permission of Peek Traffic Corporation. Peek Traffic Corporation 2511 Corporate Way Palmetto, FL 34221 U.S.A. Trademarks IQ Central, IQ Data, IQ ATC, IQ Connect, Peek Traffic Corporation, 3000E, Multisonics, Transyt, 390CJ, 820A, Traconex, TMM-500, US Traffic Corporation, USTC, Traconex, Traconet, DTI, and Display Technologies, Inc. are trademarks or registered trademarks of Peek Traffic Corporation, in the USA and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands and their products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

Document assembly: 81-1105 Document Content: 99-429 Rev 2 Document Cover Art: 99-428

iii

Table Of Contents

Chapter 1 – Using the IQ Central Operating Manual ......................................................1 Where to Find Information in this Manual.......................................................................................... 2 Contact Information ........................................................................................................................... 4 Update History of IQ Central ............................................................................................................. 5

Chapter 2 – Using the Interface .......................................................................................7 Logging Onto the System.................................................................................................................. 8 Logging Off the System ..................................................................................................................... 9 Menus.............................................................................................................................................. 10 Using the Mouse.............................................................................................................................. 14 Managing Module Windows ............................................................................................................ 15

Floating Windows ........................................................................................................................ 15 Minimized Windows..................................................................................................................... 15 Tiled Windows ............................................................................................................................. 16 Cascaded Windows..................................................................................................................... 17 Switching Between Open Modules.............................................................................................. 17

Using the Toolbars........................................................................................................................... 18 Activating/Deactivating Toolbars.................................................................................................. 18 Standard Toolbar.......................................................................................................................... 19 Map Configuration Toolbar........................................................................................................... 20 System Maintenance Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 21 User Administration Toolbar......................................................................................................... 22 Intersection Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 22 Message Sign Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 23 Camera Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 24 Devices Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 25

IQ Central Status Bar....................................................................................................................... 26 Subsystem Status Bar ................................................................................................................. 26 Status of Devices Responding and Connected ........................................................................... 30 System Date and Time ................................................................................................................ 32 Logged In User ............................................................................................................................ 33 Module Navigation in the Status Bar ........................................................................................... 33

Keyboard Shortcuts ......................................................................................................................... 34 Automatic Log Off............................................................................................................................ 36 Profiles Module................................................................................................................................ 36 Closing IQ Central ........................................................................................................................... 36

Chapter 3 – Managing Devices and Connections.........................................................37 Introduction to Device Management................................................................................................ 38 Add/Edit Device Window ................................................................................................................. 39

Adding a Device .......................................................................................................................... 39 Editing a Device........................................................................................................................... 40

IQ Central Operating Manual

iv

Deleting a Device .........................................................................................................................40 Viewing Status - The NTCIP Device Status Module.........................................................................41

Status of All Devices of a Type.....................................................................................................42 Single Device Status - Device Logs .............................................................................................42 Single Device Status - Comm Stats .............................................................................................43 Single Device Status - Online History ..........................................................................................43

Connections .....................................................................................................................................45 Overview of Connections Module ................................................................................................45 Adding a Connection....................................................................................................................45 Editing a Connection ....................................................................................................................45 Deleting a Connection..................................................................................................................45 Editing a Connection ....................................................................................................................45

Device Types Module.......................................................................................................................46 Adding a Device Type ..................................................................................................................46 Editing a Device Type ..................................................................................................................46 Deleting a Device Type ................................................................................................................46

Managing Device Groups ................................................................................................................47 Launching the Device Groups Module .........................................................................................47 Managing Device Groups.............................................................................................................47 Launching the Device Groups Module .........................................................................................47 Using the Device Groups window ................................................................................................48 Creating a Group..........................................................................................................................50 Modifying an Existing Group ........................................................................................................51 Deleting a Group ..........................................................................................................................52

Chapter 4 – Traffic Controller Management ..................................................................53 Traffic Network - Example Topography ............................................................................................54 Supported Traffic Controllers ...........................................................................................................55

IQ Connect Hardware ..................................................................................................................55 Multisonics Hardware...................................................................................................................56 Using Peek Hardware with IQ Central .........................................................................................65 U.S. Traffic Hardware...................................................................................................................76 Using Traconex Hardware with IQ Central...................................................................................80 Using Transyt Hardware with IQ Central......................................................................................80 Configuring Intersection Display on Maps....................................................................................80

Configure Intersections Module .......................................................................................................81 Launching the Configure Intersection Module .............................................................................81 The Basic Steps to Set Up an Intersection ..................................................................................81

The Configure Intersection Interface................................................................................................83 Adding an Icon to an Intersection ................................................................................................83 Changing the Appearance of an Intersection Icon .......................................................................85 Linking Intersection Icons to Data Objects...................................................................................86

Setting Up Map Polling ....................................................................................................................88 Setting Up Map Polling for Intersection Icons ..............................................................................88 Auto Populate Polling...................................................................................................................88

The Upload/Download Interface ......................................................................................................90 Controller Upload and Download .................................................................................................90 Launching the Upload/Download Module ....................................................................................91

Table Of Contents

v

The Upload/Download Interface .................................................................................................. 92 Color Codes and Symbols in the Upload Download Module....................................................... 95 Getting Data From the Controller................................................................................................. 97 Sending Data to the Controller .................................................................................................... 98 Interacting With the Central Database......................................................................................... 98 Copying Settings Between Controllers ........................................................................................ 99

Central Override of Traffic Controllers and Masters ...................................................................... 101

Chapter 5 – Camera Management................................................................................103 Creating a Camera-NTCIP Device ................................................................................................ 104 Camera Control Module ................................................................................................................ 105

Chapter 6 – Traffic Sign Management .........................................................................107 Controls to Manage Traffic Signs .................................................................................................. 108 Sign Control Module ...................................................................................................................... 109

To Send a Changeable Message to the Sign ............................................................................ 109 Add a New Message ................................................................................................................. 109 Edit an Existing Message ...........................................................................................................110 Sign Message Edit Screen .........................................................................................................110 Sign Message Editor - Advanced Screen ...................................................................................110 Moving Text Editing Screen ........................................................................................................111 Displaying a Message Page with Preset Times..........................................................................111

Overview of the Sign Summary Module .........................................................................................113 Sign Configuration ......................................................................................................................113 Sign Status..................................................................................................................................113

Bulk Operations Module .................................................................................................................116 Diagnostic Topics........................................................................................................................116

Brightness Control Module .............................................................................................................117 Master Fonts Module......................................................................................................................117

Using the Font Editor Interface...................................................................................................117 Editing a Font .............................................................................................................................117

Schedules Module ..........................................................................................................................118 Opening the Message Sign Schedules window .........................................................................118 Day Plans and Schedules ..........................................................................................................118

Error Logging on Message Signs .................................................................................................. 120 Event Groups and Events.......................................................................................................... 120 Clear Event Log......................................................................................................................... 120 View Recorded Events .............................................................................................................. 121

SNMP Device Security Module ..................................................................................................... 122 Opening the Device Security Module ........................................................................................ 122 Device-Level Security................................................................................................................ 122

Chapter 7 - Incident Management Module ..................................................................123 Configuring the Incident Spreadsheets.......................................................................................... 124

Defining Actions......................................................................................................................... 125


vi

Chapter 8 – Crisis Management in IQ Central.............................................................127 Configuring a Scenario or Amber Alert...........................................................................................127

What is a Scenario? ...................................................................................................................127 What is an Amber Alert?.............................................................................................................127

Activating an Amber Alert...............................................................................................................128 Displaying a Scenario ....................................................................................................................129

Creating a Scenario ...................................................................................................................129 Standard Operating Procedure ..................................................................................................130

Chapter 9 - Using Maps in IQ Central ..........................................................................131 Does your IQ Central use BMP mapping or GIS mapping?.......................................................131

Getting Started With Maps .............................................................................................................133 Setting Map Paths in the IQ Central Database ..............................................................................134

For BMP Map files:.....................................................................................................................134 For GIS Map files: ......................................................................................................................134

Setting Up Map Polling for Intersection Icons ................................................................................136 Overview of Map Management ......................................................................................................137

Opening the Map Management module.....................................................................................137 Storing Map Data .......................................................................................................................137 Loading BMP Map Data .............................................................................................................137 Loading GIS Map Data...............................................................................................................137 Managing BMP Maps.................................................................................................................138 Using the Map Management Module With GIS Maps................................................................143 Creating Map Views ...................................................................................................................144 Close the Map Management module. ........................................................................................145

Working With GIS Map Layers.......................................................................................................146 Creating GIS Map Layer Groups................................................................................................146 Adding a Layer Group................................................................................................................147 Changing the Name of a Layer Group .......................................................................................147 GIS Layers .................................................................................................................................148

Managing Devices on Maps...........................................................................................................151 Placing Devices on Maps...........................................................................................................151 Zoom Level Icons.......................................................................................................................152 Placing an Icon on a BMP Map..................................................................................................152 Placing an Icon on a GIS Map ...................................................................................................153 Setting GIS Zoom Levels ...........................................................................................................153

Viewing Maps.................................................................................................................................156 Using the BMP Map Viewer Interface ........................................................................................157 Accessing Devices in the Map Viewer Module ..........................................................................159 Selecting a Map in the Map Viewer............................................................................................159 Setting the Default Map..............................................................................................................160

Chapter 10 – Polling and Scheduling Events..............................................................161 Polling ............................................................................................................................................161 Scheduling .....................................................................................................................................162 Map Polling ....................................................................................................................................162

Launching the Main Map Polling Configuration Window............................................................162

Table Of Contents

vii

Map Polling Configuration ............................................................................................................. 163 Opening the Map Polling Configuration module ........................................................................ 163 Using the Map Polling Configuration interface .......................................................................... 163 Using the Polling Assistant ........................................................................................................ 165

Performing a Batch Update ........................................................................................................... 168 Dynamic Object Configuration....................................................................................................... 169

Opening the Dynamic Object Configuration module ................................................................. 169 Using the Dynamic Object Configuration Interface.................................................................... 170

Log Polling..................................................................................................................................... 171 Overview of Log Polling............................................................................................................. 171 Launching the Device Type Data window.................................................................................. 171 Launching the Device Type Polling window .............................................................................. 171 About the System Log ............................................................................................................... 171

Device Type Data .......................................................................................................................... 172 Interface Controls ...................................................................................................................... 172 Device Type Polling ................................................................................................................... 174

Communications Failure Testing ................................................................................................... 175 Message Sign Scheduling ............................................................................................................. 176

Schedules Module ..................................................................................................................... 176 Opening the Message Sign Schedules window ........................................................................ 176 Day Plans and Schedules ......................................................................................................... 176

Scheduling of Traffic Controller Log Retrieval ............................................................................... 178 Installing the IQ Central Scheduler ............................................................................................ 178 Launching the Scheduler Interface............................................................................................ 181 Using the Scheduler Interface ................................................................................................... 182 Adding a Scheduled Task .......................................................................................................... 184 Modifying a Scheduled Task...................................................................................................... 185 Deleting a Schedule Task .......................................................................................................... 186 Changing the Location of the Task Database............................................................................ 186

Chapter 11 – Alarm Monitoring ....................................................................................189 Using the Alarm Configuration Window......................................................................................... 190

Launching the Alarm Configuration Window.............................................................................. 190 Alarm Configuration Interface.................................................................................................... 190

Using the Alarm Status Window .................................................................................................... 195 Launching the Alarm Status Module .......................................................................................... 195 Using the Alarm Status Interface ............................................................................................... 195

Setting Up a New Alarm ................................................................................................................ 197 Editing an Existing Alarm Condition............................................................................................... 199 Deleting an Alarm Condition .......................................................................................................... 199 Handling Alarms ............................................................................................................................ 200 Configuring the Alarms System ..................................................................................................... 202

Opening the Alarm Parameters ................................................................................................. 202 Setting the Parameters.............................................................................................................. 202


viii

Chapter 12 – Reports ....................................................................................................205 Using the Reports Interface ...........................................................................................................205

Applying Report Filters...............................................................................................................205 Generating Source Data for Reporting ..........................................................................................207

Alarms and Status event logs.....................................................................................................207 Controller Log Retrieval .............................................................................................................207 Message Sign Log Retrieval ......................................................................................................207

Exporting Report Data ...................................................................................................................208 Creating a Custom Report .............................................................................................................209

Chapter 13 – User Management & Security ................................................................211 Managing User Accounts ...............................................................................................................212

Adding a New User Account ......................................................................................................212 Deleting a User Account.............................................................................................................212 Changing the Security Level of a User.......................................................................................213 Changing Your Password...........................................................................................................213 Setting a User Password............................................................................................................214

User Administration Module ...........................................................................................................215 Managing Security .........................................................................................................................216

Currently Logged In Users .........................................................................................................216 Access Levels Module ...................................................................................................................218

Changing the Access Level for a Module Control ......................................................................219

Chapter 14 – Database Maintenance & Backup..........................................................221 Working in the IQ Central Access Database..................................................................................221 System Logging .............................................................................................................................223

Size Event Log Module ..............................................................................................................223 Extended Logging ......................................................................................................................223 User Comments Module ............................................................................................................224

Archive and Restore Module..........................................................................................................225

Chapter 15 – IQ Central Customization .......................................................................227 Device Icon Management ..............................................................................................................228

Editing an Icon ...........................................................................................................................229 Adding an Icon ...........................................................................................................................229

Link Icon to Device Type Module ...................................................................................................231 BlockBuilder & FormBuilder ...........................................................................................................232

BlockBuilder Module ..................................................................................................................232 Using the BlockBuilder Module ..................................................................................................232 FormBuilder Module...................................................................................................................232

Glossary.........................................................................................................................233

Index...............................................................................................................................249

Table Of Contents

ix

Figures Figure 1 – The sections of this manual ................................................................................................. 1 Figure 2 – Several module windows open in IQ Central..................................................................... 15 Figure 3 – Several module windows minimized.................................................................................. 15 Figure 4 – Several module windows tiled horizontally ....................................................................... 16 Figure 5 – Several module windows tiled vertically ........................................................................... 16 Figure 6 – Several module windows arrayed in a cascade ................................................................ 17 Figure 7 – Right-click in the toolbar area to open the toolbar selection menu.................................... 18 Figure 8 – Closing a toolbar................................................................................................................ 18 Figure 9 – Standard Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 19 Figure 10 – Map Configuration Toolbar (for the BMP version of IQ Central)...................................... 20 Figure 11 – Map Configuration Toolbar (for the GIS version of IQ Central) ....................................... 20 Figure 12 – System Maintenance Toolbar .......................................................................................... 21 Figure 13 – User Administration Toolbar ............................................................................................ 22 Figure 14 – Intersection Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 22 Figure 15 – Message Sign Toolbar..................................................................................................... 23 Figure 16 – Camera Toolbar............................................................................................................... 24 Figure 17 – Devices Toolbar............................................................................................................... 25 Figure 18 – Subsystem status in the IQ Central status bar ............................................................... 26 Figure 19 – Data Manager icon tool tip.............................................................................................. 27 Figure 20 – Quick History of Data Manager operational status ......................................................... 27 Figure 21 – Tooltip for the NTCIP Server status icon ........................................................................ 28 Figure 22 – Quick History of NTCIP Server operational status ......................................................... 29 Figure 23 – Alarm status icon in the IQ Central status bar ................................................................ 29 Figure 24 – Alarms details displayed in a tooltip................................................................................ 30 Figure 25 – Device status in the Status bar ....................................................................................... 31 Figure 26 – Device Status tool tip ...................................................................................................... 31 Figure 27 – Current date and time as displayed in the IQ Central status bar.................................... 32 Figure 28 – Current User icon and label in the IQ Central status bar................................................ 33 Figure 29 – Module Navigation in the Status bar................................................................................ 33 Figure 30 – Assigning a Device to a Connection and a Device Type................................................. 37 Figure 31 – Add/Edit Device Window ................................................................................................. 39 Figure 32 – Device Status module...................................................................................................... 41 Figure 33 – Device Status module for a single device type ................................................................ 42 Figure 34 – Device Status module - Device Logs pane...................................................................... 43 Figure 35 – Device Status module - Comm Stats pane...................................................................... 43 Figure 36 – Device Status module - Online History pane................................................................... 44 Figure 37 – Parts of the Device Groups window................................................................................. 48 Figure 38 – Be sure to Save the new group once you've created it ................................................... 50 Figure 39 – Be sure to Save the changes to the group ...................................................................... 51 Figure 40 – The Delete Group button in the Device Groups module.................................................. 52 Figure 41 – Example IQ Central traffic controller network .................................................................. 54 Figure 42 – Overview of the Configure Intersection interface............................................................. 83 Figure 43 – Selecting an image for an intersection element............................................................... 85 Figure 44 – Linking data to an intersection element ........................................................................... 86 Figure 45 – Linking to alarmGroupState.2 .......................................................................................... 87 Figure 46 – Auto Populate Polling button from the Configure Intersections window .......................... 88 Figure 47 – Auto populate polling warning message.......................................................................... 88 Figure 48 – Auto populate polling completion message ..................................................................... 89 Figure 49 – Upload/Download Module................................................................................................ 90 Figure 50 – The Upload/Download module with no device selected .................................................. 92 Figure 51 – Interface elements of the Upload/Download module....................................................... 92 Figure 52 – Number entry window...................................................................................................... 93 Figure 53 – Phase selection entry window ......................................................................................... 94 Figure 54 – Example of an Enumerated value selection window ....................................................... 95 Figure 55 – Yellow and green cell backgrounds in Upload/Download tables ..................................... 95 Figure 56 – Purple cell background in the Upload/Download module ................................................ 96


x

Figure 57 – An example of choosing the scope of data to retrieve from the controller .......................97 Figure 58 – An example of choosing the scope of data to send to the controller................................98 Figure 59 – Controls in the Upload/Download module to interact with the IQ Central database ........99 Figure 60 – Copy Device Data module ...............................................................................................99 Figure 61 – Central Override control window....................................................................................101 Figure 62 – Sign Message Edit screen .............................................................................................110 Figure 63 – Advanced Sign Message Edit screen ............................................................................111 Figure 64 – Moving Text Editing screen............................................................................................111 Figure 65 – Font View screen ...........................................................................................................117 Figure 66 – BMP maps versus GIS maps .........................................................................................131 Figure 67 – Example BMP map file displayed in the Map Management module ..............................138 Figure 68 – Placing a zoom area ......................................................................................................141 Figure 70 – Green zoom area icon indicating that the zone has been saved ...................................142 Figure 69 – Placing a zoom area ......................................................................................................146 Figure 69 – Layer Groups module.....................................................................................................147 Figure 70 – Using the Layers module to configure GIS map layers..................................................149 Figure 71 – Verification is requested when deleting a layer..............................................................150 Figure 72 – Setting Device Zoom Levels ..........................................................................................154 Figure 73 – Map Viewer interface (BMP version)..............................................................................156 Figure 74 – Map Viewer interface - GIS version ...............................................................................157 Figure 75 – BMP Map Viewer ...........................................................................................................157 Figure 76 – GIS Map Viewer .............................................................................................................158 Figure 77 – Map Views menu............................................................................................................160 Figure 78 – Interface elements of the Map Polling Configuration module.........................................163 Figure 79 – Intersection Polling Assistant dialog box........................................................................166 Figure 80 – Batch Update button in the Map Polling Configuration window .....................................168 Figure 81 – Batch Update dialog box ................................................................................................168 Figure 82 – Interface elements of the Dynamic Objects Configuration window................................169 Figure 83 – Device Type Log polling window....................................................................................174 Figure 84 – Scheduled Task Editor ...................................................................................................182 Figure 85 – Toolbar buttons in the Scheduled Task Editor ...............................................................182 Figure 86 – Complete task details.....................................................................................................183 Figure 87 – Task creation dialog box ................................................................................................184 Figure 88 – Selecting multiple tasks for deletion...............................................................................186 Figure 89 – Options dialog box for the System Scheduler ................................................................187 Figure 90 – Alarm Configuration window ..........................................................................................191 Figure 91 – Device Hierarchy - 'View by Groups'..............................................................................192 Figure 92– Alarm Configuration window - "View by Type" ................................................................193 Figure 93 – Alarm Configuration window - "All Alarms" ....................................................................194 Figure 94 – Alarm Status window......................................................................................................195 Figure 95 – Features of the alarm conditions list in the Alarm Configuration window.......................197 Figure 96 – Example of data fields in the expanded alarm conditions view......................................198 Figure 97 – A critical alarm configured to display a tooltip popup message .....................................200 Figure 98 – Acknowledge the alarm to temporarily remove the tooltip message from your IQ Central display

....................................................................................................................................................200 Figure 99 – The Alarm Status module docked to the IQ Central window and auto refreshing .........201 Figure 100 – Current alarm status tooltip visible when hovering over the alarm icon.......................201 Figure 101 – Alarm System Settings - Critical settings .....................................................................202 Figure 102 – Alarm System Settings - Warning settings...................................................................204 Figure 103 – Alarm System Settings - Info settings ..........................................................................204 Figure 104 – User Administration module .........................................................................................215 Figure 105 – Each login that will be shut down sees this message .................................................217 Figure 106 – MDI selection in the Access Levels window.................................................................218 Figure 107 – IQ Central database table listing ..................................................................................222 Figure 108 – IQ Central Archive and Restore module ......................................................................225

Table Of Contents

xi

Tables Table 1 – IQ Central Update Release History ....................................................................................... 5 Table 2 – IQ Central Menus ............................................................................................................... 10 Table 3 – Buttons on the Standard Toolbar ........................................................................................ 19 Table 4 – Map Configuration Toolbar.................................................................................................. 20 Table 5 – System Maintenance Toolbar.............................................................................................. 21 Table 6 – User Administration Toolbar................................................................................................ 22 Table 7 – Intersection Toolbar............................................................................................................. 22 Table 8 – Message Sign Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 23 Table 9 – Camera Toolbar .................................................................................................................. 24 Table 10 – Devices Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 25 Table 11 – Data Manager Status icons ............................................................................................... 26 Table 12 – NTCIP Server Status icons ............................................................................................... 28 Table 13 – Alarms Status icons, from lowest alert level to highest ..................................................... 30 Table 14 – Logged In User icons ........................................................................................................ 33 Table 15 – Keyboard Shortcuts........................................................................................................... 34 Table 16 – 820A parameters editable in the Upload/Download module ............................................. 56 Table 17 – Peek 3000E Controller parameters editable in the Upload/Download module ................. 65 Table 18 – IQ ATC Controller parameters editable in the Upload/Download module......................... 76 Table 19 – Icons by Zoom Level in the Configure Intersection module .............................................. 84 Table 20 – Icons used to Configure an Intersection............................................................................ 84 Table 21 – Keyboard shortcuts to edit phase parameters................................................................... 94 Table 22 – Upload/Download module 'Difference' icons..................................................................... 96 Table 23 – Toolbar buttons used to perform traffic sign management.............................................. 108 Table 24 – Diagnostic Tests available for Message Signs................................................................ 116 Table 25 – Default Layer Values ....................................................................................................... 135 Table 26 – Functions available from device icons in maps............................................................... 151 Table 27 – Commands available in the device icon drop-down menu.............................................. 159 Table 28 – Traffic Controller support for scheduled log retrieval ...................................................... 178 Table 29 – Pre-configured User Accounts ........................................................................................ 211


xii

1

Chapter 1 – Using the IQ Central Operating Manual

Welcome to the Operating Manual for the IQ Central software system. This manual will help you understand the general operation, the controls, options and operating environments of the IQ Central software system. To find the information you need, you can start by looking in the chapters describing one of the following topics, or use the Index or Glossary to find the information you are seeking.

Figure 1 – The sections of this manual


2

Where to Find Information in this Manual The discussions of IQ Central have been divided up into the following chapters in this book:

Chapter 1 - Welcome to IQ Central An overview of the structure of this manual, information about contacting Peek Traffic to request additional help, and some detail about how IQ Central has evolved over time.

Chapter 2 - Working with the Interface Discribes how to use the standard Windows interface elements in IQ Central (mouse, menus, toolbars, status bar, work area) as well as a listing of the available keyboard shortcuts available in the application.

Chapter 3 - Managing Devices and Connections IQ Central uses a central device and connection management scheme, providing unified tools to add, edit and delete database instances of devices, no matter what type, and communications channels, no matter the connection type. This chapter also describes how to edit and implement device-type-based standard templates. and how to manage time synchronization functions.

Chapter 4 - Traffic Control Management This chapter describes how to use the parts of the IQ Central interface that have been created to specifically support the operation of traffic controllers, master controllers, and their supporting hardware. This includes some details about what devices are supported and at what levels, information about setting up map displays of traffic controllers, the Upload/Download module for controller database management, and the Central Override capability of the Map Viewer. It also discusses the Coordination check function.

Chapter 5 - Camera Management This section describes how to use IQ Central with NTCIP and Ethernet cameras, including how to establish connections for data and video, and modules to control and interact with these cameras.

Chapter 6 - Traffic Sign Management This chapter describes the interface elements in IQ Central that support the operation and management of variable traffic message signs. These include message selection and editing, font management, diagnostics tools, error logging, message scheduling, and device-level security for signs.

Chapter 7 - Automatic Incident Management This chapter describes how to use the Automatic Incident management tools of IQ Central, which allow you to configure the application to respond to inputs from devices and respond in a predetermined manner. This kind of 'macro programming' tool for IQ Central would allow for the automatic change of message signs or traffic patterns based on status data provided by those or other devices in your traffic network.


3

Chapter 8 - Crisis Management This section describes the tools within IQ Central that can be used by operators to trigger emergency situation scenarios, such as a change in traffic operation caused by an Amber Alert or some other short time frame crisis.

Chapter 9 - Using Maps in IQ Central This chapter provides a great deal of information about the ways to set up and operate the sophisticated mapping system in IQ Central. Whether using BMP map backgrounds or ESRI GIS map data files, IQ Central has tools to manage how maps appear and interact with the operator.

Chapter 10 - Polling and Scheduling Events This chapter describes the variety of tools that can be used in IQ Central to automatically request data retrieval from field devices (polling) and to automatically send commands to field hardware at predetermined times (event scheduling).

Chapter 11 - Alarm Monitoring This chapter describes how devices are monitored by IQ Central. The alarms system is a global application within IQ Central that allows the operator to set conditions that will trigger alarms. The program then provides tools to monitor the devices to see if these alarms occur.

Chapter 12 - Reports IQ Central uses the Microsoft Office application suite as its background tools for handling data. This chapter describes how to use these tools in conjunction with IQ Central to create custom reports and to export data. This chapter also describes how to use the controller database print-out feature.

Chapter 13 - User Management and Security This section describes the modules in IQ Central that are used to manage user accounts and to control system security.

Chapter 14 - Database Maintenance and Archiving This chapter describes how to maintain IQ Central's central database, as well as how to archive data to backup files and retrieve data when needed.

Chapter 15 - IQ Central Customization IQ Central comes with many powerful tools to change its appearance and operation. This chapter provides a rudimentary description of these tools.

Glossary A collection of definitions of the most commonly used traffic industry terminology and IQ Central terms.


4

Contact Information For additional help with IQ Central, technical questions, or information about any of the other Peek intelligent traffic systems products, please contact Peek Traffic using any of the following methods:

Email: [email protected]

Phone: Toll free in the U.S.: (800) 245-7660 or at (941) 845-1200. In either case, simply mention the product for which you wish to receive assistance and your call will be directed to the proper support representative. For account information concerning IQ Central, contact Mr. Cory Dibert at (941) 224-6413.

Fax: (941) 845-1504. Again, simply mention the product and the issue for which you would like to receive assistance, and be sure to list your return phone or fax number so that our support representative can get back to you.

Website: Some additional information about all of the Peek Traffic products is available at the company website: http://www.peektraffic.com


5

Update History of IQ Central This section provides a historical record of how the IQ Central software has evolved over time.

Table 1 – IQ Central Update Release History

Release Features and Enhancements Date Version 1.0 Initial release. Basic support for management of traffic signs, NTCIP

cameras, and remote sensors. July 2005

Version 1.1 Reliability and speed improvements. Improved automatic installation. Basic support for Peek 3000 and M3000 controllers.

January 2006

Version 1.2 Added basic support for Multisonics 820A controllers and OSAM 32 master controllers. Dramatically improved communications reliability with all devices. Added interface elements to handle all Peek controller and Multisonics controller data fields. Updated toolbar system. Standardized the menu system. Initial release of the traffic controller upload/download module. Added log retrieval for Peek and Multisonics controllers. First release of the IQ Central help system. First product release notes. Improved map management in both BMP and GIS environments. Support for more image file types.

October 2006

Version 1.3 Faster and more reliable Upload/Download module for controller interaction. Improved interfaces in the GIS map modules (View, Management, Layers, etc.) Basic support for IQ ATC and ASTC traffic controllers. Greatly enhanced Archive and Restore Module.

April 2007

Version 1.4 Added basic support for Traconex 390CJ controllers and TMM500 master controllers. Added basic support for Transyt 1880EL controllers and 3800EL master controllers. Added log retrieval from Traconex and Transyt controllers. Added central override capability from the Map Viewer module. Added the automatic map polling assistant to help in configuring map polling data for traffic controllers.

September 2007

Version 1.5 Implementation of a new global device alarms system. Added ability to collect devices into user-defined groupings. Improved map polling configuration interface. Improved functionality in the IQ Central status bar.

February 2008

Version 1.6 Added the ability to generate a device's database as a PDF export, which can also be printed. Added the Coord Check functionality; implemented in version 1.6 only for the Traconex 390CJ controllers, but configured to add this feature to more devices in the next few update releases. Added the ability to edit and store a default database for each device type, which will be used whenever a new device of that type is added to IQ Central.

June 2008

Version 1.7 Added basic support for the LMD-9200 controller. Added the new device Time Sync module. Added the ability to override the traffic pattern on a whole group of controllers at once. Updated the Upload/Download module screens for the 3000E to more accurately represent the layout of the data in the controller, particularly the coordination parameters.

September 2008


6

7

Chapter 2 – Using the Interface IQ Central functions as a framework for a set of traffic hardware control modules. Each module opens in its own window and edits data in the IQ Central database. The framework provides a set of master menus, a status bar at the bottom of the window, shortcuts for navigating using only the keyboard, and a set of three toolbars along the left edge of the main window. The following topics provide more details about each of these program control methods.

Using the Mouse

IQ Central Menus

Managing Module Windows

Toolbars

Keyboard shortcuts for navigating the interface

the IQ Central Status Bar

Global IQ Central Modules

However, for a new user, probably the most important skills to gain when starting to use IQ Central are learning to Log On to the system, Log Off the system, and Closing the program.


8

Logging Onto the System The Log On screen is where you enter your Name and Password so that you can access the sign control software. You must log on to the system before you can access any of the modules or make any changes to the database. The administrator of your IQ Central system controls user accounts, so if you need an account, contact that person.

Chapter 2 – Using the Interface

9

Logging Off the System Use the Log Off option to log out of the currently logged on user account within IQ Central. This function does not close the application. If you want to close the software, you must choose the Exit option. (To exit, go to File > Exit on the menus, or press Alt-F4.)

If you are logged on as a particular user and you need to log on as another user, you must first log off. Once you have done this, the Log On option from the File menu will be enabled so that you can Log On. If you are connected to a Device when you log off, that connection will automatically be closed by the system.


10

Menus This is an overview of the main menu system of IQ Central. The menus in IQ Central do not change as you navigate around the system, although the commands that are visible on the menus do change based on what security level the current logged-in user has. The menus described here show all available commands, which is what a user with Administrative access sees in the interface.

Table 2 – IQ Central Menus

Menu Command Purpose Log on... Only active when no user is presently logged into this client of

IQ Central. Opens a dialog box where a user can enter a user name and password.

Log off Only appears when a user is presently logged into this client. Asks for verification before logging out of the current user account. This option does not close IQ Central.

Change Password Only appears when a user is logged into the system. Allows the currently logged in user to change his or her password.

File

Exit Shuts down the IQ Central client on this workstation. Caution: This will shut down the server components of the program if it is chosen on the IQ Central server.

Status Opens the Device Status module Map Opens the View Map module Incident Management Opens the Incident Management module User Comments... Opens the User Comments module Reports... Opens the IQ Central Reports selection window Large Tool Icons Toggles between small and large icons on the IQ Central

toolbars that appear on the left edge of the main IQ Central window.

View

Timeout Opens a window where you can set the user timeout settings for this account.

Add New Device... Opens the Device Configurations window, where new devices can be created in the IQ Central database

Intersections > Upload/Download Opens the traffic controller upload/download window. This window allows the operator to send and retrieve configuration files, or 'databases', to and from traffic controllers in the field.

Intersections > Copy Database Provides an interface to copy device databases, or sections of device databases between traffic controllers of the same type

Message Signs > Control Opens the Sign Control module where stored messages and display options can be selected.

Message Signs > Scenarios & Amber Alerts

Opens the Scenarios and Amber Alerts module, which is used to manage crisis situations.

Message Signs > Summary... Opens the Sign Summary module where the operator can view and set many of the internal parameters of a message sign.

Devices

Message Signs > Bulk Operation Opens the Bulk Operations module, which can be used to send 'bulk' or 'batch' commands to a single message sign. It can also be used to perform diagnostic tests on a sign.


11

Menu Command Purpose Message Signs > Brightness Control... Opens the Sign Brightness Control module, which can be

used to manually control the brightness of sign light sources. Message Signs > Edit Master Fonts... Opens the Font View module, which can be used to send and

retrieve font files to and from message signs. Message Signs > Edit Schedules... Opens the Scheduler module, which can be used to design

and activate event schedules for IQ Central devices. Message Signs > Error Logs... Opens the Error Logs module. This allows the operator to

define what objects and conditions will generate an error, and to view events that have been recorded to the event log.

Cameras > Control The Camera Control module allows the operator to use IQ Central to control and configure an NTCIP-capable camera, including parameters such as zoom, focus, tilt, iris, and zones and labels.

Cameras > Browser Opens the NTCIP Camera Browser, which allows an operator to retrieve live video feeds from a field camera.

Cameras > Video Connections Opens the Camera Video Configuration module, where the video feed of an NTCIP camera that is attached to IQ Central can be set up.

SNMP Device Security Allows the operator to set the SNMP security parameters for any NTCIP network device configured within IQ Central.

Time Sync Interactive device-by-device time synchronization module Map Management Opens the map management module. The controls that are

available depend on whether you have the BMP or GIS version of IQ Central. In either case, this module allows you to view and set up map views.

Place Icon on Map Opens the Place Icon on Map module, where the operator can place icons for any of the currently configured devices on any of the currently available maps.

Intersection Displays Opens the Configure Intersection module, where the graphics that are displayed on the map for a particular device type and zoom level is defined.

GIS Layer Groups Opens the Add/Edit Layer Groups screen. This option is only available in the GIS version of IQ Central.

GIS Layers Opens the Layers module, where GIS layers, their color coding, their styles and layer characteristics can be defined. This option is only available in the GIS version of IQ Central.

GIS Zoom Settings Opens the Device Zoom Levels module, where GIS map zoom levels can be associated with each type of device. This option is only available in the GIS version of IQ Central.

Polling Options > Map Polling Configuration

Opens the Map Polling Configuration module, where polling of devices displayed on maps can be configured. This is where you set up how often data is retrieved from devices when they are displayed on a map.

Polling Options > Dynamic Object Configuration

Opens the STMP Polling module, where the operator can configure the object IDs of an NTCIP device so that the desired data points can be retrieved during polling operation.

Maps

Polling Options > Refresh Server Polling

This options requests and displays updated polling data on


12

Menu Command Purpose any devices that are displayed on maps within IQ Central.

Connections Opens the Overview of Connections module, where communications channels can be defined, modified, or deleted in IQ Central, including direct-connect serial connections, modem connections, or Ethernet connections.

Devices Opens the Overview of Device Configurations control. Shows a complete list of devices and the communications channel(s) they use, from which you can edit or add devices.

Device Groups Opens the Device Groups management module. Devices can be grouped together under a single group name for alarm management purposes.

Archive and Restore... Opens the Archive and Restore module, which can be used to store the contents of one or more tables of your IQ Central database, or to retrieve them from an archive file so they can be restored to the system.

System Scheduler Opens the IQ Central event scheduler Print Database Allows you to export a device database to a PDF file, which

can then be printed or stored to an external file Alarms > Configuration Opens the module that allows you to create and manage data

from devices that will trigger an alarm. Alarms > Status Opens a module that allows you to view, filter, sort and print

the current status of any alarms detected by IQ Central. Alarms > History Opens the alarm history viewer User Administration > Add/Delete Opens the User Administration module and allows an operator

with sufficient rights to add, edit or delete user accounts. User Administration > Access Levels Opens the Access Levels module, where the security level

required to access the various parts of the IQ Central interface can be defined.

User Administration > Profiles Opens the Profiles module. Profiles allow you to set different access levels for different levels of operators. Profiles function as an advanced version of user access level assignment. We recommend that users avoid modifying any of the Profiles settings.

User Administration > Currently Logged On Users

This command shows the operator a listing of all of the users that are currently logged into IQ Central.

Logging Options > Device Type Data Opens a module that allows the operator to configure device objects for which he or she wishes to generate current status messages.

Logging Options > Device Type Polling

Opens the Device Log Polling module. Allows the operator to set polling frequency and other polling values by device.

Logging Options > Size Event Log... This command can be used to set the maximum event log size.

Logging Options > Extended Logging This toggles the 'extended' logging option on and off. A check mark appears next to this when extended logging is active.

Tools

Advanced Options > Icon Management

The Icon Management module is used to attach a device icon to a device type.


13

Menu Command Purpose Advanced Options > Device Types Opens the Enter/Edit Device Type module. This allows an

operator to create or edit the types of devices that can be managed in IQ Central.

Advanced Options > Link Icon to Device Type

Allows an operator to link an icon that is already stored in IQ Central to be attached to a certain device type. These icons then appear in the map module.

Advanced Options > BlockBuilder This advanced module is used to assign blocks of data (from a device's database) to NTCIP object IDs. This is an advanced part of the process of creating new types of devices within IQ Central. BlockBuilder should only be used with the supervision of Peek Traffic personnel.

Advanced Options > FormBuilder This advanced module is used to create screens, or 'forms', to allow the editing and control of a new type of device within IQ Central. This is an advanced part of the process of creating new types of devices. FormBuilder should only be used with the supervision of Peek Traffic personnel.

Options Opens the IQ Central application-wide parameters window Toolbars Performs the same function as would right-clicking in the

toolbar area in order to select which toolbars will be visible within IQ Central. Place a check next to one of the toolbars to make it appear in the interface.

Tile Vertical Arranges the open windows so that they automatically fit vertically into the available space of the full IQ Central window. Note: Some modules, such as the message sign management tools will not respond to this command.

Tile Horizontal Arranges the open windows so that all open windows automatically fit horizontally into the available space of the full IQ Central window. Note: Some modules, such as the message sign management tools will not respond to this command.

Cascade Arranges all open windows into a cascade from the top left down to the lower right, in the order that the windows were opened.

Window

<#> The Window menu shows a list of the currently open modules. Selecting one switches the focus to that module.

IQ Central Help Opens this help system. Help About IQ Central Shows the About window for the IQ Central application, where

you can see the version information for the application, as well as see details about your PC and OS environment.


14

Using the Mouse You control the IQ Central interface by left-clicking with the mouse pointer on the control you wish to modify or activate. You can typically edit an item that appears in one of the lists of the application by double-clicking on it to open an editing window. In some places, you also have more options for a control that can be accessed by right-clicking on the control. This opens a context-specific menu.

Many items in the interface also now provide 'Tooltips' details which can be accessed by simply 'hovering' the mouse pointer over the control. And double-clicking on some buttons will open status windows. These last two items are especially useful in the IQ Central status bar.

Note Some people like to avoid using the mouse as much as possible, and can achieve higher speed when using an application by sticking with keyboard controls. A complete list of keyboard controls for IQ Central are available here.


15

Managing Module Windows Modules in IQ Central can either be opened so that they take up the full display window with the IQ Central framework, or within a floating window. In either case, multiple module can be open at one time, and they can be displayed in a number of different ways.

Floating Windows The normal method for modules to open within IQ Central are as floating windows.

Figure 2 – Several module windows open in IQ Central

Minimized Windows Minimizing open module windows will place them in minimized form at the bottom corner of the current IQ Central window. If you resize the window, the minimized windows will remain where they were placed.

Figure 3 – Several module windows minimized


16

Tiled Windows The Windows menu has a couple of controls for tiling module windows, as shown below. Tiling Horizontally attempts to resize all open (non-minimized) module windows so they appear one atop another within the IQ Central window.

Figure 4 – Several module windows tiled horizontally

Tiling Vertically attempts to place them all next to one another.

Figure 5 – Several module windows tiled vertically

Note Some IQ Central module windows cannot be resized in the environment. These modules will not tile using the Windows menu commands.


17

Cascaded Windows The Cascade Windows command in the Window menu automatically arranges all open, non-minimized modules so that the upper left corners are arrayed in a cascade. This window sort is perhaps the most useful, as it immediately makes all open windows available. The desired module can be brought to the front by simply clicking on its title bar.

Figure 6 – Several module windows arrayed in a cascade

Switching Between Open Modules There are several ways to switch between open modules within IQ Central:

Mouse selection - Of course, the most obvious method to switch between modules is to just click on the module to bring it to the front. However, if the front module is maximized, this may be a bit difficult, so there are a couple other options...

Windows menu - If you go into the Windows menu, the bottom of it lists all of the currently open modules. Selecting a window there will bring it to the front. Or you can use the keyboard shortcut ALT-W,# (where a # is listed in the menu for each window.)

Status bar - Each open module window is also shown as an item in the IQ Central status bar. Just click on the desired module entry to bring its window to the front.


18

Using the Toolbars This is an overview of the toolbars in IQ Central. The toolbars were extensively changed in version 1.2 of the software. Previously, the toolbars were linked to the three levels of security and function (Operations, Maintenance, Administration), but they now are grouped functionally. By default, all users first see only the Standard and Devices toolbars when opening IQ Central. Each user account can select which toolbars will be visible when the application is launched, and where each toolbar is docked. Toolbars can be docked on any of the four sides of the IQ Central window, or they can float above the application. The current state of the toolbars is saved each time a user logs out or shuts down the program.

Activating/Deactivating Toolbars There are a couple of ways to change which toolbars are visible in IQ Central.

Go to the Tools menu and open the Toolbars list. In this listing you can toggle which toolbars are visible and which are hidden

Right-click anywhere on the open toolbars or toolbar regions to see the same list of available toolbars as shown in the Tools menu. (Shown below) Select which toolbar to activate or deactivate.

Figure 7 – Right-click in the toolbar area to open the toolbar selection menu

When a toolbar is floating, you also have the option to close it by clicking on the close button that appears at the upper right corner of its window. (Shown below)

Figure 8 – Closing a toolbar


19

Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar, along with the Devices toolbar, is one of the default toolbars for new user accounts. This toolbar provides links to the modules that are most commonly used by IQ Central users.

Figure 9 – Standard Toolbar

Table 3 – Buttons on the Standard Toolbar Button Command

Status (Device Status)

Map View

Reports

Devices

Device Groups

Connections

Map Data (Polling Configuration)

Refresh Server Polling

Upload/Download for Controller devices

IQ Central Help


20

Map Configuration Toolbar The Map Configuration toolbar provides access to the most common commands or functions associated with managing and using the map interface in IQ Central. The exact buttons that appear on this module are slightly different depending on whether you are using IQ Central with BMP Mapping or IQ Central with GIS Mapping.

Figure 10 – Map Configuration Toolbar (for the BMP version of IQ Central)

Figure 11 – Map Configuration Toolbar (for the GIS version of IQ Central)

Table 4 – Map Configuration Toolbar Button Command

Map Management

Place Icon on Map

Intersection Displays

GIS Layer Group (appears in GIS version only)

GIS Layers (appears in GIS version only)

GIS Zoom Settings (appears in GIS version only)

Map Data (Poll Data Configuration)

Dynamic Objects (STMP Polling)

Refresh Server Polling


21

System Maintenance Toolbar The System Maintenance toolbar groups together ten of the most commonly used IQ Central administration tools.

Figure 12 – System Maintenance Toolbar

Table 5 – System Maintenance Toolbar Button Command

Archive and Restore

FTP Data

System Scheduler

Device Type Data

Device Type Polling

Size Event Log

Extended Logging

SNMP Device Security

Icon Management

Link Icon to Device Type


22

User Administration Toolbar The User Administration toolbar provides access to the four modules used to manage user accounts within IQ Central.

Figure 13 – User Administration Toolbar

Table 6 – User Administration Toolbar Button Command

User Administration

Access Levels

Profiles

Currently Logged On Users

Intersection Toolbar The Intersection Toolbar provides two buttons to access the modules to manage traffic intersection hardware in IQ Central.

Figure 14 – Intersection Toolbar

Table 7 – Intersection Toolbar Button Command

Upload/Download

Intersection Display


23

Message Sign Toolbar The Message Sign Toolbar provides links to the nine most common modules for interact with Message Signs.

Figure 15 – Message Sign Toolbar

Table 8 – Message Sign Toolbar Button Command

Message Sign Control

Scenarios & Amber Alerts

Sign Summary

Bulk Operations

Brightness Control

Master Fonts

Edit Schedules

Error Logs

SNMP Device Security


24

Camera Toolbar The three buttons in the Camera toolbar link to the three modules used to configure, connect to, and use NTCIP-compatible cameras within IQ Central.

Figure 16 – Camera Toolbar

Table 9 – Camera Toolbar Button Command

Camera Control

Camera Browser

Video Connections


25

Devices Toolbar The Devices toolbar, along with the Standard toolbar, is one of the default toolbars for new user accounts. While the Standard toolbar links to the most used general interfaces in IQ Central, the Devices toolbar provides links to the most often used device-specific controls.

Figure 17 – Devices Toolbar

Table 10 – Devices Toolbar Button Command

Camera Control

Camera Browser

Message Sign Control

Scenarios & Amber Alerts

Sign Summary

Bulk Operations

Upload/Download


26

IQ Central Status Bar The IQ Central status bar, located at the bottom of the main IQ Central window, provides feedback to the user about the operation of the application. The left end of the status bar shows the current state of several of IQ Central's subsystems. The right end of the toolbar is used to show which modules are open within IQ Central.

Subsystem Status Bar The left end of the basic IQ Central Status bar, as shown below, displays information about seven of IQ Central's subsystems.

Figure 18 – Subsystem status in the IQ Central status bar

Data Manager Status The Data Manager is a Windows service that runs in the background and supports the operation of IQ Central. It functions as the agent that makes sure data gets stored and retrieved from the IQ Central database correctly. This status icon in the Status Bar shows several states that are possible for the Data Manager.

Table 11 – Data Manager Status icons

Icon Description of Status

Normal status. The Data Manager is up and running normally and the database is synced with IQ Central.

Critical Change. When the icon blinks orange, it indicates that the user has made a change to either the Device table or the Connections table. Normally, syncing of the database will occur automatically and you will not see this alert. However, IQ Central may occasionally need to be restarted to get the database back in sync with the updated device and connections lists. After a restart of IQ Central, the Data Manager will return to the Normal state.

Not initialized. This is typically a short-lived state that indicates IQ Central has just started up, but has not yet gotten the Data Manager up and running.

Initializing. In the process of starting up the Data Manager.


27


Reference Lost. When the icon blinks red, this indicates a lost connection to the Data Manager. This could be caused by the local Data Manager being stopped, or by a lost connection when referencing a Data Manager across a network.

Hovering Over the Icon for a Tooltip If you hover the mouse over the Data Manager icon, no matter what state it is in, it will display a tool tip showing some additional detail about the current state of the Data Manager.

Figure 19 – Data Manager icon tool tip

Viewing the Data Manager Quick History Double-clicking on the Data Manager toolbar status icon will display a window in IQ Central showing some information about the current up-time history of the service. The following window shows a typical Quick History display for the Data Manager, displaying the current state, how many times the Data Manager has had to be restarted by the Windows Services manager since IQ Central was last launched, and the time that IQ Central last lost its connection with the Data Manager. These pieces of information can be very helpful if you are having intermittent problems with the Data Manager or IQ Central.

Figure 20 – Quick History of Data Manager operational status


28

NTCIP Server Status The NTCIP Server is an IQ Central service that runs in the background and is maintained by the Microsoft Windows™ Services management tool. The NTCIP Server functions as the traffic cop that directs and manages message traffic between the various parts of IQ Central and the field hardware. The NTCIP Server status icon appears second from the left in the Status Bar. It indicates the current operational state of the service.

Table 12 – NTCIP Server Status icons


Normal status. The NTCIP Server is up and running normally, meaning communications are operating nominally .

Not initialized. This is typically a short-lived state that indicates IQ Central has just started up, but has not yet gotten the NTCIP Server up and running. Or it could indicate that

Initializing. In the process of starting up the NTCIP Server.

Reference Lost. Indicates a lost connection to the NTCIP Server. The Windows Services tool should automatically restart the NTCIP Server as soon as it detects that it has gone down. If it does not, you can either restart IQ Central, or go into the Services panel to start the service manually.

Hovering Over the Icon for a Tooltip If you hover the mouse over the NTCIP Server icon, no matter what state it is in, it will display a tool tip showing some additional detail about the current state of the service. These kinds of tooltips also appear automatically if the reference to the service is lost at any point or when the service is restarting.

Figure 21 – Tooltip for the NTCIP Server status icon

Viewing the NTCIP Server Quick History Double-clicking on the NTCIP Server status icon opens a window that shows some information about the current up-time history of the service. The following window shows a typical Quick History display for the NTCIP Service, displaying the current state, how many times the NTCIP Server has had to be restarted by the Windows Services manager since IQ Central was last launched, and the time that IQ Central last lost its connection with the NTCIP Server. These pieces of information can be very helpful if you are having intermittent problems with communications or with IQ Central in general.


29

Figure 22 – Quick History of NTCIP Server operational status

Alarm Status

Figure 23 – Alarm status icon in the IQ Central status bar

When alarm conditions are defined within IQ Central, the Alarm server constantly monitors device traffic and the state of IQ Central itself to monitor when alarm conditions become active. The number and type of alarms that are active in the program determine how the Alarm Status icon appears in the status bar. In the example shown above, at least one Warning level alarm has been detected.


30

Table 13 – Alarms Status icons, from lowest alert level to highest


No Alarms currently active.

Alarms detected. The highest priority of those detected is Informational.

Alarms detected. The highest priority of those detected is a Query alarm.

Alarms detected. The highest priority of those detected is a Warning alarm.

Alarms detected. The highest priority of those detected is a Critical alarm.

Hovering Over the Icon for Alarm Statistics If you place the cursor over the Alarm status icon, you will be presented with a tooltip that shows the number of alarms that are active at each severity level, as shown here. This tooltip bubble also shows what the most recently detected alarm was, and when it was detected.

Figure 24 – Alarms details displayed in a tooltip

Viewing Alarm Details Simply double-click on the alarm status icon to open the full Alarms Status window, from which the operator can navigate to various filters and views of the active and historical alarms, as well as print out the alarm data. Details about using the Alarms Status window are described in "Chapter 11: Alarm Monitoring".

Status of Devices Responding and Connected The white box in the status bar with the two numbers in it is used to indicate the overall state of communications with the devices that are connected to IQ Central. The right number


31

indicates whether or not the NTCIP Server was able to open the specified Connection channel to the device or not. The left number indicates that the device is responding to requests from central.

Figure 25 – Device status in the Status bar

Note that the 'connected' number (on the right) does not indicate that the device is actually awake and responding at the other end . . .just that the communications channel defined for that device can be opened successfully.

And the 'responding' number (on the left) assumes that all good connection channels are responding until a device fails to respond to a request from IQ Central. So if a device's connection is open, but IQ Central doesn't send any messages requiring a response from that device, the 'response' number assumes that the device is responding. It only marks a device as unresponsive if it doesn't reply to an actual request for communications.

Hovering Over the Icon for a Tooltip If you hover over the Device Connection/Responding box in the Status bar, IQ Central will present a tooltip that shows more details about the numbers of device, their respective comms states, as well as information about the total number of devices configured in the system, and if any of the device have been forced offline by a request from IQ Central.

Figure 26 – Device Status tool tip

Viewing Device Connection Details If you double-click on the Device Status box in the IQ Central Status bar, you will open the normal NTCIP Device Status module. The operation of the Device Status module is described in Chapter 2.


32

System Date and Time The current date and time of the IQ Central system are displayed in the Status Bar of the application, as shown below. These are the values of date and time that are set for the operating system. To change these values, use the normal operating system tools for setting date and time (Start menu > Control Panel > Date/Time).

Figure 27 – Current date and time as displayed in the IQ Central status bar

Note The controls to configure how IQ Central synchronizes the clocks in field devices with its central clock are provided in the Device Log Polling module. Refer to the "Log Polling" section in Chapter 10 for details.


33

Logged In User

Figure 28 – Current User icon and label in the IQ Central status bar

The middle of the IQ Central status bar display information about who is currently logged into the system on this workstation. Only one person can be logged in on a workstation at a time. Each user account is given one of three security level settings: Operator, Manager, or Administrator. The icon that appears next to the user name indicates which access level the logged in user is granted.

Table 14 – Logged In User icons

User Icon User account access

This user account has level 1 access, also known as 'Operator' access.

This user account has level 2 access, also known as 'Manager' access.

This user accant has level 3 access, also known as 'Administrator' or 'Full' access.

Module Navigation in the Status Bar When one or more modules are open within IQ Central, more items appear to the right of the basic status bar fields. These are buttons for each module that is currently open within the IQ Central framework. Here, you can see status bar buttons for the NTCIP Device Status window, the Device View module showing the Standard View, and Layers module. The currently selected module is highlighted and outlined.

Figure 29 – Module Navigation in the Status bar

You can use these module buttons to switch between the modules. When a module is selected here, the module is brought to the front in the IQ Central window. Or another way to switch between modules is to use the numbers in front of each module listing. For example, to switch to the NTCIP Device Status window, one would press ALT-W,1 in this situation.

Also notice that at the bottom-right corner of the status bar is the window resize control. These three slanted lines indicate where a mouse can grab the window and resize the overall IQ Central window.


34

Keyboard Shortcuts The following keyboard shortcuts will help a user navigate the IQ Central interface more quickly.

Table 15 – Keyboard Shortcuts Key Combination Function Description

F1 Context Sensitive Help Opens the help system to the topic appropriate for wherever you currently are within IQ Central

F2 Status Module Opens the device Status module F3 Map Module Opens the Map module F4 Incident Management Opens the Incident Management module F6 Scenarios/Amber Alerts Opens the Scenarios and Amber alerts module F7 Alarms Status Opens the Alarms Status module Ctrl-F4 Close module Closes whichever module is open and selected in the IQ Central

window Alt-F4 Close IQ Central Closes the IQ Central application (after requesting verification) Alt-F,x Close IQ Central Closes the IQ Central application (after requesting verification) Alt-F,L Log on Log into a user account (when IQ Central is already running) Alt-F,O Log off Log out of a user account (but keep IQ Central running) Alt-F,p Change password Change the password of the currently-logged in user account Alt-V,s Status module Opens the device Status module Alt-V,m Map module Opens the Map module Alt-V,i Incident Management Opens the Incident Management module Alt-V,u User Comments Opens the User Comments module Alt-V,r Reports Opens the Reports module Alt-V,t Timeout Change the value of the user inactivity Timeout value (5 to 60

minutes) Alt-D,n Add new device Create a new device Alt-D,i,u Intersection

upload/download Upload and download module for intersection controllers

Alt-D,m,c Sign Control Opens the message Sign Control module Alt-D,m,a Scenarios/Amber Alerts Opens the message sign Scenarios and Amber Alerts module Alt-D,m,m Sign Summary Open the message Sign Summary module Alt-D,m,o Bulk operations Opens the message sign Bulk Operations module Alt-D,m,b Brightness control Opens the message sign Brightness Control module Alt-D,m,f Edit Master Fonts Opens the message sign Edit Master Fonts module Alt-D,m,s Edit Schedules Opens the message sign Edit Schedules module Alt-D,m,e Error Logs Opens the message sign Error Logs module Alt-D,c,c Camera Control Opens the camera Control module Alt-D,c,b Camera Browser Opens the camera Browser module Alt-D,c,v Video Configuration Opens the camera Video Configuration module


35

Key Combination Function Description

Alt-M,m Map management Opens the Map Management module Alt-M,p Place Icon on map Opens the Place Icon on Map module Alt-M,i Intersection display Opens the Intersection Display module Alt-M,g GIS Layer Groups Opens the GIS Layer Groups module Alt-M,L GIS Layers Opens the GIS Layers module Alt-M,z GIS Zoom Settings Opens the GIS Zoom Settings module Alt-M,o,m Polling option map data Opens the Realtime Polling settings module Alt-M,o,d Map Dynamic Objects Opens the STMP Polling module to allow for creation, editing and

deletion of dynamic map objects Alt-M,o,r Refresh Server Polling Refreshes the polled data on map view objects Alt-T,c Connections Opens the Connections editing module Alt-T,d Devices Opens the Devices editing module Alt-T,v Archive and Restore Opens the database Archive and Restore module Alt-T,u,a Add/delete user Opens the module to add or delete user accounts Alt-T,u,L User Access Levels Sets the security access levels for a user account Alt-T,u,p User profiles Opens the Profiles module Alt-T,u,c Currently Logged-in

users Shows a list of the users who are currently logged into IQ Central

Alt-T,L,d Logging option: Device types

Open the module to edit device types in the event log

Alt-T,L,s Logging option: Max log size

Sets the maximum size of the event log

Alt-T,L,e Extended logging Activates or deactivates the Extended Logging option Alt-T,a,i Icon management Allows a user to add graphical icons to IQ Central so they can then

be used in the interface, either on maps or elsewhere. Alt-T,a,t Device Types Opens the Device Type editing module Alt-T,a,L Link Icon to Device

Type Allows a user to link an icon to a particular type of devices

Alt-T,a,b BlockBuilder Opens BlockBuilder, the advanced IQ Central database editing tool. (This tool is normally deactivated for customer installations.)

Alt-T,a,f FormBuilder Opens FormBuilder, the advanced IQ Central form editing tool. (This tool is normally deactivated for customer installations.)

Tile Vertical Tile Horizontal Cascade Windows Alt-W,# Switch to open window

# If you press a number after pressing the Alt-W key combination, this will switch the IQ Central focus to that numbered open module.

Alt-H,i IQ Central Help System Opens the help system you are currently reading Alt-H,a About IQ Central Shows the About window for IQ Central, showing release version

info and system information.


36

Automatic Log Off If there is no activity within IQ Central for a set period of time, a Log Off warning window will appear. This warning tells the current logged-in user that they will be logged off automatically, unless they take some action. If you do not want to be logged off, click on the ‘Stay Logged On’ button within one minute of the form displaying.

The period of inactivity time that the system waits before prompting the user is entered on the Timeout form, which can be accessed in the menus at View > Timeout.

Profiles Module Profiles allow you to set different access levels for different levels of operators. Profiles function as an advanced version of user access level assignment. We recommend that users avoid modifying any of the Profiles settings.

Closing IQ Central Closing the application will automatically log off the current user, close any open modules, and close all open connections that are currently active with devices. Whenever you attempt to close the application, you will be presented with a dialog box asking you to verify that you wish to proceed and actually close down. This prevents a user from accidentally exiting the program when it wasn't intended.

To close IQ Central, you can use any of the following methods:

Go to the File menu and choose Exit

Or, Press Alt-F4 from anywhere in the program

Or, Press Alt-F, followed by the 'x' key, from anywhere in the program

37

Chapter 3 – Managing Devices and Connections

Most of IQ Central's modules deal with a single type of field device , such as the modules that handle messages signs, weather stations, traffic controllers, etc. But when it comes to device creation, management, and interconnection within IQ Central, all types of devices are managed using the same global management tools. Devices are created, and then each is linked to a single communications channel, or 'connection'.

The Device Manager, Connection Manager, and Device Type Manager modules are applications that allow the user to add to, delete from, and edit the contents of the lists of items of their particular type. Devices are then assigned to be of a particular Device Type (connecting to a record in the Device Type list) and to use one of the communications channels from the Connections list.

Devices can also be grouped together into IQ Central Groups. These Groups are used in the Alarms, Map View, and Time Sync modules to perform actions on all members of the Group with a single command.

Keeping all of your devices synchronized with the same time information is important for accurate reporting and Time-of-Day operations. A powerful interactive Time Sync module is used to retrieve and set device clocks on device-by-device basis, or by device type, or grouping.

And once devices have been configured with all of their parameters, or as a method to analyze the current configuration of your devices, IQ Central provides a capability to export a device database to a PDF file. The resulting file can be formatted to suit your needs, including an added header photo or logo, font and layout options, and the file can be saved to disk or printed to create a paper record of your device configurations.

Figure 30 – Assigning a Device to a Connection and a Device Type


38

Introduction to Device Management The Device Management module, also known as Overview of Devices within IQ Central, has the following columns of information about each device:

Name -- Entered in the Device Add/Edit window. Used to place and track the device throughout IQ Central.

Description -- Entered in the Device Add/Edit window.

Type -- The device type, as pulled from the Device Types list, which can be modified using the Device Type Management module. Add new device types is non-trivial and should not be done without assistance from a Peek Traffic representative.

Connection Name -- The communications channel that will be used by this device, as selected from the Connections list.

Address -- The drop address used to connect with this device.

Master -- The master address used to connect with this device.

<Blank> -- The second column from the right edge of the window is used to show which physical communications channel is used for this Connection. If it is an Ethernet connection, this column shows the IP address. If it's a serial connection, it shows the COM port being used.

<Blank> -- The rightmost column shows further detail about the communications channel. If the connection is an Ethernet channel, this shows the port number that will be used when connecting with the device. If its a serial or modem channel, it shows the baud rate that will be used to communicate with the device.

This module lists all the individual devices that have been configured within IQ Central. This list shows all devices, grouped by device type. It also provides a general environment where you can add, edit, and delete individual devices.

Devices are sorted automatically by the contents of the first column, the device name. The list cannot be sorted by any of the other fields. Columns can, however be resized by moving the mouse over one of the vertical edges of the column header box. When the cursor becomes a left-right arrow, click and drag to resize the column.


39

Add/Edit Device Window This window is used to enter or make changes to the key details about a Device .

Figure 31 – Add/Edit Device Window

Adding a Device These are the steps to add a new device to the IQ Central database. (This process requires that the Device Type has already been defined in the database.)

1. Open the Device Management module. This can be done by going to the menus and choosing Devices > Add New Device, or by pressing Alt-D, followed by the letter 'n'.

2. From the Device Management module (i.e. 'Overview of Devices,) open the Enter/Edit Device Window by pressing the Add Device button at the bottom of the window.

3. The Enter/Edit Device Window will appear. Fill in the Device Name field with a unique name.

4. Fill in the Description field.

5. Select a Device Type from the pull-down list.

6. Select the Connection that will be used to communicate with the device in the field.

7. Fill in the Drop Address. If the device type is a Master traffic controller, fill in the Master Address as well. If the connection is an Ethernet type, make sure both of these addresses are set to "0" (Zero).

8. When you are finished describing the device, be sure to click on the Save button before you close the window.


40

Note: If you choose to close the window without saving the device, you will be prompted to verify that you agree to throw away the changes. If you select No in this window, you will be returned to the Enter/Edit Devices window and your previous entries will be preserved. If you select Yes to the query, your settings will be discarded and the Enter/Edit Device window will close.

9. Close the Enter/Edit Device window.

10. Verify that the new device appears as expected in the Device Management module's device list.

This completes the creation of a new device. Next, you will need to attach it to a map view, or simply monitor it in the other modules of the IQ Central system.

Editing a Device If you need to change information for a particular Device , highlight that Device in the list and click on the Edit Device Button. Or you can double-click on the device in the list that you wish to edit. Either of these options open a window that will allow you to make the desired changes. When you are finished describing the device, be sure to click on the Save button before you Close the window. If you choose to close the window without saving the device, you will be prompted to verify that you agree to throw away the changes. If you select No in this window, you will be returned to the Enter/Edit Devices window.

Deleting a Device If you want to delete a Device , highlight that Device in the list and then click on the Edit Device Button. That will open the detail window that will allow you to verify that you have selected the correct Device. Then click on the Delete Button to remove that Device.


41

Viewing Status - The NTCIP Device Status Module This module allows the operator to see the overall connection state and history of all of the devices in IQ Central. It uses a hierarchical tree view on the left for device type and device item selection, and a detail window on the right to show information about whatever device level is selected in the left window.

There are a couple of ways to launch the NTCIP Device Status Module:

Use the NTCIP Device Status module icon in the toolbar:

Use the keyboard shortcut F2.

Go to the menus and choose View and then Status.

Click on the screen below to see details about the top level view in the NTCIP Device Status module: (This is the first screen that appears when you open the module.)

Figure 32 – Device Status module

Double-clicking on a device type, in either the device tree or the device type list, will update the status window to show devices of only that type.

Double clicking on an individual device, in either the device tree or in the status screen for a single device type, will update the status display to show connection and event log details for that particular device.

Note If any user is adding a new device while this module is open, the list will not automatically update to show the new device. To see new devices in the NTCIP Device Status module, you will first need to restart IQ Central.


42

Status of All Devices of a Type In the NTCIP Device Status module, selecting a particular device type will change the status list on the right to show all of the devices of that type that are currently configured within IQ Central. Generally, this screen shows the descriptive name of each of the devices, and connection status of the device, the logical communications status of the device, and whether or not polling is enabled on that device. This same information is shown here, no matter what type of device is selected.

This screen can also be used to proceed into a status screen for a single device. Just double-click on the row for that device in the status display on the right, or single-click on the device's name in the tree on the left. Either method will work. When you do this, you will be taken to the Single Device status window.

In this example, the device type 'Overhead Sign' has been selected in the tree list. As you can see, two devices are currently configured in this system with the device type 'Overhead Sign':

Figure 33 – Device Status module for a single device type

Single Device Status - Device Logs Selecting an individual device in the tree list of the NTCIP Device Status module, or choosing a single device in the Device Type view, will open a status screen for the individual device. This window shows the device logs, online history and communications stats for this device. The resulting data can be filtered by a date range, and grouped into bins of different time lengths.


43

Figure 34 – Device Status module - Device Logs pane

Single Device Status - Comm Stats An alternate display in the NTCIP Device Status module is the Comm Stats view. This is one of the three detail views of device status (along with Device Logs and Online History) that is available within that module.

This screen shows the same eleven fields, no matter what device or connection type is selected for that device. These communications parameters provide details about any comms errors or event messages that have occurred while IQ Central was attempting to connect with and share data with the selected device. The six fields on the left are for general communications error types. The five fields on the right are specifically concerned with comms errors that deal with dynamic objects (i.e. STMP data.)

Click on the sample screen below for more details about the interface of the Status:Comm Stats display.

Figure 35 – Device Status module - Comm Stats pane

Single Device Status - Online History Another alternate display in the NTCIP Device Status module is the Online History view. This is one of the three detail views of device status (along with Device Logs and Comm Stats) that is available within that module.


44

This screen shows the same four fields, no matter what device or connection type is selected for that device. These historical count records provide details about how many times connect or disconnect events occurred while IQ Central was attempting to communication with the selected device. The settings for what exactly make up an 'Online', a 'Marginal', or an 'Offline' event are defined in the Device Log Polling module. (For details about these settings, see the section describing the 'Counts' parameters.)

Figure 36 – Device Status module - Online History pane


45

Connections

Overview of Connections Module This module displays a listing of all the communications channels that have been configured within IQ Central. It also provides the primary environment where you can add, edit, or delete these connection channels.

Adding a Connection If you want to add a new Connection, click on the Add Connection Button at the bottom of the window. This will open a window where you can define the details about the new Connection. Begin by choosing the Connections pull-down list and choosing Add new... from the list at the top of the window. When you are finished defining the channel, be sure to click on the Save button before you Close the window. If you choose to close the window without saving the values, you will be prompted to verify that you agree to throw away the changes. If you select No in this window, you will be returned to the Enter/Edit Connections window. More detail.

Editing a Connection If you need to change information about a particular Connection channel, highlight the row for that connection within the list and click on the Edit Connection Button. That will open a window that will allow you to make the required changes. Or you can double-click on the connection row in the list to open the Connection edit screen. When you are finished making the desired changes to the channel, be sure to press the Save button before closing the window. If you choose to close the window without saving the values, you will be prompted to verify that you agree to throw away the changes. If you select No in this window, you will be returned to the Enter/Edit Connections window.

Deleting a Connection If you want to delete a Connection, highlight that Connection in the list and then click on the Edit Connection Button. That will open the detail window that will allow you to verify that you have selected the correct Connection. Then click on the Delete Button to remove that Connection.

Editing a Connection This window contains the details that you can edit for any Connection. The following fields can be edited:


46

Device Types Module The list of device types shows up in the Overview of Devices module, in the Device Type pull-down list. This module provides an editing window where existing device types can be edited or deleted, or new device types can be created. This module also allows you to change the icon that is attached to a particular type of device when it is used in the Map view.

IMPORTANT Changing Device Types requires that you have a Master Table in

the database to which the new or modified device type can attach. This Master Table is the database version of the NTCIP MIB for that kind of equipment. A Master Table is not a trivial thing to create, and should not be edited or added to by users. It is an extremely bad idea to delete a device type, particularly if you have any devices of that type installed in your system. If you delete the device type for a set of devices that you are using, you will not be able to recover the devices. The type will need to be recreated, and the devices themselves will need to be re-attached to the newly recovered device type.

Adding a Device Type To add a new device type, you will have to have a Master Table for the new device already stored in the database. If that is in place, open the Device Types Module, and select New Device Type... from the top of the Device Type pull down list. Fill in the details, attach the device type to its Master Table, and attach an icon to the device. When you are finished, be sure to click Save before exiting the module, or your work will be discarded. Finally, click Close to shut down the Device Type module.

Editing a Device Type We strongly recommend that you not edit an existing device type except for changes to the Name, Description, or Icon. Changing these things will not impact current devices that are linked to this device type. If you wish to edit an existing device type, open the Device Types Module, select the type of device you wish to modify from the top pull-down list, and make the desired changes. When you are finished, be sure to click Save before exiting the module, or your work will be discarded. Finally, click Close to shut down the Device Type module.

Deleting a Device Type Device types can be deleted from the Device Types Module, however DON'T DO IT. Deleting a device type from IQ Central will cause major problems to your existing central database.


47

Managing Device Groups The Device Groups module was added to IQ Central to make it possible for operators to combine devices together into user-defined sets, called 'Groups'. Currently, Groups are only used in the Alarms, Map Viewer, and Time Sync modules. They can be used to:

Select and manipulate a set of devices in the Map View module

Define alarms for a set of devices

Set or monitor the time sync status for a set of devices

Send a central override pattern change to a group of controllers within the Map Viewer Groups are created, modified, and deleted using the Device Groups module. There are several ways to launch the Device Groups module. The only requirements for the creation of a Group is that the devices you wish to add to your groups need to exist within IQ Central before you attempt to add them to a group.

Launching the Device Groups Module From the IQ Central main window, you can launch the Device Groups module by:

Going to the Tools menu and choosing Device Groups or

Clicking on the Device Groups button (shown at right) in the Standard toolbar

The Device Groups module can also be launched from within the Device Configuration module by clicking on the Groups button at the bottom of the window.

Managing Device Groups The Device Groups module was added to IQ Central to make it possible for operators to combine devices together into user-defined sets, called 'Groups'. Currently, Groups are only used in the Alarms, Map Viewer, and Time Sync modules. They can be used to:

Select and manipulate a set of devices in the Map View module

Define alarms for a set of devices

Set or monitor the time sync status for a set of devices

Send a central override pattern change to a group of controllers within the Map Viewer Groups are created, modified, and deleted using the Device Groups module. There are several ways to launch the Device Groups module. The only requirements for the creation of a Group is that the devices you wish to add to your groups need to exist within IQ Central before you attempt to add them to a group.

Launching the Device Groups Module From the IQ Central main window, you can launch the Device Groups module by:

Going to the Tools menu and choosing Device Groups or

Clicking on the Device Groups button (shown at right) in the Standard toolbar The Device Groups module can also be launched from within the Device


48

Configuration module by clicking on the Groups button at the bottom of the window.

Using the Device Groups window When you open the Device Groups window, as described in the Managing Device Groups topic, it provides a single window interface that lets you create, rename, add and remove devices, and delete device groups. The interface is divided into three main areas. The top left of the window shows a list of all of the currently configured groups in IQ Central. The right side of the window presents a list of the devices that belong to the selected group (in three different panes, showing three ways to see the device list) and in the bottom left corner of the window is an area to create, rename, delete, and save changes to the selected group or groups.

Figure 37 – Parts of the Device Groups window

Current Groups List This list displays all groups that have been defined within IQ Central. The list can be sorted by Group Name (ascending or descending order) or by Group Description (ascending or descending order) by clicking on the column header. When an item in this table is highlighted, the Group Name and Group Description fields in the boxes below the table are editable copies of these settings. And the Device List window automatically changes to show what devices are currently assigned to the selected group.

Devices List This part of the Device Groups window provides a variety of ways to view which devices are attached to the currently selected group. When a group is chosen in the Current Groups list to the left, this area changes to show which devices belong to the group (checks) and which do not (unchecked.) The only thing required to add a device to a group is to check the box next to it in this window. The three tabs provide three methods of organizing the devices. The default view is 'By Device' which shows a simple list of all devices in the system in


49

alphabetical order. The 'By Type' view shows a hierarchy of devices, divided by device types. Again, check-boxes indicate which are in the group and which are not. Finally, the 'By Group' view shows a simple listing of only those devices that belong to the group. The Select All and Select None buttons at the bottom of the devices list provides a quick way to check all of the boxes, or to clear all of them.

Description of Selected Group These two fields are used to name a new group, or to rename an existing group. It's important to realize that editing the name in the Group Name box will NOT create a new group unless you first press the New Group button. Making an edit in these fields will simply change the name of the currently selected group, or its description.

New Group Button Click this button to create a new item in the Current Groups list. Edit the name and description in the fields above to define the group. And be sure to save your changes.

Save Group Button This saves any changes that were made to the currently selected group. This includes changes to its name, description, or its list of included devices.

Delete Group Button This button will delete the currently highlighted group, after you verify that you do actually wish to delete it. The deletion will not be finalized until you save the change. There is no way to undelete a group once it has been removed. It is possible to delete a group that has devices assigned. Any devices assigned to the group will simply be removed from the group and the group's name and description will be deleted from the IQ Central database.

Save All Button This button will save all changes to any groups that have been modified. It saves group names, descriptions, and member devices.

Close Button This button closes the Device Groups module. If changes have been made to any of the group names, descriptions or device lists, then it will prompt the user whether they wish to save the changes or not. If the user chooses No, the changes will be discarded.


50

Creating a Group A Device Group can be created at any time by following these simple steps:

1. Open the Device Groups module (by choosing Device Groups in the Tools menu, or by clicking on the Device Groups button in the Standard toolbar.)

2. Press the New Group button. This will create a new entry at the top of the Current Groups list above.

3. Type in a name for the group. This can be any length up to 150 characters, but it should be kept fairly short so it will show up correctly in the Alarms window and in the Map Viewer. (Note: Do NOT type the new name until you've pressed the New Group button, or you will simply rename the currently highlighted existing group in your list.)

4. Press the Save Group button.

5. Go to the Device List on the right side of the window and pick which devices you want in the new group. These selections will have no impact on previous group assignments.

6. Press the Save Group button again.

7. Close the Device Groups module.

Figure 38 – Be sure to Save the new group once you've created it


51

Modifying an Existing Group Changing a device group, either its name, its description or its members list, will not affect the operation of any of IQ Central's modules. Alarms and Maps will automatically update to reflect the new group memberships. Follow these steps to modify an existing group:


2. Select the group you wish to modify in the Current Groups list on the left side of the window.

3. To change the group's name, just highlight the current name in the Group Name field and type in the new name.

4. To change the group's description, highlight the current description in the Group Description field and type in the new value.

5. Look to the Device List on the right side of the window. (Make sure that either the By Devices or By Type panes is selected.) Check the boxes next to those devices that you wish to belong to this group. Uncheck the boxes next to the devices that you wish to remove from the group.

6. Press the Save Group button to save your changes.

7. Close the Device Groups module.

Figure 39 – Be sure to Save the changes to the group


52

Deleting a Group A Device Group can be deleted at any time without effecting the devices that are members of the group.


2. Select the group you would like to delete from the list of groups on the left side of the window

3. Press the Delete Group button

4. When asked, verify that you would like to delete the group.

5. Close the Device Groups module and verify that the changes are saved.

Figure 40 – The Delete Group button in the Device Groups module

53

Chapter 4 – Traffic Controller Management Although there are other sections of the IQ Central interface that deal with specific aspects of working with traffic intersection controllers within IQ Central (such as the System Scheduler for retrieving controller log files), this section will discuss the tools and methods used to configure controllers for interactive usage on the IQ Central Maps. This means providing an interface to define how a controller will appear at various levels of magnification on one of your map displays, and also providing controls to directly interact with the controller from within the map environment, namely via the upload and download of controller settings between IQ Central and the device in the field.

Interactive Upload/Download Module – This module allows an IQ Central operator to retrieve, modify and send out configuration data to controllers in the field. This module was extensively enhanced in the version 1.2 release, and its speed and capabilities were further improved in versions 1.3 and 1.4

Configure Intersections Module – An editor to design how an intersection appears when viewed in the IQ Central map environment, and how this view changes as you zoom in on the exact intersection.

Example Network – An example of a typical traffic control network (click on the image at right to open)

Performing a Central Override – Using the IQCentral software to take direct control of a traffic controller or master controller

Coordination Checking – Programming traffic controllers for coordinated operation can be a confusing operation. As an assisting tool, IQ Central v1.6 added the capability to test a coordination setup before it is used in a live device


54

Traffic Network - Example Topography This diagram shows how a typical traffic control network might be set up between IQ Central and different kinds of traffic controllers in the field.

Figure 41 – Example IQ Central traffic controller network

Chapter 4 – Traffic Controller Management

55

Supported Traffic Controllers At the time of this release (IQ Central version 1.7), the software provides complete interactive upload, download, status display, and log retrieval capabilities for the following traffic controllers:

Peek IQ ATC Controllers

Multisonics 820A Controllers

Multisonics OSAM-32 Master Controllers

Peek 3000E Controllers

Peek M3000 Master Controllers

Peek LMD 9200 Controllers

Traconex 390CJ Controllers

Traconex TMM-500 Master Controllers

Transyt EL Controllers

Transyt EL Master Controllers

Note The usage of IQ Central with controllers and master controllers in the Multisonics, Peek, Traconex, and Transyt families requires that a hardware translator box act as a communications intermediary between the central software and these non-NTCIP compliant controllers. Peek Traffic sells IQ Connect translator units and cards to serve this function. Contact your local Peek Traffic representative for more information, or go to the Peek website (http://www.peektraffic.com). Peek's IQ ATC controller line, as well as any other true NTCIP compliant devices, can be used directly with IQ Central and do not require an IQ Connect translator.

IQ Connect Hardware IQ Connect is a line of electronic protocol translators that provide communications links between the NTCIP speaking IQ Central, and legacy traffic controllers and masters that use proprietary communications protocols. Peek Traffic sells two hardware versions of IQ Connect: a standalone 'box' and a controller card version. The card unit only works with 3000E controllers. The standalone versions will work with all of the masters and controllers supported by IQ Central.

Note Native NTCIP speaking controllers, such as the IQ ASTC and IQ ATC controllers do not require a translator.


56

Multisonics Hardware

IQ Central can be used to manage two types of Multisonics controllers in the field:

820A Controllers

OSAM-32 Master Controllers

Note 820A Controllers can only be managed while operating under an OSAM-32 Master. There is currently no IQ Connect option for an independent 820A local controller.

Parameter Fields of the 820A Controller In the Upload/Download module, the entire 820A/OSAM controller database can be viewed, saved to the central IQ Central database, edited, copied between controllers, and transmitted to a controller. The following parameter groups, pages, and fields are available for the 820A in the IQ Central Upload/Download module. For more details on programming the 820A controller, refer to the Multisonics 820A Controller Operating Manual.

Table 16 – 820A parameters editable in the Upload/Download module Group Page Parameter

Command Selection

Manual Free Plan

Manual Commands Manual Commands

Manual Coord Plan

Allowable Phases Pedestrian Phases

Flashing Walks

Density Phases

Anti-Backup Phases

Intersection Phasing

Yellow Arrow Omit

Exclusive Ped Phase

Non-Actuated I Phase

Non-Actuated II Phase

Simultaneous Gap Phases

Simultaneous Max Phases

Last Car Passage Phases

Min Yellow Time

Phase Features

Red Revert Time

Pre-Flash Phases

Setup

Soft Flash

Flash Red Phases


57

Group Page Parameter

Flash Yellow Phases

Flash Red Overlaps

Flash Yellow Overlaps

Flash Ped Don't Walks

Flash Ped Clearance

Minimum Flash Time

Post-Flash Yellow Time

Post-Flash Red Time

Post-Flash Phases

Start In State

Start Up Times

Start Up Phases

Start Up State

Start Veh Calls

Startup

Start Ped Calls

Parent Phases

Green Extension Time

Yellow Change Time

Red Clear Time

Overlap 1 Type

Overlap 1 Force Output

Overlap 1 Flash OL Green

Overlap 1 Flash OL Yellow

Overlaps

Overlap Flash OL Red

Intersection Shape

Southbound Thru (set to Phase #)

Southbound Turn (set to Phase #)

Westbound Thru (set to Phase #)

Westbound Turn (set to Phase #)

Northbound Thru (set to Phase #)

Northbound Turn (set to Phase #)

Eastbound Thru (set to Phase #)

Eastbound Turn (set to Phase #)

Southbound Ped (set to Phase #)

Westbound Ped (set to Phase #)

LCD Setup

Northbound Ped (set to Phase #)


58


Eastbound Ped (set to Phase #)

Override Min Recall

Override Max Recall

Override Ped Recall

Detector 1 (to 16) Phases

Detectors

Detector 1 (to 16) Locking (On/Off)

Ped Walk Time

Ped Clear Time

Add Time Per Actuation

Initial Time

Maximum Init Time

Extension Time

Min Ext Time

Time Before Reduction

Time to Reduce

Max Green Time

Max II Green Time

Maximum Step

Maximum Limit

Yellow Limit

Phase Timing Phase Timing

Red Clear Time

Ring 1 Seq (Steps 1-10)

Ring 2 Seq (Steps 1-10)

Min Recall

Max Recall

Ped Recall

Soft Recall

No Skip

Conditional Service

Non Actuated

Dual Entry

Red Rest

Max II

Ped Recycle

Act. Rest-in-Walk

Free Plans Free Plans 1 - 16

Detector Plan No.


59


Active Sp Function Circuits

5-Section Prot. Only

Delay Time (Detectors 1-16)

Inhibit Delay (Detectors 1-16)

Stretch Time (Detectors 1-16)

Type (Detectors 1-16)

Switching (Detectors 1-16)

Alt. Phase Association (Detectors 1-16)

Revert-if-Green Phases (Detectors 1-16) Revert-in-Queue Phases (Detectors 1-16) Queue Detector Presence (Detectors 1-16) Speed Trap Type (Detectors 1-16)

Loop Length (1 Loop) (Detectors 1-16)

Avg Vehicle Length (Detectors 1-16)

Dist. Between Loops (Detectors 1-16)

Detector Plans Detector Plans 1 - 8

Associated 2nd Loop (Detectors 1-16)

No Activity (Detectors 1-12)

Constant Call (Detectors 1-12)

Erratic Output (Detectors 1-12)

Diagnostic Recalls (Detectors 1-12)

Detector Diag Detectors 1-24

Diag Green Ext (Detectors 1-12)

Keyboard Beep

Password

Enable Security

LCD Contrast

Parameters

LCD Backlight (On/Off)

Special Function 1-4 Polarity

Special Function 1-4 Type

Special Functions

Special Function 1-4 Mode

Dim Green

Dim Yellow

Dim Red

Misc

Dimming

Dim Walk


60


Dim Don't Walik

Dim Flash Don't Walk

Dim Overlap Green

Dim Overlap Yellow

Dim Overlap Red

Disable AOR (Yes/No)

DST Enabled

Spring Day of Week

Spring Weed of Month

Spring Month

Spring Hour

Fall Day of Week

Fall Week of Month

Fall Month

DST Adjustment

Fall Hour

Cab Flash Monitor Polarity Hardware Configuration

RTS/CTS Delay tic time

Control Flags (Preempt 1-5)

Preempt Output (Preempt 1-5)

Override Min Greens (Preempt 1-5)

Override Walks (Preempt 1-5)

Override FDW (Preempt 1-5)

Delay Time (Preempt 1-5)

Hold Time (Preempt 1-5)

Clear 1 Phases (Preempt 1-5)

Clear 1 Overlaps to Darken (Preempt 1-5) Clear 1 Green Time (Preempt 1-5)

Clear 2 Phases (Preempt 1-5)

Clear 2 Overlaps to Darken (Preempt 1-5) Clear 2 Green Time (Preempt 1-5)

Preempt Phases (Preempt 1-5)

Interval 5 Flash (Preempt 1-5)

Preempt Standard Preempt

Interval 5 Overlaps to Darken (Preempt 1-5)


61


Interval 5 Min Time (Preempt 1-5)

Interval 5 Max Time (Preempt 1-5)

Interval 6 Yellow Time (Preempt 1-5)

Interval 7 Red Time (Preempt 1-5)

Return Phases (Preempt 1-5)

Return Veh Calls (Preempt 1-5)

Return Ped Calls (Preempt 1-5)

Enabled (Yes/No) (Preempt 1-5)

Phases (Preempt 1-5)

Max Hold Time (Preempt 1-5)

Max Queue Time (Preempt 1-5)

Low Priority Preempt

Queue Clear Time (Preempt 1-5)

TO Reference, hour

TO Reference, Minute

Offset Reference

Ext Coor Type

Num of Cycles of No Sync

Num of Cycles of Detector Accumulation

Num of Minutes of Detector Accumulation

Coordination Dual Entry Phases

Coord Constants Coord Constants

Detector Accum. Interval

Perm Strategy

Omit Strategy Max

TO Location

3% Window

Stretch 3% By

GBP Omits

Early Return

Once Around

Cycle Length

Offset

Min Cycle Length

Max Cycle Length

Coord Plans Coordination Plans 1 - 48

External Sync


62


Active SF

Detector Plan #

Protected Only Enable

Calculated Walk

Rest-in-Walk

No Skip

Sequence (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Start Perm (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Accumulated Split (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10) Call Options (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Split Type (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Reservice (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Allow Ped (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Events 1-200 Events 1 - 50

Day Plans 1-16 Day Plan Event #

Week Plans Day Plan # (Sunday to Saturday)

Year Plans Week Plan # (Week 1-54)

Month

Day

Year

Exception Days 1 - 30

Plan #

New Year's Day

M L King Day

President's Day

Good Friday

Easter Monday

Memorial Day

Independence Day

Labor Day

Columbus Day

Veteran's Day

Thanksgiving Day

Day after Thanksgiving

TIC

Holidays

Christmas Eve


63


Christmas Day

Day after Christmas

New Year's Eve

Remop Protocol

Remop Baud Rate Div.

Remop Tel #1

Remop Tel #2

Dial Retries

Modem Init String 1

Remop Options

Modem Init String 2

Intersection Name Name

Power Up

Bad Coordination Plan

Bad Free Plan

Hardware Timeout

Coordination Error

Cyclic Error

Stop Time Detected

Flash Feedback Detected

Battery Backup Clock Bad

Cabinet Door Opened

EEPROM Write Timeout Error

SF1-6 Feedback Detected

MCE Detected

Detector No Activity

Detector Constant Call

Detector Erratic Output

Detector Repair

Detector Diag. Active

Error Logging

Clear Failed Detector

Baud Rate Divisor

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Comm/System

Printer Setup

Parity


64


Print Columns / Line

Printer Protocol

End-of-Line Delay

XON Char

Auto Line Feed

Print Form Controls

Print Det Plans

Print Coord Plans

Print TIC Events

Print TIC Day Plans

System Type

OSAM Local Address

System

System Baud Rate

Parameter Fields of the OSAM-32 Master This topic has not been created yet.


65

Using Peek Hardware with IQ Central IQ Central can be used to manage four types of PEEK controllers in the field:

IQ ATC Controllers

3000E Controllers

M3000 Master Controllers

LMD 9200 Controllers

Parameter Fields of the 3000E Controller In the Upload/Download module, the entire 3000E controller database can be viewed, saved to the central IQ Central database, edited, copied between controllers, and transmitted to a controller. The following parameter groups, pages, and parameters are available for the 3000E controllers in the IQ Central Upload/Download module. For more details on programming the 3000E controllers, refer to the 3000E Operating Manual .

Table 17 – Peek 3000E Controller parameters editable in the Upload/Download module Group Page Parameter

Startup Phases

Startup Interval

Startup Flash Time

Startup Red Time

Ring 1 Sequence

Ring 2 Sequence

Ring 3 Sequence

Ring 4 Sequence

Cophase 1 - 8 Sequences

XPed 1 Phase

Xped 1 Output

Xped 1 Soft Return

Xped 2 Phase

Xped 2 Output

Xped 2 Soft Return

Default Sequence

Xped 1 In

Xped 1 Ped Detector 1 (Y/N)


Xped 1 TOD Input (Y/N)

Controller Sequence/Startup

Xped 2 In


66




Xped 2 TOD Input (Y/N)

CNA 1 - 4

Walk Rest Modifier

Inhibit Max

Ped Recycle

Flash Walk

Flash Dont Walk -> Yellow

Flash Dont Walk -> Red

Phase Modes

Conditional Ped

Min Green (Seconds)

Passage (Seconds)

Yellow (Seconds)

Red (Seconds)

Walk (Seconds)

Ped Clear (Seconds)

Max 1 (Seconds)

Max 2 (Seconds)

Max 3 Limit (Seconds)

Max 3 Adjust (Seconds)

Time Before Reduction (Seconds)

Time to Reduce (Seconds)

Min Gap (Seconds)

Added Initial / Actuation (Seconds)

Max Initial (Seconds)

Min Recall (Phase(s))

Max Recall (Phase(s))

Ped Recall (Phase(s))

Soft Recall (Phase(s))

Detector Non-Lock (Phase(s))

Vehicle Omit (Phase(s))

Ped Omit (Phase(s))

Phase Times (Timing Plans 1 - 4)

Walk Rest (Phase(s))


67


Max 2 (Phase(s))

Red Rest (Phase(s))

No Skip (Phase(s))

Dual Entry Enable (Yes/No)

Dual Entry Phase 1 - 16

Dual Entry

Dual Entry Time Plan 1 - 4

Cond. Serv. by Input (Yes/No)

Phase 1-16 CSV

Cond. Serv. by Plan (Yes/No)

Conditional Service

Cond. Serv. by Plan Phase 1 - 4

Auto Ped Clear with MCE Ped Options

Enhanced Ped

Veh Assignments Call Phases (Detectors 1-64)

Ped Assignments Phases (Detectors 1-8)

Mode (for Detectors 1-64) Modes

Lock (for Detectors 1-64)

Delay (Seconds) (for Detectors 1-64)

Str/Stp (Seconds) (for Detectors 1-64)

Delay (Seconds) (Time Plan 2, Detectors 1-12)

Detector Times

Str/Stp (Seconds) (Time Plan 2, Detectors 1-12)

Delay Inhibits Plans 1-3 Inhibits for Det 1-12

Detector Switching Enable (Yes/No)

Detector Copy Group 1 Enable (Yes/No)

Detector Copy Group 2 Input Enable (Yes/No)

Copy During Phase Green Green 1 (Phase Greens 1-16)

Copy During Phase Green Green 2 (Phase Greens 1-16)

G1C: From Phase (Phases 1-16)

G1C: To Phase (Phases 1-16)

G2C: From Phase (Phases 1-16)

G2C: To Phase (Phases 1-16)

Switch from Phases (Detectors 1-64)

Detectors

Switch and Copy

Switch to Phases (Detectors 1-64)


68


Erratic Enable (Yes/No)

Start Absence Mon Hour

End Absence Mon Hour

Lock Times (Detectors 1-64)

Absence Times (Detectors 1-64)

Min Presence (Detectors 1-64)

Erratic Counts (Detectors 1-64)

Loop Length (Detectors 1-64)

Fail Max Recall Phase (Detectors 1-64)

Fail Max Recall Times (Phases 1-16)

Ped Detector Diag > Absence (Ped detectors 1-8)

Ped Detector Diag > Lock (Ped detectors 1-8)

Fail Monitoring

Ped Detector Diag > Erratic (Ped detectors 1-8)

System Sensor Assignments Assignment (Phases 1-16)

Parent Phases (OL A-P)

Flash Enabled (OL A-P)

MOD PHS (OL A-P)

Delay Enabled (OL A-P)

Overlap Type (OL A-P)

Green (Seconds) (OL A-P)

Yellow (Seconds) (OL A-P)

Red (Seconds) (OL A-P)

Delay (Seconds) (OL A-P)

Assignments and Types

Flash Code (OL A-P)

Start Up Interval

O/L Card Enable (Yes/No)

Alternate Flash Rate (flashes/minute)

Ped Overlap Min Walk (Seconds)

Startup, Card, Alternate Flash

Ped Overlap Min Ped Clear (Seconds)

Enable (Yes/No)

Phase Yellow (OL A-P)

Phase Next (OL A-P)

Overlaps

Double Clear (Trailing)

Group Yellow (OL A-P)


69


Group Next (OL A-P)

Release Phases (OL A-P)

Mode (OL A-P)

Enable (Y/N)

Pedestrian Overlaps

Phase Assign (OL A-P)

Ped Overlap Enable (POL A-H)

Deact-Delay (Seconds) (POL A-H)

Advance Warning Logic

Cond Overlap (POL A-H)

Enable Leading Overlaps (Yes/No)

Advance Green Enables

Lead Overlap Green Time (Seconds)

Phase Next (POL A-H)

Advance Green Overlaps`

Group Next (POL A-H)

Dynamic Omits (Groups 1-2) (Y/N)

Omit Phase (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)

If Phase On (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)

If O/L Green on Group (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)

Dynamic Recall (Groups 1-2) (Y/N)

Recall Phase (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)

Recall If Phase On (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)

Dynamic Omit/Recall

Recall If O/L Green on Group (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)

UCF Override Hold (Yes/No)

UCF Test A or B

UCF Last

UCF/Soft Flash

UCF Exit

Density Enable (Yes/No)

Last Car Passage (Yes/No)

Density Enables

Density Phase Enable

Simult. Gap Out Enable (Yes/No) Simultaneous Gap Out

Simult. Gap Phases

Max Outs to Adjust MX3 (Phases 1-16)

Controller - Enhanced

Max 3 Setup

Gap Outs to Adjust MX3 (Phases 1-16)


70


Red Revert Time (Seconds)

Passage Sequence Enabled (Yes/No)

Min Red Revert = 2 Seconds (Yes/No)

Ext Start Override Preemeption (Yes/No)

Passage Sequence/ Red Revert/ Preemption Override

Preemption Override Stop Time (Yes/No)

Dim Red

Dim Yellow

Dim Green

Dim Dont Walk

Dim Ped Clear

Dim Walk

Overlap Red

Overlap Yellow

Overlap Green

Overlap Dont Walk

Overlap Ped Clear

Dimming

Overlap Ped Walk

Lead/Lag Pattern 1-8, Set 1-4, Mode 1-2

UCF Soft Flash (Yes/No)

Phases to Wig

Phases to Wag

Phases to Yellow

Overlap to Wig

Overlap to Wag

Soft Flash

Overlap to Yellow

Cycle Source

Free Source

Split Source

Flash Source

Offset Source

Selection Source

Inter TOD Revert (Seconds)

Ref to end of Main St. (Yes/No)

Use % for Phase Allocation (Yes/No)

Coordination

Basic Options/ Offset Seek

Use % for Offset Entry (Yes/No)


71


Use Fixed Force Offset (Yes/No)

Permissive Type

Offset Seeking Mode

Cycle Length (Seconds) (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Offset 1 (Seconds) (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)



Cycles / Offsets

Min Length (Seconds) (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Coord Phases Phases (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Phase Allocations Phase Allocations (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Cycle/Offset/Split/Free to TOD Circuits COS/F to TOD#(1-10)

Enhanced Perm (Yes/No)

Invert Free (Yes/No)

Central Override (Yes/No)

Split Matrix (Yes/No)

No PCL Offset Adj. (Yes/No)

4 Splits/Cycle (Yes/No)

No Early Coord Ped (Yes/No)

Yield Percentage

EGB Percentage

RGB Percentage

Operating Options

# Cycles to out of step

`Sync Source Cycle Sync Options

Cycle 1-6

Auto Perm and FO (Yes/No)

Ped Perm (Seconds)

Start (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Manual Permissives

End (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Coord Enhanced

Manual Force Offs Force Offs (Phases 1-16) (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)


72


Cycles per Period

Min Force Offs

Splits 1-4 Phases

Adaptive Split

Offsets 1-5 (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Enable Split Matrix (Yes/No)

4 Splits/Cycle (Yes/No)

Split Matrix

Adaptive Split Inhibits (Offsets 1-5) (Cycles 1-6)

4 Splits/Cycle (Yes/No) No Early Release

No Early Release phases (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

4 Splits/Cycle (Yes/No) CS to Time Plan

Time Plan # (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

COS to Lead/Lag Configs 1-10

Number of Sync Pulses (Cycles)

No Offset Line (Seconds)

Offset to Free

Multi Offsets (Seconds)

Day Plans Day Plans 1-300

Circuit Plans Active Circuits (Circuits 1-4) (Plan 1-50)

Sunday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Monday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Tuesday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Wednesday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Thursday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Friday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Week Plans

Saturday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Year Plans Week Plans (Weeks 1-53)

Exception Days Exception Days 1-50

Circuit Overrides Circuit State (On/Off/TOD) Ckts 1-255)

Spring (Month of Year / Week of Month) Daylight Savings

Fall (Month of Year / Week of Month)

Mode

Time Clock Reset Hour

Time of Day (TOD)

Sync Reference

Time Clock Reset Minute


73


Interrupter

Pulses per Cycle

Time Dep Ref HH (Cycles 1-6)

Time Dep Ref MM (Cycles 1-6)

Run Enable (Yes/No)

Railroad (Yes/No)

PE Input Lock (Yes/No)

Early PE Out (Yes/No)

Max Intervals

Override Flash (Yes/No)

Go to Higher PE (Yes/No)

NEMA Priority (Yes/No)

Hold Only (Yes/No)

User Priority

Double Clear Overlap Enabled (Yes/No)

Lead Overlap Enabled (Yes/No)

Delay Overlap Enabled (Yes/No)

Force Off to 1st Interval (Yes/No)

User Interval Data for Overlap (Yes/No)

Enable Coord During Cyclic Int (Yes/No)

Duration Time (Seconds)

Delay Time (Seconds)

Reservice Time (Seconds)

Omit All last portion of Delay (Seconds)

Fail Max Time (Seconds)

Double Clear Overlap Mode (Seconds)

Red Revert Override (Yes/No)

Green

Walk

Ped Clear

Yellow

Red

Overlap Yellow

Preemption Runs 1-6

Valid Intervals (1-32)


74


Dwell Intervals (1-32)

Fixed Intervals (1-32)

Tenth Intervals (1-32)

Exit Intervals (1-32)

Ped Clear -> Yellow Intervals (1-32)

Exit Mode

Exit Phases

Wig Flash Plans 1-16

Wag Flash Plans 1-16

Master Type

Intersection ID

Master Identification

Master Port

Monitor Port

Central Port

Port 2 Hardware Type

Port 2 Comm Copy

Port 2 Baud Rate

Port 2 Data bits

Port 2 Parity

Port 2 RTS -> CTS

Port 3 Hardware Type

Port 3 Baud Rate

Port 3 Data bits

Port 3 Parity

Port 3 RTS -> CTS

Modem Init string

Phone 1

ID / Comm / Phone

Phone 2

Event Log Call In 1 and 2

Vol Log Sample Period (Minutes)

MOE Log Sample Period (Minutes)

Speed Trap (1-4) Lead Detector

Comm/System Setup

Event / Log Data

Speed Trap (1-4) Trailing Detector


75


Speed Trap (1-4) Distance

Event Log Enable Options

Type 2 I/O Mode

BIU Enables

MMU/Secondary Enables

Channel Assign Phases 1-16

Channel Assign Peds 1-16

Channel Assign Overlaps A-P

Channel Assign Ped Overlaps A-P

Secondary to Secondary 1-16

System Name

Contact Name

Port 2 Physical Address

Port 2 HDLC Group Address

Port 3 Physical Address

Port 1 / HDLC Settings

Port 3 HDLC Group Address

Supervisory Security Code

Restricted Security Code

Intersection Name

EEPROM Loaded w/Keyboard

Unit Config / Security Codes Security Codes

Audio Adjust

Enable Signal Head Program (Yes/No)

Phase Signal Heads (1-16)

Ped Signal Heads (1-16)

O/L Sig Heads (1-16)

Ped O/L Sig Heads (1-16)

I/O Steering I/O Steering

Check Next On Outputs (1-16)


76

Parameter Fields of the M3000 Master This topic has not been created yet.

U.S. Traffic Hardware

Parameter Fields of the ATC Controller In the Upload/Download module, the entire IQ ATC controller database can be viewed, saved to the central IQ Central database, edited, copied between controllers, and transmitted to a controller. The following parameter groups, pages, and fields are available for the IQ ATC controllers in the IQ Central Upload/Download module. For more details on programming the IQ ATC controllers, refer to the IQ ATC CBD Operating Manual or the IQ ATC TS-2 / 2 Operating Manual.

Table 18 – IQ ATC Controller parameters editable in the Upload/Download module Group Page Parameter

Enabled (Yes/No)

Auto Flash Entry Phase (Yes/No)

Auto Flash Exit Phase (Yes/No)

Non Actuated 1 (Yes/No)

Non Actuated 2 (Yes/No)

Non Lock Detector Memory (Yes/No)

Min Vehicle Recall (Yes/No)

Max Vehicle Recall (Yes/No)

Pedestrian Recall (Yes/No)

Soft Vehicle Recall (Yes/No)

Dual Entry (Yes/No)

Simultaneous Gap Disable (Yes/No)

Guaranteed Passage (Yes/No)

Actuated Rest in Walk (Yes/No)

Conditional Service Enable (Yes/No)

Phase Options (PHases 1 - 16)

Added Initial Calculation (Yes/No)

Walk (Seconds)

Ped Clear (Seconds)

Min Green (Seconds)

Passage (Seconds)

Max 1 (Seconds)

Max 2 (Seconds)

Yellow (Seconds)

Phase

Phase Timing (Phases 1 - 16)

Red Clear (Seconds)


77


Red Revert

Added Initial (Seconds)

Max Initial (Seconds)

Time Before Red (Seconds)

Cars Before Red (Seconds)

Time to Reduce (Seconds)

Reduce By (Seconds)

Min Gap (Seconds)

Dynamic Max (Seconds)

Dyn Max Step (Seconds)

Start Up

Sequences 1 - 16, Rings 1-4 (phase)

Ring Number for Phases 1-16

Sequence Sequence

Concurrency phases for Phases 1-16

Detector Options

Call Phase

Switch Phase

Delay (Seconds)

Extend (Seconds)

Queue Limit (Seconds)

No Activity (Minutes)

Max Presence (Minutes)

Erratic Counts (Counts/Minute)

Fail Time (Seconds)

Vehicle Detectors (Detectors 1 - 64)

Reset (Yes/No)

Call Phase

No Activity (Minutes)

Max Presence (Minutes)

Ped Detectors

Erratic Counts (Counts/Minute)

Alarms (Detectors 1-64)

Reported Alarms (Detectors 1-64)

Detector

Status

Alarms (Pedestrian Detectors 1-8)

Vol/Occ Setup Period (Seconds)

Sequence Number

Volume (Count) (for Detectors 1-64)

Vol/Occ

Vol/Occ Report

Occupancy (%) (for Detectors 1-64)


78


Start Up Flash (Period/State)

Auto Ped Clear (State)

Backup Time (Seconds)

Unit Unit

Red Revert (Seconds)

Correction Mode

Maximum Mode

Force Mode

Pattern Cycle Time (Patterns 1-48)

Pattern Offset Time (Patterns 1-48)

Pattern Split Number (Patterns 1-48)

Coord Setup

Pattern Sequence Number (Patterns 1-48)

Split Time (Seconds)

Split Mode

Coordination

Splits 1 - 16

Split Coord Phase (Yes/No)

Link

Delay (Seconds)

Min Duration (Seconds)

Min Green (Seconds)

Min Walk (Seconds)

Enter Ped Clear (Seconds)

Track Green (Seconds)

Dwell Green (Seconds)

Max Presence (Seconds)

Track Phase

Dwell Phase

Dwell Ped

Exit Phase

Non-Locking Memory (On/Off)

Override Flash (On/Off)

Override Next Preempt (On/Off)

Preempts Preemptions 1 - 6

Flash Dwell (On/Off)

Control Source (Phase or Overlap)

Control Type

Flash Yellow (Yes/No)

Channel Assignments Channel Setup (Channels 1 - 16)

Flash Red (Yes/No)


79


Flash Alt Half Hertz (Yes/No)

Dim Green (Yes/No)

Dim Yellow (Yes/No)

Dim Red (Yes/No)

Dim Alt Half Line Cycle (Yes/No)

Type

Included Phases

Modifier Phases

Trail Green (Seconds)

Trail Yellow (Seconds)

Overlaps Overlap Setup

Trail Red (Seconds)

Device Present (Yes/No)

Frame 40 Enable (Yes/No)

Status

TS 2 Port 1 TS 2 Port 1 (BIUs 1-8)

Fault Frame

DeviceNode

Make

Model

Version

Configuration Configuration (1-3)

Type

Timebase Setup ASC Pattern Sync

Pattern

Auxiliary Function 1



Timebase

Actions 1 - 48

Special Functions

Global Time

Daylight Savings

Time

Local Time Differential (Seconds)

Month

Day

Date

Time Base Schedules 1-32

Day Plan (Number)

Scheduling

Day Plans 1 - 32 Day Plan (Hour) (Events 1 - 16)


80


Day Plan Minute (Events 1 - 16)

Timebase Action (Events 1 - 16)

Traconex Hardware

Using Traconex Hardware with IQ Central IQ Central can be used to manage two types of Traconex controllers in the field:

• 390CJ Controllers

• TMM-500 Master Controllers

Note: 390CJ Controllers can only be managed while operating under a TMM-500 Master. There is currently no IQ Connect option for an independent 390CJ local controller.

Parameter Fields of the 390CJ Controller This topic has not been created yet.

Parameter Fields of the TMM-500 Master This topic has not been created yet.

Transyt Hardware

Using Transyt Hardware with IQ Central IQ Central can be used to manage two types of Transyt controllers in the field:

• 1880EL Controllers

• 3800EL Master Controllers

Note: 1880EL Controllers can only be managed while operating under a 3800EL Master. There is currently no IQ Connect option for an independent 1880EL local controller.

Parameter Fields of the 1880EL Controller This topic has not been created yet.

Parameter Fields of the 3800EL Master This topic has not been created yet.

Configuring Intersection Display on Maps


81

Configure Intersections Module When you've got your maps configured and your devices and connections set up, the next logical step is to make your devices show up on your maps. For intersection devices (traffic controllers and masters), there is a special module included with IQ Central to define how the device will appears in the map environment.

The Configure Intersection module is the very powerful interface used to define what an intersection will look like on a map. It can be used to define what 'All devices' look like on a map, how a particular 'Type' of device will appear, or it can be used to define a unique appearance for each individual device in your database. And it also does this for each of the 'zoom levels' that are available for 'All devices', 'Device type', and individual devices. A traffic controller, for instance, can have up to four different appearances, based on what 'zoom level' the map is currently showing. Zoom 1 is displayed when the map is showing a large area and you only want the device to show up with minimal detail. At the other end of the spectrum, Zoom 4 is displayed when the map is zoomed into a small area around the device, and you will probably want the device to show a great deal of detail about its current operation. The Configure Intersection module allows you to set up how the device will appear in all of these situations.

Note The actual point where the map switches from one Zoom level display to another is not defined in this module. If you are using the BMP version of mapping, the zoom level is defined when you build the static map. If, on the other hand, you are working with GIS maps, the zoom level is defined using a special Device Zoom Levels module.

Launching the Configure Intersection Module The Configure Intersection module can be opened in a number of ways:

Go to the Maps menu and choose Intersection Displays.

Click on the Configure Intersections icon (shown at right) on the Map Configuration toolbar

The Basic Steps to Set Up an Intersection When one wants to define how a particular device , or all devices of Device Type, will appear on the maps, follow these steps:

1. Make sure the device, the map, and the connection to the device have all been configured properly.

2. Open the Configure Intersection module.

3. Select the Device Type you are working with from the pull-down list at the top of the window.

4. Next, pick the particular device you are interested in, using the 'Devices for the selected Device Type' drop-down list. (If you want to define a default view for this Device Type, skip this step.)

5. Select the Zoom level you wish to define.

6. Make sure that the Settings by option is set to Device Specific.


82

Use the icon buttons and the preview display in the middle of the Configure Intersection window to set up the display as you wish it to be. Start by defining a background, and then add control and signal icons.

Make sure each icon is linked to a data field. This will allow you to later poll for those data items, which will then be updated on your maps. (Note: Version 1.4 of IQ Central added the very useful Auto Populate Polling tool to the Device Specific view of Configure Intersections. This will allow you to populate the intersection with all of the icons you wish it to have, then press Auto Populate Polling for IQ Central to fill in the data fields for all of those icons.)

When you are finished defining the intersection and zoom level, click on the Save button to store the settings to the database.

Notes about Opening the Configure Intersection module

The Configure Intersection module can be opened in a couple of ways: Go to the Maps menu and choose Intersection Displays or click on the Configure Intersections icon (shown at right) on the Map Configuration toolbar


83

The Configure Intersection Interface

Figure 42 – Overview of the Configure Intersection interface

Adding an Icon to an Intersection Within an intersection display, each data object from the device is represented by by an icon, or control. The terms are used interchangeably in the interface. They just mean a graphical element that is linked through the communications channel to a data object within the field device. When the state of the data object changes, the icon is either hidden or displayed. Some icons, like status icons, can also be used to present text values from the device within the intersection display.

To add an icon to the display, it's just a matter of selecting the type of icon being inserted by selecting from the array of icon buttons in the Configure Intersection interface. This array of buttons changes, depending on what zoom level is being edited. The following table shows what buttons are available for each zoom level. Each increase in zoom level increases the number of icon types that can be placed on the intersection display, since one normally wants to provide more details as one zooms into map view of the intersection.


84

Table 19 – Icons by Zoom Level in the Configure Intersection module Zoom level Available Icon buttons

Zoom 1

Zoom 2

Zoom 3

Zoom 4

Each of these buttons presents a drop-down list of all of the icons of a particular type that are available, based on the type of device with which you are working. Select a background first, and then add icons for the signals and indicators that you want to appear on the map view for a device.

Table 20 – Icons used to Configure an Intersection Button Purpose

Add a background image. When creating a new intersection display, this should be selected first. (Zoom 2, 3, 4 only)

Add a simple status dot (changes color based on object value) (Zoom 1 only)

Green phase icon (Zoom 2, 3, 4 only)

Yellow phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Red phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Vehicle detector (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Pedestrian signal indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Don't Walk signal indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Pedestrian Clearance signal indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Status field icon (Zoom 2, 3, 4 only)

Label text icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Pedestrian Call indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)


85

Button Purpose

Green Overlap phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Yellow Overlap phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Red Overlap phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Phase ON indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Phase NEXT indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Intersection ONLINE indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Intersection Flash indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Intersection Failed indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Alarm indicator (Zoom 2, 3, 4 only)

After an icon button is pressed (or a particular item is selected from the pull-down list of an icon button) a default graphic appears in the middle of the preview display area, in the right half of the Configure Intersection module. You can click and drag this default icon to locate the signal against the background image.

Changing the Appearance of an Intersection Icon The controls to change the appearance of an intersection icon appear in the middle left portion of the Configure Intersection window.

Figure 43 – Selecting an image for an intersection element

The main control that you have over the appearance of an icon is what image file will be used to represent the data object. IQ Central can use files of type .bmp (the default), .jpg, .gif, or .wmf. IQ Central comes with a library of icons from which you can choose, or you can provide your own icons. The only requirement for this is that IQ Central must be able to locate the image files whenever it is launched.

With only a couple of exceptions, all of the icon types are simple ON/OFF indicators that are linked to the status of one simple binary variable. When the linked data is ON, the icon


86

appears in the intersection. When the bit is OFF, it is hidden. A phase green icon is a good example of this type of behavior.

Changing the Graphic File for an Icon To change the image that is attached to the icon, click on the icon in the preview area. (Make sure you have the correct icon selected by referring to the text label that appears above the preview window.) You can then either type in the path to the new image file, or you can use the Browse button to locate the file in your file system.

Note It may be easier for you to find the image you want by switching to the Thumbnail view in the Browse window, and also make sure you are viewing files of type ALL . . . otherwise you will only see the .bmp image files on your system.

Intersection Icon Image Library IQ Central is installed with a large collection of image files that can be used within the Intersection Configuration module. These include many intersection background images, as well as a couple of different styles of arrows and other signal indicators. These image files are stored in the IQ Central\Device Icons\Intersection\ directory, wherever IQ Central was installed on your system. (The default install location is C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\Device Icons\Intersection\.)

Linking Intersection Icons to Data Objects Each icon in the intersection display is linked to a single data object for the device. The bottom left section of the Configure Intersections window is used to define what data is attached to the icon. Below, you can see the general appearance of this area:

Figure 44 – Linking data to an intersection element

a drop down Data list showing all of the data objects in this type of device's master table,

a check box to limit the list to only objects that are typically used for map polling objects (i.e. icon data linkages that will be updated with live data in the map viewer)


87

An area to select a particular section of the data object that is to be linked to the icon. This area changes based on the type of data object that is chosen in the Data drop-down list. ('Select a phase' list in the above example.)

When you select and add many of the icon types, a data object will automatically be selected based on the icon you choose. In the above example, the Data object and phase selection were chosen automatically when the user selected the Green Phase 1 icon. In this case, the particular linkage is to the 'Phase 1' bit of the 'phaseStatusGroupGreens.1' data object.

Another example of the particularity of this area, is shown with this next example, which appears if one inserts an Alarm icon and links to the data object 'alarmGroupState.2':

The exact data object list that appears depends on which type of device is being edited. But a good rule of thumb is that the data objects for traffic controller type devices that are most commonly used for intersection icons are in the 'phaseStatusGroup' portion of the list.

Note that although this interface allows you to connect an icon to a bit of data in the device, that data is not automatically retrieved when you view the device in the Map Viewer. To set up that functionality, you will need to perform the next step, which is to set up map polling for these data objects. Map polling is the repeated, automatic request for the desired data across the device's communications channel. The configuration of map polling is done manually using the Realtime Map Polling module, or you can let IQ Central help you set it up by using the Auto Populate Polling tool.

Figure 45 – Linking to alarmGroupState.2


88

Setting Up Map Polling

Setting Up Map Polling for Intersection Icons Once you have configured the icons and linked data of an intersection display, you will need to perform the next step, which is to set up map polling for these data objects. Map polling is the repeated, automatic request for the desired data across the device's communications channel. This polling allows IQ Central to show the current state of the linked data objects as graphic icons, when the intersection is viewed in the Map View module. The configuration of map polling can be done manually, using the Realtime Map Polling module. Or you can let IQ Central help you set up map polling for the specific icons you've set up in your display, by choosing the Auto Populate Polling tool.

Auto Populate Polling The Auto Populate Pooling tool is a dialog box that can be called from the Configure Intersections module. It inspects the intersection that you have set up in that interface, and based on the icons and data objects that have been placed in the intersection, it attempts to compile a complete map polling list for you.

Figure 46 – Auto Populate Polling button from the Configure Intersections window

Note If you have configured some, but not all, of the map polling for a device, and you decide to launch the Auto Populate Polling tool, the tool will prompt you with the message at right before you can proceed. Be aware that the tool will erase your current map polling entries for this device and attempt to create a completely new table based on the icons currently in the intersection display.

Figure 47 – Auto populate polling warning message

The Auto Populate Polling tool runs, performs its duty, and then reports on how many rows of map polling data have been created for this device. An example is shown below.


89

Figure 48 – Auto populate polling completion message

To view the resulting map polling settings, open the Realtime Map Polling module. Default values are chosen for the polling parameters (such as polling interval and whether to leave the connection open between polls or not.) These settings can, of course, still be edited on a row-by-row basis using the controls in the Realtime Map Polling module.


90

The Upload/Download Interface

Controller Upload and Download Traffic controllers and master controllers are a quite a bit more complex in their data handling needs than most of the other traffic hardware that IQ Central tracks. They not only have their internal configuration settings, which are quite extensive, but they also generate very large sets of logging data, as well as alarm states and interactive controls. Because of this complexity, and the fact that every controller handles all of this data slightly differently from one another, IQ Central has a special module just for sending and receiving configuration parameters from these controllers.

The Controller Upload/Download module provides an environment where a user can connect with a single traffic controller or master, and the display window will fill with tabs and data fields appropriate to that device. And the interface then allows the user to send and retrieve individual parameters to the device in the field, as well as to the IQ Central database. The state of individual fields are indicated by color coded backgrounds. These background colors are used to indicate when the memory settings are the same as the database versions of these settings, and when they are the same as the field device's values.

Figure 49 – Upload/Download Module


91

Launching the Upload/Download Module There are several methods that can be used to open the IQ Central Upload/Download module:

From the Devices menu, open the Intersections group and choose Upload Download

From either the Devices toolbar or the Intersections toolbar, choose the Upload Download icon(shown below)

Or you can open the Upload/Download module from the Map View module. If you right-click on an intersection controller or master controller, you will see a context-menu that looks like the one shown below.Select Upload Download from this menu, and IQ Central will not only load the module, but also automatically select the device that you clicked on in the Map Viewer and load its current database values.

Once open, this module allows you to perform the following functions when working with traffic controllers and masters:

Set single parameter values on a controller

Set whole groups of values on a controller

Retrieving one parameter, a group of parameters, a page, or the entire database from a controller

Sending and receiving one parameter, a group, a page, or the entire database from the IQ Central database

Copying a database from one controller to another (of the same type)

Editing default device parameters

Performing a coordination check

See the related topics below for more details about how to perform these functions.


92

The Upload/Download Interface When the Upload/Download module is launched, it initially presents a blank expression. It needs to be told with which device type and individual device it will be communicating. (The exception to this is if you open the module from the Map Viewer, in which case it will automatically load the groups, pages, and data cells for the selected device automatically.)

Figure 50 – The Upload/Download module with no device selected

The screen is divided into three regions:

the top of the screen is where one selects the device type and device

the middle of the screen is where the device-specific groups, pages, and parameter cells appear

the bottom of the screen provide controls for sending and receiving parts of the controller database to the central database and to the device.

Figure 51 – Interface elements of the Upload/Download module


93

When a device is selected, the middle of the module's window is filled with the data fields for that type of device. The illustration above shows a typical screen for a Peek 3000E controller. In this example, you can see how the groups and pages of data are modeled to match the way the data is stored in this particular type of controller, as well as the color-coded parameter cells in the table, and the data transfer status area just below the data table. Here, we are in the process of sending all pages and groups to the device. (The screen reports that IQ Central is currently transmitting Block 98, which is the coordination phase allocation splits for phases 17 through 24, and the overall transfer is currently 32% complete.)

Memory, the central database, and the device One important thing to keep in mind when working with the Upload/Download module is that you will be working with three copies of the data. There is the copy stored in the IQ Central central database. There is the copy in active memory. And there is the copy stored out in the device's memory. The window here always shows the data stored in active memory. When you first open the module and select a device, IQ Central automatically loads the copy of the database from the central database into active memory. You can also use the controls at the bottom of the screen to copy the entire database from the device into active memory. And then you have the option to make changes to individual cells in the data tables, or you can send and receive groups of data between the central database or the field device. All of this can create some confusion about what parameter values are stored where. This is the reason for the color coding in the data cells, and in the icons that appear on the Group and Page tabs. The purpose of these codes are to indicate when active memory matches and differs from the other two copies of the device database. The way these color codes and icons are used are described in the next topic.

Editing Values in the Tables The tables that appear under the Groups and Page tabs of the Upload/Download module represent all of the configurable settings for the selected device. Simple entries can be editing simply by clicking once and typing the new value. But some fields have more complicated settings, so these provide a special entry dialog box. To access these entry windows, just double click the cell. There are three basic types of data that can be edited on these forms:

Simple Numeric Data To enter a value in a number field, you can either double click on the cell or simply place the cursor in the cell and start typing. In either case, the number entry window will open, allowing you to type in an appropriate value:

Figure 52 – Number entry window

If the field allows a decimal, you can type it in directly. If it is an integer-only field, the dialog box will not accept the decimal point. If you enter a value that is outside of the range for the


94

parameter, IQ Central will report the error as soon as you press OK. Pressing Cancel will retain the value that was stored in the parameter before you started editing it.

These general entry rules (error checking, OK, Cancel) are also true for the other two kinds of data entry.

Phase Input Fields that require you to choose one or more of the traffic phases for a particular parameter provide a special phase entry dialog box, shown at right. You can either use the mouse to check or uncheck the desired boxes, or you can use the keyboard, as follows:

Figure 53 – Phase selection entry window

Table 21 – Keyboard shortcuts to edit phase parameters Key Function

1 Toggles the check box for Phase 1 on and off 2 Toggles the check box for Phase 2 on and off 3 Toggles the check box for Phase 3 on and off 4 Toggles the check box for Phase 4 on and off 5 Toggles the check box for Phase 5 on and off 6 Toggles the check box for Phase 6 on and off 7 Toggles the check box for Phase 7 on and off 8 Toggles the check box for Phase 8 on and off 9 Turns all the check boxes on 0 Turns all the check boxes off

Enumerated Values This is used when there is a fixed list of optional values available for the cell. When a field can only contain a predefined range of values, when you click on that field, a window will open allowing you to select one of those predefined values. An example of this kind of data entry is shown at right, in this case the type of permissive can only be one of three values: Yield, Single, or Multi. Highlight your selection and click OK to accept it. Or you can click the Cancel button to retain the old value.


95

Figure 54 – Example of an Enumerated value selection window

Color Codes and Symbols in the Upload Download Module The Upload/Download module uses color coding, and icons on the page and group tabs, to indicate how data is synchronized between active memory, the central database, and the device. It is important to remember that IQ Central always knows the states of the central database and the active memory versions of the data, but it does not always know what is stored in the device in the field. The color coding assumes that the device version matches the database version, until you actually retrieve data from the device and the module discovers that it does not match.

Color Coding of Table Cells When data is edited or displayed, the color of the data cell background will indicate the if the value matches the central database, and if it doesn't, what is the source of the difference:

a Yellow background (shown at right) indicates that the value in active memory matches the value stored in the IQ Central Database

Figure 55 – Yellow and green cell backgrounds in Upload/Download tables

a dark Green background (also shown at right) indicates that the value has been edited in active memory by the user, and it now differs from the value stored in the central database.


96

a Purple background (shown below) indicates that the value is different between active memory and the central database because it was retrieved from the device, and the value stored in the device doesn't currently match the central database.

Figure 56 – Purple cell background in the Upload/Download module

These cell background colors work with the difference icons that appear on the Group and Page tabs of this window to indicate where data has been stored and how it is currently synchronized with the central database.

Tab Icons When any value is different between active memory and the central database, an icon appears on the tabs containing the data. One of the 'difference icons' appears on both the Page tab and the Group tab containing the data. The icon that appears indicates whether the data is different in active memory, in the device, or in both places. The illustrations at the top of this topic show examples of two of the three icons.

Table 22 – Upload/Download module 'Difference' icons

Icon Meaning

'Different in Active Memory' - The current value of one or more parameters in this page or group of data is different from the central database

'Different in the Device' - The Device's value for one or more parameters in this page or group of data is different from the central database

'Different in Both Places' - The values of one or more parameters in this page or group of data is different from both the central database AND the values stored in the device

Note A group tab that has two pages with different kinds of 'difference' icons showing will display the combined 'differing in both places' icon.


97

Getting Data From the Controller When working with the retrieval or transmission of data objects to and from the database and the controller, it's important to remember that, when you load a device in the Upload/Download window:

All of the tabs together are referred to as the entire database, or 'All'

Each top tab is referred to as a 'Group'

Each second tier tab is referred to as a 'Page'

Individual data objects are referred to as 'Selected Cell(s)'

If you want to retrieve the data that is actually stored in the controller, follow these steps:

1. Open the Controller Upload/Download module by either going to the Devices menu and opening Intersection > Upload/Download, or clicking on the Upload/Download button in the Intersection toolbar (shown at right).

2. Select the required Device Type and the particular Device that you wish to communicate with.

3. If you want to retrieve the entire database from the controller, select All from the Device Values pull-down list in the lower left corner of the Upload/Download window.

4. If you want to retrieve a whole group of data, select the top level tab for the group you want to retrieve, and choose Group from the Device Values pull-down list.

5. If you want to retrieve a single page of data, select the top level tab of the group, and then pick the particular second tier tab that shows the page you want to retrieve. Select Page from the Device Values pull-down list.

Figure 57 – An example of choosing the scope of data to retrieve from the controller

6. If you want to retrieve single data objects, navigate to the group and page where the cells are located. You can select individual data cells, click and drag to select a block of cells, or click on a row or column header to select the whole line of cells.

7. Press the Get button. At this point, IQ Central will communicate with the controller, and request the data. The Upload/Download status bar will show the progress of the data retrieval. When the retrieval is finished, the field values will be displayed in the Upload/Download table.


98

Sending Data to the Controller Sending data to the controller from IQ Central is very similar to retrieving data. Again, the same interface elements represent data objects, pages of data, groups of pages, and the whole database ('All'). If you want to send the data the data that is currently on-screen to a controller, follow these steps:

1. Open the Controller Upload/Download module by either going to the Devices menu and opening Intersection > Upload/Download, or clicking on the Upload/Download button in the Intersection toolbar (shown at right).

2. Select the required Device Type and the particular Device that you wish to communicate with.

3. Set the values that you wish to send to the controller.

4. If you want to send the entire database to the controller, select All from the Device Values pull-down list in the lower left corner of the Upload/Download window.

5. If you want to send a whole group of data, select the top level tab for the group you want to send, and choose Group from the Device Values pull-down list.

6. If you want to send a single page of data, select the top level tab of the group, and then pick the particular second tier tab that shows the page you want to send. Select Page from the Device Values pull-down list.

Figure 58 – An example of choosing the scope of data to send to the controller

7. If you want to send single data objects, navigate to the group and page where the cells are located. You can select individual data cells, click and drag to select a block of cells, or click on a row or column header to select the whole line of cells.

8. Press the Send button. At this point, IQ Central will communicate with the controller, and transmit the data. The Upload/Download status bar will show the progress of the data transmission. When the transmission is finished, the field values will be displayed in the Upload/Download table.

Interacting With the Central Database The data for each controller that is connected to IQ Central will be stored in the IQ Central database. Previously, we showed how to send and retrieve data from a controller using the controls in the 'Device Values' area of the Upload/Download module. Sending and retrieving data to the central database works very similarly, except it uses the controls in the Database Values area at the bottom of the module.


99

Figure 59 – Controls in the Upload/Download module to interact with the IQ Central database

Just as with getting data from the controller and sending data to the controller, getting and sending data to the database involves selecting the scope of data to move, i.e. individual Cells, a whole Page, a whole Group of pages, or the entire controller database ('All'). Once you've select the information to move, just press the Refresh button to pull data out from the central database, or press the Save button to store the data to the central database.

Copying Settings Between Controllers The ability to copy parameters and entire databases from one traffic controller to another was added in IQ Central version 1.3. This is done using a new module, the Copy Device Data module, which can be launched in a couple of ways:

By clicking on the Copy button in the Controller Upload/Download module

Or by going to the Devices menu, opening the Intersections group, and selecting Copy Devices.

Figure 60 – Copy Device Data module

The Copy Device Data module allows one to copy all or part of a traffic controller (or master) database to another device of the same type. Although it will allow you to specify types other than controllers and masters, when you do so, you will be presented with a blank list of options for copying. It's important to remember that this module is merely copying the data entries inside the IQ Central database. You will need to send the new settings out to the destination device after you have copied them here, for them to actually work on the new hardware.

The interface has the following parts:

Database component selection window – The left half of the module's window is populated by a representation of a device database. This area isn't filled in until you make a selection in the Device Type selection list. If the type is one that cannot currently


100

be copied, no database listing will be provided. At the moment, the module only allows copying between devices in the traffic controller category.

Device Type selection – Use this pull-down menu to select the type of device you will be copying from and to. The copying function works only within a device type, meaning you can only copy from one Traconex TMM-500 to another, or from one Peek 3000E to another. But you cannot copy from a Traconex controller to a Peek controller, or from a controller to a master.

Copy From/Copy To fields – These allow you to select which devices will serve as the source of the configuration parameters, and which will serve as the destination.

Select All/Select None buttons – These buttons allow you to check all or remove all the checks from the database component selection window list in the left half of the module's window.

Copy button – Once the source and destination devices are selected, and you've selected which parts of the database to copy using the Database component selection window, press this Copy button to actually copy the data from one device to the other.

Copy progress bar – As the data is copied from one device's database to the other, this progress bar shows how the copying process is proceeding. A complete database copy can take some time, depending on the size of the database, and the speed of the computer.

Close button – This shuts down the Copy Device Data module.


101

Central Override of Traffic Controllers and Masters In the parlance of traffic controllers and masters, an 'override' is a command sent by a central system software package that tells the device to exit from its normal operating mode and switch to the operation specified by the override command. This could be a change from the normal coordination pattern to a new pattern, the entry into a preemption sequence, entry into intersection Flash mode, or any other central-software specified operational change.

Figure 61 – Central Override control window

With the release of IQ Central version 1.4, the capability was added for IQ Central to send central override commands to traffic controllers and masters that have been configured to accept such commands. This is done in IQ Central through the Map Viewer module. Using the Map View module, override commands to change to a new pattern, to free operation, to Flash operation, or to resume Normal operation can be done for one controller, or a group of controllers. When a central override command is requested for a device, IQ Central presents the window shown here, which allows the operator to specify which type of override command to send to the field device. (This capability, naturally, assumes that the communications channel to this device is available and properly configured.)

Note If you decide to send a central override command that puts the intersection into Flash mode, IQ Central will ask you to verify your IQ Central login. This is a security feature, since going to Flash at the wrong time can be a safety concern. It also emphasizes the need for your IQ Central systems administrator to manage and maintain user accounts with traffic network security in mind.


102

103

Chapter 5 – Camera Management IQ Central can manage, monitor and interactively control NTCIP cameras. Using its normal device and connection management tools, IQ Central can be used to configure and communicate with these traffic monitoring cameras. Once a camera is configured and communicating with the central software, you can go further and set up a video communications channel, over which actual video from the device can be routed into IQ Central. The program also includes a couple of dedicated modules for working with NTCIP cameras, allowing a central operator to control focus, zoom, iris, pan, tilt and video detection zones (for cameras that have those control available) using a graphical interface.

If you want to both control and see video from a camera, two communications channels will need to be defined. The simple control channel is the same type of Connection channel as defined for any other type of device in IQ Central. The channel for video from your camera, however, requires that you set up a special 'Video Connection', using the module of the same name within IQ Central. Both steps are described below.


104

Creating a Camera-NTCIP Device Creating a camera device in IQ Central is basically just like creating any other type of device, but we'll walk through the exact steps here for clarity.

1. First, we need to verify that the Camera-NTCIP device type is available in your version of IQ Central. Not all versions of IQ Central include the camera device type. Go to the Tools menu and open the Advanced Options submenu. From this area, select Device Types. This opens the Enter/Edit Device Type window.

2. Open the Device Type pull-down menu from the top of the Enter/Edit Device Type window. Verify that the device type 'Camera NTCIP ' appears in the list. If it does not, you will need to contact your Peek Traffic technical support representative to request assistance in installing this device type.

3. Close the Enter/Edit Device Type window.

4. Open the Overview of Device Configuration window (Devices menu > Add New Device...)

5. Double-click on a blank row to open a new device window.

6. From the pull-down list at the top of the Device window, select New Device... (It appears at the top of the list.)

7. In the Device Type field, select Camera NTCIP.

8. Select the Connection that will be used for the control channel for this camera. (The video channel for the camera will be set up separately, later.) This Connections list is populated by channels that have already been defined in the Overview of Connections module. That process was described previously, and can be read about here.

9. Give the camera a unique Device Name and Description. (Uniqueness is not required by IQ Central, it's just a good idea.)

10. Set the Device Address field or fields. The number of Address fields to fill out and how to populate them depends on the type of device and the type of connection it is using. These fields are important to the proper functioning and routing of SNMP messages (of which, NTCIP is the type being used in IQ Central.) Read 'Setting Device Addresses' for a detailed description of how to set these values.

11. Select the Save button.

12. Click on Close to exit from the Enter/Edit Devices screen.

13. Close the Overview of Device Configuration list.

Before the new device will appear in device lists throughout IQ Central, you will first need to restart the application.

Chapter 5 – Camera Management

105

Camera Control Module This module is only useful if the system has devices installed with a Device Type of "Camera". Opening the Camera Control module allows the operator to change the settings for a camera. The controls within this module that may be used depend on the options available in the selected camera. Before you can make changes to settings, you will first need to select a camera from the pull-down listing.

Once a camera is selected, depending on its available features, you may be able to remotely adjust its zoom, focus, iris, tilt, and pan. And, no matter what the available features are for a particular camera, you can save those that are available as a preset configuration.


106

107

Chapter 6 – Traffic Sign Management IQ Central includes a set of modules specifically designed to allow a central technician to manage variable message signs in the field. Message signs can be configured as devices and placed on maps just like any other device in IQ Central, but the following modules let the operator interact directly with these kinds of devices. This allows IQ Central to be used to upload and download font sets, define and select sign messages, configure message schedules, set up on-board error logging and log retrieval, as well as more advanced features like automatic incident management.


108

Controls to Manage Traffic Signs Traffic sign management can be performed either from the Message Sign toolbar (individual buttons from that toolbar are shown in the table below), or by going to the Devices menu, choosing Message Signs, and choosing the desired module to open.

Table 23 – Toolbar buttons used to perform traffic sign management Button Opens module... Description

Control module This is the interface used to directly view or set the message that appears on a single message sign.

Summary module This module allows one to send and receive multiple data objects (such as time settings, diagnostics commands, sign status, error log setup) for a single selected message sign.

Bulk Operations module This module can be used to perform bulk data transfers (such as all messages or all fonts) to and from a message sign.

Brightness Control module As the name suggests, this interface is used to change the brightness of the message on a message sign, or to view the status of a photo sensor, for signs with those capabilities.

Edit Master Fonts module This is used to retrieve, send, or edit the individual characters of a sign's font files.

Edit Schedules The Sign Scheduler module allows for the set-up of a kind of 'Time of Day' operation for message signs. This module can be used to set up pre-timed message change events, day plans, and weekly and annual schedules.

Error Logs This module is used to configure what sign status data to monitor for error conditions, when to log errors, and also provides an interface to retrieve and clear event logs.

SNMP Device Security Allows SNMP security settings to be configured for a message sign device. (Note: The menu command for this is at Devices > SNMP Device Security.)

Chapter 6 – Traffic Sign Management

109

Sign Control Module The Sign Control form is used to interact with all the signs that you have connected . The current data for that sign will be displayed in the fields. All the available pre-programmed and changeable messages will be displayed. If you want to display all the pre-programmed messages, make sure that Message Type pre-programmed is selected. If you want to view the changeable messages, make sure that Message Type changeable is selected.

Both the Changeable Messages and Preprogrammed messages are stored on the sign controller. IQ Central allows you to display the pre-programmed messages on the sign from your computer, but you cannot edit the pre-programmed messages in any way. The Changeable messages are also stored on the sign controller. Using IQ Central, you can check the contents of these messages (by using the Get selected Message from Sign button). You can also change these messages and download them to the sign for future or current displaying on the sign.

The Connect\Disconnect (red/green) button will display Connect (red) if you are not connected to the sign and Disconnect (green) if you are connected to the sign. If the button is green, a connection has already been established. If the button is red, establish a connection by selecting the required device and clicking on the red button.

To Send a Changeable Message to the Sign If you want to send a changeable message to a sign, you should first select the device by clicking on the drop down list box and highlighting the required sign. Then, select Changeable Message type by clicking on the Changeable radio button.

All the available Changeable Messages for that Device will be displayed in the message window. Highlight the one that you want to send to the sign. The message itself and its display information - Duration and Priority will display in the field below the message list.

Now that you have the message selected, you can choose from the range of Message Commands that are available. To send the message to the sign (and not display it) click Send Only. To send the message to the sign and display it, click on Send and Display.

Note about the Display Message on Sign You should be cautious when using this option. The message number that you have highlighted in the Device Messages list will be the message that is displayed on the sign. This may not be the same message on the sign – in other words, the text of the message that you see in IQ Central may not be the same as the text of the message that is loaded on the sign controller. To avoid this happening, highlight the number of the message that you want to display on the sign. Click on the Retrieve Selected Msg button. The text of that message as it is loaded on the sign controller will then be displayed on IQ Central. If the text is OK, click on the Display Only button and that message will be displayed. If the text of the message is incorrect, you can edit that message (by clicking the Edit Message button), and then click the Send and Display button. Alternatively, you may want to select another message and check if the content of that message is correct and then display that message.

Add a New Message If you want to add a new message, position the cursor on an “empty” line in the message list and then click on the New Message button. The Edit Message window will open, allowing you to create your new message.


110

When you have finished creating your message click on Close. The message will be displayed in the Message List and the MULTI Msg window. Click on the Save button to save the message to the database and Send Only if you want to send the message to the sign. If you want to send and display the message on the sign, click on the Send And Display button.

Edit an Existing Message If you want to edit a message that already exists, highlight that message in the Device Messages list and click on the Preview Button. This will open the Sign Message Edit window so that you can make the required changes. Remember to send the message to the sign and save it in the database.

Sign Message Edit Screen The Message Editor allows you to create new messages of varying types or configurations as well as edit existing messages. This application gives you the flexibility of sending what you want to your sign, along with how you want the message displayed.

To open the message editor, open the Sign Control Module, select a sign type Device , highlight one of the messages in the message list, and press the Edit Message button. This will open the basic Sign Message Edit window, as shown here. Click on the image below to see details about this interface.

Figure 62 – Sign Message Edit screen

Sign Message Editor - Advanced Screen Clicking the Advanced button in the basic Sign Message Edit screen will open a screen of advanced message options. This interface allows an operator to insert advanced tags into the MULTI string that control how the pages will appear and how they will be displayed. The tags that can be inserted from the Advanced screen are:

New Line (nl)

New Page (np)

Line Justification (jlx)

Page Justification (jpx)

Flash On/Off and Time (fltxoy and /fl)

Page On/Off and Time (ptxoy)


111

Click on the sample screen shown below to see more details about each control.

Figure 63 – Advanced Sign Message Edit screen

Moving Text Editing Screen This option allows you to insert various types of moving text into your MULTI Msg input box. It is available only on the Advanced screen of the Sign Message Editor. An example of the Moving Text editing screen is shown here. Click on the sample screen to see more details about the controls.

Figure 64 – Moving Text Editing screen

Displaying a Message Page with Preset Times If you want the page to be displayed for a specific length of time (other than the default time), enter the required values in tenths of a second, in the Page On and Page Off fields. Then click on the Timer button and the new page tag will be inserted with the specified page on and page off times. Then type in the text for the new page.


112

Displaying a Message Page for the Default Time The default time for Page On and Page Off is specified on the Message Defaults tab located under Maintenance, in the Sign Summary module. If you want the page to display using these defaults, you need only click the New Page button and then type the text for the new page in the MULTI Msg window.


113

Overview of the Sign Summary Module The Sign Summary module contains several tabs that provide information about the currently selected message sign. This is also the place where system defaults are set for message signs.

A connection must be established to the sign before data can be sent to or retrieved from a sign. To connect to the sign, select the required sign from the Device : list and click on the Connect button (just to the right of the Device list.) If the button is green, IQ Central is already connected to the sign.

To display information about the sign, select the Tab that contains the required information, and click on the Refresh button on that tab. Note that each tab has its own Refresh button and each time the Device is changed or another tab is selected, the refresh button must be clicked to retrieve data.

The following tabs are available in the Sign Summary module:

Sign Configuration

Sign Status

Time

Message Defaults

Manual Poll

Sign Information

Pixels

Diagnostics

Note If you just want to run one or more quick diagnostic checks on the message sign, use the Diagnostic Tests tab of the Bulk Operations module.

Sign Configuration The Sign Configuration module contains details of the physical attributes of the sign. The following information can be obtained by clicking on the refresh button one the device has been selected and a connection has been established.

Sign Status The Sign Status tab of the Sign Summary module provides details of the current status of the sign as far as temperature, door status, fan status and electrical information is concerned. This information can be retrieved from the sign by clicking on the Refresh button once a connection has been established with the sign.

The following information is available on this tab:

Time This represents the number of seconds that should be used when periodic mode is selected.


114

Message Defaults The Message Defaults Tab contains details of the default messages that are to be used by the sign under certain specific conditions. In addition, it contains the defaults that the system is to use when creating a new message.

If you want to view the defaults that are currently in use by the sign, select the sign from the drop-down Device list box. Then click on the Refresh button, and the values that are currently in use by the sign will be returned. If you make any changes to these defaults, you should save them to the database (click Save) as well as send them to the sign (Update Sign).

Manual Polling This is a utility that will poll the selected device and display the retrieved information. The information that is displayed can be edited by the user. These values are defined using the Configure Logs option in Maps.

Sign Information This returns details about the Make, Model and Software Versions of the Device .

Pixels Tab This tab in the Sign Summary module is to allow for a more detailed analysis of the pixel operation of the selected message sign. Although the group test for Pixel operation in the Bulk Operations module does provide an overall health assessment for pixel operations, this tab allows for a much finer diagnostic of pixel operation.

Diagnostics Tab in the Sign Summary module Although several of the tabs in the Sign Summary module can have diagnostic functions, the Diagnostics tab is particularly designed to allow for interactive analysis of the operation of a message sign. After selecting a Device from the list at the top of the window and pressing Refresh, the operator can make changes to the white fields in this window and use the values in the grayed (read-only) fields to understand how the sign is operating.

Control Mode - This field indicates what equipment is driving the message sign. Do not change this value unless you are fully aware of the implications of that change. The available Control modes are: Other, Local, External, Central, Central Override, Simulation.

SW Reset - This control can be used to send a controller reset command to the sign. To reset the sign, change the value to Reset. Once the sign's controller has been reset, this field will change back to No Reset.

Message Table Source - This field indicates the message number that is used to generate the currently displayed message. This is a read-only field that cannot be edited.

Message Requestor - This read-only field stores a copy of the value in the Activate Message field. If the current message was not activated, then this field will display a value of 0.

Memory Management - This field can be used to manage the sign's onboard memory. 'Other' is used on a by-sign basis. 'Normal' is the normal operating mode for memory. 'Clear Changeable Messages' tells the sign to delete this part of memory. 'Clear Volatile Messages' can be used to delete this part of memory.


115

Activate Message Error - An Activate Message is a code that tells the sign which message to display. This value is set when a message is sent to the sign for display. If a problem occurs when the sign attempts to activate the selected message, an error occurs and the message is not displayed. When this happens, an error is reported in this field.

Short Error Status - This indicates a summary of all of the errors that currently exist for this sign. It is a read-only field, some details about these error codes are listed below.

Controller Error - The value in this field indicates the particular type of error that has occurred with the sign's controller. This is a read-only field and the valid values are: Other controller error, PROM error, Program/processor error, or RAM error. Details about what these errors mean require consulting your sign's controller documentation.

Syntax Error - This error code identifies the first detected syntax error within a MULTI message. It is a read-only field and the valid values are: Other, None, Unsupported tag, Unsupported tag value, Text too big, Font not defined, Character not defined, Field device does not exist, Field device error, Flash region error, Tag conflict, and Too many pages.

Syntax Error Position - This indicates the offset from the first character of the MULTI message where the syntax error has occurred.

Other Error Description - This indicates any IQ Central specific error messages.

Note For a quick overall assessment of the sign's systems, try using the automatic Diagnostic Tests that are part of the Bulk Operations module.


116

Bulk Operations Module This Tab contains utilities that will allow you to perform bulk downloads to and from a message sign.

To retrieve the information from the sign, check the check boxes for the information that you wish to retrieve and then click on the Refresh button. Then Save that information to the database by clicking on the Save button. To update the sign controller with the information, click on the Update Sign button.

If you select a sign and then click Update Sign, the information that is currently stored in the database will be sent to the sign.

It is recommend that as part of the regular housekeeping of your signs that you ensure that the information on the signs and the information in your database is synchronized on a regular basis. To do this, select a sign and then click on the Refresh button. This will cause all the information (as indicated by the check boxes selected) to be uploaded from the sign so that you can then click on Save to update the database.

To update a sign with information that is stored on the database, check the applicable check boxes and then click on the Update Sign button.

Diagnostic Topics The Diagnostic Tests tab, located within the Bulk Operations module, allows you to do a quick check of all the subsystems on a message sign. Check the box next to each test that you wish to perform and then click the Run Diagnostics button. A Green check mark will be displayed if the test was successful and a red X will be displayed if the test failed.

If a test fails, you can run more detailed diagnostics (or simply see more details) using the Sign Summary module:

Table 24 – Diagnostic Tests available for Message Signs Diagnostic Test Location for Further Details Pixels Sign Summary/ Pixels Fans Sign Summary/Sign Status Door Status Sign Summary/Sign Status Temperature Sign Summary/Sign Status Line Volts Sign Summary/Sign Status Controller Error Sign Summary/Diagnostics Power Supplies Sign Summary/Sign Status

More detailed and more targeted diagnostics tools for message signs are located in the Sign Summary module.


117

Brightness Control Module If you are controlling the brightness of the sign manually, you can set the desired level of the brightness here. Enter the required level and then Send to the Sign.

Master Fonts Module The Master Fonts Module is also known as the Font Editor. Whatever it is called, this module allows a user to view and edit the fonts that are used by message signs connected to IQ Central. The following topics describe how to access the Font Editor and how to use the interface.

Using the Font Editor Interface The Font Editor allows a user to edit the fonts and special characters that are used in your traffic message signs.

Figure 65 – Font View screen

See the following topics on the parts of the Font Editor window to see more information about each piece of the interface.

Editing a Font To edit any selected font, manipulate the pixels into their desired format by clicking on them in the display box in the left hand side of the form. This allows you to customize any character in any set of fonts.


118

Schedules Module IQ Central includes a schedules module that is designed especially for message signs that is completely separate from the Traffic Controller Scheduler. Message sign schedules contain a collection of Day Plans that determine what should be displayed on the sign at a particular time and/or a particular day or selection of days.

See Day Plans and Schedules for more information.

When schedules are created and saved to a Device , they need to be activated before they will run. When schedules are activated (see Activate Schedule), you must remember that each and every schedule that has been saved to the Device will be activated and displayed. Please check all the schedules that are resident on the Device before activating schedules. To do this, select a schedule number on the Schedules tab and Refresh. This will recover the schedule details from the sign so that you can check the contents of the schedule. Repeat this for each available Schedule number.

Opening the Message Sign Schedules window These controls can be accessed under the Devices menu by navigating to the Message Signs > Edit Schedules control.

Day Plans and Schedules This function allows you to specify certain events that are to occur at certain times on selected days. The simplest way to describe how this works is to work though an example. We'll walk through how one would create a day plan and schedule for a message sign:

1. You must be connected to the sign before you send data to the sign. To connect to the sign, open the Sign Control window; select the required sign from the Devices list and click on the Connect button. Then return to Edit Schedules.

2. Let's assume you want to display Changeable Message 1 at 6am and Changeable Message 2 at 6pm every weekday of the year. In addition, you want Changeable Message 2 to be displayed all weekend (from 6pm on Friday until 6am on Monday) every weekend. To do this, we need to set up a schedule that will be tied to a specific day plan that will activate two separate events. To accomplish this, configure Schedule 1 to activate Day Plan 1 every month (all months checked), Monday through Friday (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday checked) every day of the month (all days checked).

3. Save this schedule to the database by clicking on the Save button.

4. Update the sign by clicking on the Update Sign button. The schedule is configured, but the day plan has not been defined yet. That's our next thing to do.

5. Click on the Day Plans tab so that we can set up Day Plan 1, which is already linked to the Schedule 1 schedule that we have just created.

6. Select Day plan Number 1, and select Day Plan Event Number 1. This Day Plan event is to be activated at 6am so the Day Plan Event Time should be set to have Hour = 6 and Minute = 0.

7. We then need to indicate what action is to be taken by this event number. Indicate Day Plan Action 1, which will be set up on the Events and Actions tab to display Changeable Message 1.


119

8. Save the Day Plan to the Database (click on Save to Database) and update the sign (click Update Sign.)

9. Select the Events and Actions tab. Here we need to set up Display Message Action 1 to display Changeable Message 1.

10. It is important that you check the content of the message that you specify here before you create the schedule. To do this, click on the Sign Control Button, select the sign and highlight the required message (in this case Changeable Message 1). Then click on the Get from Sign button and preview the message.

Note Each message has a CRC number that is calculated for it when that message is created and whenever it is changed. This is a calculated value that indicates the current version of the message. When you specify a message for an action, you must retrieve the CRC for that message from the sign. That CRC number is then stored together with the message number in the database and on the sign. If, when the schedule runs, the message that is specified in the schedule has a CRC that is different than the one that was saved at the time the schedule was created, the message will not be displayed and the action will be ignored. This eliminates the probability that another operator could change a message that is allocated to a schedule, causing an incorrect message to be displayed.

11. Before you click on Save to Database to save this action to the database and Update Sign to save this information on the sign, click on the Refresh CRC from sign so that the current version of that message is allocated to the action.

12. We must now repeat the previous two steps to create a day plan event for displaying changeable message 2 at 6pm.

13. Select the Day Plan tab.

14. Next, we need to set up Day Plan Event Number 2, which will call Day Plan Action 2 at 6 p.m. Note that the Day Plan Event Time is in military time format – 6pm is 18h00.

15. Save to the database and update the sign again.

16. Click on the Events and Actions tab to set up Day Plan Action 2 which will activate Changeable Message 2.

17. Once again, remember to check the contents of changeable message 2 before adding it to the day plan, and retrieve the CRC from the sign for that message.

18. Save the information to the database and update the sign again.

Now, as far as the displaying of Changeable Message 2 on the weekend is concerned, remember that Changeable Message 2 has been set to display at 6pm on Friday. No other action has been specified to take place until 6am on Monday morning. So, we do not have to do anything else to keep Changeable Message 2 displaying all weekend.


120

Error Logging on Message Signs This module is used to set up error logging for a message sign, viewing the messages that the sign has recorded as a result, and it also provides controls for clearing some or all of the backlog of error messages from the IQ Central database. As with all of the tools for message signs, first one needs to select the message sign you wish to configure using the drop down list at the top of the module, check that the communications channel is open by verifying the connection indicator to the left of the selected device is GREEN. (If not, click on the indicator to tell IQ Central to connect to the selected device.)

The Error Logs module has three tabs:

Event Groups and Events - Configuration of how IQ Central logs message sign events and what events are recorded

Clear Event Logs - Provides tools to clear some or all of the stored events for this sign

View Recorded Events - View some or all of the event log messages for this particular sign

When you've made changes to any of the settings on these Error Logs tabs, be sure to choose the Update Sign and/or Save the changes to record the new settings to the device and the IQ Central database, respectively.

Event Groups and Events This portion of the Error Logs module is used to configure which message sign events IQ Central pays attention to, and what events are recorded to the sign's event log. Message sign event logs are stored in the IQ Central database.

Error logging for message signs allows you to configure logging based on a defined event, which is just a test condition where a particular NTCIP object is monitored for one of several conditions. Each event can be given its own label. And groups of events can be put together into Event Groups, also with their own labels. And Event Groups can then be pulled up for viewing on the View Recorded Events tab, or deleted using the Clear Event Log tab.

The fields and controls on this tab are described in the following topics.

Clear Event Log This option is used to clear logs. You can select to clear a specific Event Group or you can clear all the entries in the log.

To clear a specific Event Group, click on the drop down list box for Event Group and select the required Event Group. Under Device Action, select the date before which you want the entries deleted by clicking on the drop down list box and selecting the required date from the calendar that opens. Then check the “Clear Event Log Entries for the Selected Event Group Only” check box. A message will be displayed asking that you confirm your next step. If you are sure that you have made the correct selections, click on Yes to proceed and the Event log will be cleared as requested. If you need to amend your selections, click on No to return to the Clear Event Log screen so that you can make the necessary changes.


121

View Recorded Events This allows you to view the contents of the message sign's Log File. You can select to view just those events for a specific Event Group. You also have the option, within the selected Event Group, to see only events within a certain date range.

The bottom of this screen also has two check-boxes that can be used to clear out some of the events in this sign's event log, although you'll have more detailed controls over event log clearing if you use the Clear Event Log tab of the Error Logging module.


122

SNMP Device Security Module Using this feature without fully understanding the consequences of the changes you make could result in communication with any or all of your Devices being permanently disabled. To understand a little bit about the device-level security that is provided as part of the SNMP protocol, we've described how it operates in a separate topic. This device-level security is managed in IQ Central using the Device Security module, also known as the SNMP Device Security module.

Note In IQ Central versions up to and including version 1.4, the Device Security module only supports SNMP Device Security settings for message sign devices. At present, the editing of SNMP Device Security settings is not implemented for traffic controllers, cameras, weather stations, or any of the other device types within IQ Central.

Opening the Device Security Module There are a couple of ways to launch the SNMP Device Security Module:

• Use the SNMP Device Security module icon, which is located in the Message Sign toolbar:

• Or you can open the Devices menu and choose SNMP Device Security.

To see how the Device Security interface works, check out this Example Screen.

Device-Level Security SNMP communications, the basis for the NTCIP protocol, provides for a password to be created to control who has access to Devices. This password is referred to as the Community Name. The default Community name is public. The “public” Community Name can only be changed using a “Super Password”. The default “Super Password” is administrator.

Note In IQ Central versions up to and including version 1.4, the Device Security module only supports SNMP Device Security settings for message sign devices. At present, the editing of SNMP Device Security settings is not implemented for traffic controllers, cameras, weather stations, or any of the other device types within IQ Central. And the rules listed here for the operation of device-level security are currently only in force for message signs.

All of your Devices must use the same Community Name. If you change it for one Device , you must change it for all Devices, and any new Devices that are connected must also be updated to this Community Name as soon as they are connected. This is not an insignificant challenge and we recommend that you do not make any changes to either the User Community Name (Password) or the Administrator Community name (Super Password) unless you are absolutely sure of what you are doing, and the advantages of restricting unauthorized access to your Devices far outweigh the disadvantages of ensuring that the changes to Community Names are administered correctly.

Effectively, if a transaction is sent to a Device with the incorrect Community Name, the transaction is “silently discarded”. The Device appears to be broken and the transaction is ignored. No error message is returned advising you of this action.

123

Chapter 7 - Incident Management Module Incident Management is a tool that allows you to automate processes that are predefined, depending on data that is received from external sources. At preset intervals, IQ Central will poll the Devices, retrieve specified data, and use that data in calculations to determine the action (if any) that should be triggered. Incident Management uses Excel as the calculation engine. A standard Excel spreadsheet template is provided and this forms the basis for all the calculations that are performed by the Incident Management feature.

The spreadsheet consists of three sheets. The first sheet contains the input that is to be used to determine if any action needs to be taken. The data from this sheet is passed to the second sheet which manipulates the data and thus determines if any action needs to be taken. The results of the data manipulation are passed to the third sheet which then triggers the required output, depending on the outcome from the second sheet.


124

Configuring the Incident Spreadsheets Some functionality of the Incident Management module is controlled using Excel spreadsheets. These spreadsheets are stored in a single Excel file in the IQ Central directory where you installed the system. It's called 'Incident Management Template.xls'. The file consists of three separate sheets. The first sheet ('Input Objects') contains the input that is to be used to determine if any action needs to be taken. The data from this sheet is passed to the second sheet ('Calculations') which manipulates the data and thus determines if any action needs to be taken. The results of the data manipulation are passed to the third sheet (Output Actions') which then triggers the required output, depending on the outcome from the second sheet.

To select the input for the first sheet of the spreadsheet:

1. Click on the Configure Spreadsheet button.

2. Select the Device Type from the list. All the Devices of that Type that are configured in IQ Central will be listed, as well as the available Log Table objects. Note that the objects that are displayed for selection here are the only objects that can be used as data for the calculations in the Incident Management module.

3. The available Log table Objects are those objects that are included in the Log Configuration for each Device. The Log is configured in Maps, and the maps Log determines which objects will be retrieved from a Device when it is polled. Note: If the Device(s) that you are intending to use as the source of data for your Incident Management calculations is not one of the Devices on your Map and does not have a Log Configured, no objects will be available to you for selection when you configure the spreadsheet in Incident Management.

4. Click the checkboxes next to the Devices that are to be used in the Spreadsheet. Once the Devices have been checked, the list of Available Log Table Columns will be un-grayed and you will be able to select them for your spreadsheet.

5. Highlight the required object and then click on the double right arrow to move the selected object for each of the selected Devices to the Spreadsheet Column Selection window.

6. Once you have made all the required selections, click on the Update Excel Spreadsheet button. Note: Until you Retrieve the values for the spreadsheet, the Log Date Time, the OID Value, and Status fields will remain empty.

The Calculation spreadsheet will use the data that it retrieved into Sheet 1 (Input Objects) and will then perform calculations to determine what action should be taken. The calculations are performed using standard Excel formulas and macros. Calculations will be triggered by a change in the Input values in sheet 1 (Input Objects) when the Devices are polled. If there is no change to the input data, no calculations are performed and no output actions are triggered. If there are changes in the data retrieved, the calculation is triggered and output Actions are triggered.

When it has completed its calculations, specific cells will be marked and the program will use these cells to determine if any action is to be taken. If some action is to be taken, that action will be performed by Sheet 3 (Output Actions).

125

Defining Actions There are a range of actions that can be triggered by Incident management.

1. To define Actions, select the 3rd Sheet (Output Actions) and double click on an empty line – preferably the first empty line, in the Action Column. Select from one of the following Actions:

Activate Message -- This will activate the message specified in Message on the specified Device, using the Duration and Priority settings indicated here.

Download and Activate Message -- This will download the message generated by Sheet 2 (Calculations), on the Device specified by the Output Actions using the Duration and Priority settings specified on the Output Actions sheet.

Trigger Scenario -- This will trigger the Scenario selected in the Scenario and SOPs field. If there is a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) attached to the Scenario, that SOP will also be included in the activation.

Trigger Scenario SOP -- Only the selected Standard Operating procedure will be triggered and not the Scenario to which it is attached.

Trigger Camera Preset -- This will trigger the camera presets indicated in the Camera Preset field.

2. Each row of the Output Action sheet will contain one action that is to be triggered. If you want to trigger a message that should be displayed on multiple Devices, you would create a scenario that would cater for that and then trigger that Scenario in Incident Management.

3. The Status cell for each action is the indicator that Incident Management uses to trigger each Action. If the status is Active, the Output Action specified in that row will be activated.

4. Close Excel and Save the spreadsheet.


126

127

Chapter 8 – Crisis Management in IQ Central IQ Central has a single module that is designed to make IQ Central an important and useful tool for dealing with emergency and crisis situations. We've divided the discussion of these topics into two areas: Scenarios and Amber Alerts, even though they are both managed with a single tool.

In IQ Central, both types of situations are primarily assumed to be concerned with message sign operations, although scenarios can also implement traffic camera events as well.

Configuring a Scenario or Amber Alert To configure either a Scenario or an Amber Alert, you just need to open the module and create a event plan of the selected type. There are a couple of ways to launch the Scenario and Amber Alert module:

Go to the Devices menu, open Message Signs, and choose Scenarios and Amber Alerts

Press the F6 key

Press the Amber Alert button on the Message Sign toolbar.

What is a Scenario? A scenario is any public emergency or special event situation that would call for a special utilization of your networked traffic hardware. This could include emergency response for a terrorist attack or other catastrophe, practice work for such events, weather emergencies, or anything else that can temporarily and suddenly disrupt normal operations.

What is an Amber Alert? An Amber Alert is a special type of Scenario. Amber Alerts deal specifically with a mobilization that occurs when a child is missing and/or feared abducted.


128

Activating an Amber Alert Follow these steps to activate an Amber Alert:

1. Expand the Scenarios and Amber Alerts tree to display all the available Scenarios and Amber Alerts.

2. The pre-prepared messages and the signs on which the messages should be displayed can easily be seen when the “tree” is expanded.

3. It is advised that you Verify the Amber Alert before actually activating it. This step will walk through the Amber Alert without actually activating it, verifying that the signs are connected and then retrieving the selected message so that it can be verified that the correct message will be displayed when the Amber Alert is activated.

4. To activate an amber alert, highlight the required Amber Alert, and click on the Activate button. Full details of the procedure that is activated will be displayed in the Activity Log.

5. When the Amber Alert has to be stopped or cancelled, the devices can be reset using a Blank Signs scenario (if one has been created for you). In this case, select the required group of signs and activate the blank scenario. If there is no scenario to blank the signs, blank the signs using the Sign Control module.

Chapter 8 – Crisis Management in IQ Central

129

Displaying a Scenario To display a Scenario, follow these steps:

1. First, open the Scenarios and Amber Alerts module.

2. Expand the Scenario tree until the Scenario that you want to activate is displayed in the tree.

3. Highlight that Scenario and click on the Verify button. This will run through the Scenario as if it was being displayed, checking that the devices are available and that the messages that have been allocated to display are still the same on the sign controller.

4. The results of this verification will display in the Activity window. If you are satisfied with the results, click on the Activate button to activate the Scenario.

5. The Message will display for the duration indicated. If it has been set to run forever, the message will be displayed until you display another message, or blank the signs. Blanking manually can be achieved by individually accessing each sign and either displaying a different message or blanking the sign. Or you can create a new Scenario to display another message or blank all the signs used in the previous scenario. If the message in the scenario has a number of minutes duration, when that number of minutes is reached, the End Duration message specified for that device will be displayed.

Creating a Scenario A scenario is a pre-defined message that is sent to a specified group of devices (or a set of camera positions sent to a group of cameras if the camera module is installed) when a certain event occurs. An Administrator creates scenarios, so that a user can implement the prepared procedure. This ensures that the correct information is displayed on the devices at the correct time.

Creating a Scenario 1. Expand the Scenarios and Amber Alerts tree and highlight SCENARIOS.

2. Right click the mouse and select New and then select Scenario Group. A new directory will be added to the tree.

3. Rename the directory to meaningfully indicate the contents of that group of scenarios.

4. Once this is done, highlight that directory and then right click the mouse. Select New, and then choose Scenario Sign Group.

5. Enter a specific name for this Scenario, as well as a description of the Sign Group.

6. Indicate the Activation priority for the Scenario message. In addition, indicate if the message that is sent is to override the priority of the message this is being displayed on the Device when the Scenario is activated, and if the CRC check for the message should be ignored.

7. Click Save to update the scenario tree with the Sign Group.

8. To define which signs and which message on the sign will be activated, right-click on the Sign Group.

9. Select New and then Device.


130

10. Select the Device that is to be added to the Sign Group and select the actual message that should be displayed.

11. Repeat these last couple of steps until all of the signs (and messages) that you wish to appear in the scenario are included. Note: If the message that you wish to display does not appear in the Device Messages list, you will need to add a message to the device using the Sign Message Edit function which is available in the Sign Control module.

Standard Operating Procedure Each Scenario that is added may have a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) attached to it. This procedure will provide instructions to the Operator, detailing the steps have to be followed in the event of the Scenario occurring. This standardizes the response to scenarios and ensures that all the necessary steps are taken and all the necessary people have been advised of the situation.

To set up a Standard Operating procedure for a Scenario, highlight the Sign Group for which the SOP is to be created. Right click the mouse and select New and then Standard Operating Procedure.

The following parameters define an SOP:

Title

Name

Description

Contact Name

Mode

Notify

Path in Scenarios

Phone

Priority

131

Chapter 9 - Using Maps in IQ Central IQ Central has the ability to display devices on a map, showing their locations relative to one another, and allowing an operator to navigate to field hardware using their map locations. IQ Central's map capability provides a pictorial representation of the position of all connected devices that have been positioned on one of the installed maps. Using the map interface, you can then see the status of a group of nearby devices, and then drill down to check the status of an individual device.

Figure 66 – BMP maps versus GIS maps

There are two methods that IQ Central uses to provide this capability: either BMP or GIS mapping. These represent the two methods used to store the map information that IQ Central presents to the operator. The basic IQ Central approach uses static bitmap images (i.e. BMP files) as the mapping environment. This is the normal out-of-the-box capability of IQ Central. However, a more powerful approach is provided using IQ Central with GIS Mapping capability. Where BMP maps are static and fixed in scale and scope, GIS map files provide a much more interactive environment. GIS maps can be layered with overlaid data, such as geographically tagged road and business information. GIS maps can also be zoomed into and panned across.

Does your IQ Central use BMP mapping or GIS mapping? There are two ways to determine which mapping method is used by your version of IQ Central. The easiest manner is to look in the title bar. If the title bar shows that you are running simply 'IQ Central', then you are using the BMP version. If, on the other hand, it shows 'IQ Central - GIS ', then obviously you are using the GIS mapping version of IQ Central.

The other way to see which version you are using is to go to the Help menu and choose About IQ Central. If your version of IQ Central has the GIS mapping capability, the application title shown in the About window will be 'IQ Central with GIS Mapping'.

Whether you are using basic IQ Central BMP maps, or the GIS-enabled IQ Central, the system automatically provides four levels of device details, depending on how far into the map environment you have zoomed. The BMP maps do this simply by providing four fixed zoom levels, over which device data of a user-selected scale, can be displayed. GIS maps


132

provide a continuous level of zooming and panning capability, but with the same four levels of device details overlaid on the map images. Once you zoom down in a GIS map so that you have reached a new device detail level, that level of detail for that type of device is displayed over the map image.

Note Peek does not distribute BMP or GIS data files along with IQ Central. When you purchase IQ Central, your local IT or electronic resource representative will need to contact Peek Traffic in order to integrate your local mapping data into IQ Central.

Chapter 9 - Using Maps in IQ Central

133

Getting Started With Maps When IQ Central is first installed, the mapping function is installed, but it needs to be configured before you can use it. The steps required to get mapping up and running on a new system are:

1. Save map data files onto your system.

2. Verify proper map file paths in the IQ Central database

3. (GIS systems only) Define Layer Groups

4. (GIS systems only) Configure Layers

5. (GIS systems only) Set zoom settings by device type

6. Define views

7. Pick a default view for the Map View module

8. Open the Map View module

9. Place device icons on the map view, as desired

When you complete these steps, the map system of IQ Central is up and running and ready for use.


134

Setting Map Paths in the IQ Central Database Letting IQ Central know where the map files are located is done inside the program for BMP maps. However, it is a bit more complicated if you are using GIS maps. If you installed IQ Central to its default location, namely C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central, and you have stored your GIS-based map files to the default MapFiles directory located there, then the proper path to those files is known by IQ Central, but you will need to let the program know what the shapes files are called for your particular environment. And, if you installed to a non-standard location, you will also need to modify the paths to those map files. For GIS map files, none of this work can be done directly in IQ Central. Instead, you will need to open the IQ Central database.

For BMP Map files: Setting map file names and locations within IQ Central can be done entirely within the Map Management module. (Maps > Map Management)

For GIS Map files: 1. Make note of the locations and names of all of the GIS shape (.shp) files you intend

to use within IQ Central. (Each shape file represents one layer of map data.)

2. Open the IQ Central database using Microsoft Access™.

3. Open the tblMapLayerDetail table.

4. Edit the LayerName and File fields so that you have one row in the table for each shape file you wish to add to IQ Central. If you need more rows, type the extra information in the bottom row of the table, and the AutoNumber feature will provide additional LayerDetailID numbers.

5. Give each row in the table a unique LayerOrder number, starting from '1' for the layer that will be painted in the map window first, to '2' for the layer that will be painted on top of it in the window, and so on.

6. Set values for WidthFrom and WidthTo in each row of the table. As a rule of thumb: leave all of the WidthFrom values set to '0' (zero), and set the WidthTo value to the full size of the map in miles. For example, if your data covers an area 100 miles across, set WidthTo to 100 for each row.

7. Close the table.

8. Open the tblLayers table.

9. Create a row for each of the shape files you will be using. Fill in the LayerFileName parameter for each row, matching the names you entered in the Map Layer Detail table above. Don't include the .shp extension in the name.

10. Scroll over the eighth column from the right edge of the table: DataPath. Locate your shape files and identify the complete path to the directory where the files are stored. Enter that value into each row. As an example, this might be the location of the files on my system: D:\Data\Geographic\GIS Data\City Shape Files\. Be sure to include the last slash '\' as the last character in the DataPath field.

11. Fill in the following placeholder values in each row in the table: (We'll change these values to their final settings after we go back into IQ Central.)


135

Table 25 – Default Layer Values Parameter Default value to enter LayerGroupID 1 LayerLoadOrder 1 SymbolType 2 Style 0 SymbolSize 1 ColorRed 1 ColorGreen 1 ColorBlue 1 OutlineColorRed 1 OutlineColorGreen 1 OutlineColorBlue 1 WidthShapeFrom 0 WidthShapeTo 5 WidthNamesFrom 0 WidthNamesTo 5 FieldName NAME AllowDuplicates 0 FontName Arial FontBold 0 FontItalic 0 FontSize 8 UseDefault 0 MaskLabels 0 DataPath (You've already set this one) PlaceOn 1 PlaceBelow 0 PlaceAbove 1 LabelPosition 0 FontColorRed 0 FontColorGreen 0 FontColorBlue 0

12. Repeat the above values for each layer in the table.

13. Close the table

14. Close Microsoft Access.

15. Open IQ Central using an account with Administration privileges.

16. Open the Layer Editor by opening the Maps menu and choosing GIS Layers.


136

Use the Layers window to edit the layer values to the settings you need. Use the Map Manager to verify the appearance of your Layer settings.

Setting Up Map Polling for Intersection Icons Once you have configured the icons and linked data of an intersection display, you will need to perform the next step, which is to set up map polling for these data objects. Map polling is the repeated, automatic request for the desired data across the device's communications channel. This polling allows IQ Central to show the current state of the linked data objects as graphic icons, when the intersection is viewed in the Map View module. The configuration of map polling can be done manually, using the Realtime Map Polling module. Or you can let IQ Central help you set up map polling for the specific icons you've set up in your display, by choosing the Auto Populate Polling tool.


137

Overview of Map Management Maps must be configured for use before they will appear as you want them to in the Map View portion of IQ Central. To configure the map system, you will need to use the Map Management module. However, the way that maps are configured is highly dependent upon whether you are using the basic BMP version of IQ Central or the GIS-mapping enabled version. In both cases, after the map files have been successfully stored on your IQ Central computer, the primary tool to configure how maps operate is the Map Management module.

Opening the Map Management module

Press the Map Management icon: OR

Go to the Maps menu and choose Map Management OR

Press Alt-m, then the letter 'm' again

Storing Map Data Before the various map modules can be opened or utilized, you will need to load some map data onto your IQ Central system. This is especially true if you are using the GIS version of IQ Central, since launching any of the IQ Central map modules without any data loaded will result in error messages.

Loading BMP Map Data BMP map data is much more simple than GIS data, usually consisting of nothing more than a couple of bitmap image files. Because of this, and the way that IQ Central handles BMP map management, you do not need to preload map data files before you use the BMP version's map modules. Instead, you just need to save the images you want to use somewhere on your system or network, then point to these image files from within IQ Central's Map Management module. If you want to make it easier for yourself, you can just store the bitmap files you plan to use in IQ Central's MapFiles folder:

<User-Selected Install Location>\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\

By default, IQ Central installs with a blank default bitmap file called blankdefault.bmp, stored in the above folder. Again, if you installed IQ Central to the default location, the directory is: C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\

Loading GIS Map Data To load GIS data to your IQ Central system, save all of the ESRI GIS data files to the following location:

<User-Selected Install Location>\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\GISData\

As installed, the GISData folder will not exist in the MapFiles location. You will need to create it first, and then copy the GIS data into that folder.

The default location for this data (if the installer chose the default installation directory) is:


138

C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\GISData\

If the user installed IQ Central elsewhere, the installation directory for GIS map data will be <User-Selected Install Location>\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\.

Managing BMP Maps The standard version of IQ Central has the capability of monitoring objects that have been placed against a bit-mapped background image, such as a map or satellite photo. Unlike the GIS-mapping-capable IQ Central, which uses a single, dynamic map environment, the standard version uses BMP maps, which are discrete image files. These BMP map images are linked to the program using the Map Management module, and can then be linked to one another via user-defined zoom areas within the images. In the standard version of IQ Central, the Map Management module is used to add, edit, delete, and set the zoom areas for these BMP map image files. The Place Device on Map module then allows you to place devices in a set location on one or more of the map images. Finally, the Map View module allows you to see the bitmapped images, navigate between them using their zoom areas, and shows the status of 'placed' devices against the map background images.

Figure 67 – Example BMP map file displayed in the Map Management module

The following topics describe each of the functions that can be performed to manage and use maps in the BMP version of IQ Central.

Adding a New BMP Map To add a new BMP map or maps, you must first have stored the bitmap (*.bmp) file or files of those maps somewhere that can be accessed from this computer. If the map or maps are to be accessible from multiple networked work stations, make sure the file location is a network drive so that the file path is the same from all workstations. Then follow these steps to add the map to IQ Central:


139

1. Go to the Maps menu and select Map Management.

2. When the module opens, select the Add a New Map button.

3. Enter the Name of the map as you want it to be described on the pull-down 'Maps' lists in the Map Viewer and Map Management modules.

4. Enter a Description of the map. This description is displayed when the map is opened. It can contain pertinent information about the map itself as well as the devices that are located in that map area, or any other details you would like to add.

5. You can either type in the name and full path of the map file, or you can click on Browse to navigate to the location where you stored the bitmap file. Highlight the .bmp file that is to be added and click on the Open button. The file name and its complete path will be stored in the IQ Central database. If you enter the path and file name manually, you can click on the Test Map button to “test” that the path and file name that you entered is correct.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 above for each bitmap file you wish to add to IQ Central.

When you are finished adding all of your bitmapped file images to the Map Management module, you may wish to add navigation features by creating zoom links between the map images. To do this, refer to the topic called 'Adding Zoom Areas to BMP Maps'.

Editing an Existing Map There are two meaning for 'editing a map' that may potentially cause some confusion. In IQ Central, editing a map means changing the link to the external map file or editing the zoom areas associated with that image. On the other hand, editing the actual image itself can be done, but it must be done using an external image editing software package, such as Microsoft® Paint, Corel® Paint Shop Pro®, Adobe® Photoshop®, or any similar program. Any changes made to the actual image file that is currently linked to IQ Central will appear in IQ Central's Map View and Map Management modules the next time that map is viewed.

To edit the link to a map file in the BMP version of IQ Central, follow these steps:

1. If not opened yet, launch the Map Management module by going to the Maps menu and choosing Map Management, or by clicking on the Map Management icon in the toolbar. (Shown at right.)

2. Go to the Maps pull-down list and select the map for which information is to be changed.

3. Make the desired changes to the map information, such as the map's name, description, or the path to the file. Note: This is the point where you would also make changes to zoom areas. For details about changing or editing Zoom Areas of a BMP map, refer to this topic.

4. When you've made all of the desired changes, click the Update button, which will be enabled as soon as any change is made to the current settings.

Deleting a Map To delete a map from IQ Central when you are using BMP maps, follow these steps:


140

1. If not already open, open the Map Management module in your BMP version of IQ Central. This can be done by going to the Maps menu and selecting Map Management, or by clicking on the Map Management button in the toolbar (shown at right).

2. Select the map that is to be deleted from the Maps drop down list.

3. Press the Remove button to delete the link to the map image file.

This button is active when a map is currently selected in the Maps pull-down list. Selecting this option will delete the current link to the map image file within IQ Central. This does not delete the source file, just the link to it, and the descriptions and map names you have assigned to it within IQ Central. You will also lose any zoom areas that were defined for this map.

Warning The Remove button does not ask for verification and the data cannot be

recovered once it is removed. To recover a map that has inadvertently been 'Removed', you will need to recreate the map link within IQ Central by creating a new map and linking to the same map image file.

Adding a new zoom area To add a zoom area, meaning a hyperlink from one map to another, make sure that both maps (starting location and destination) are already set up in IQ Central, and then follow these steps:

1. If not already open, open the Map Management module in your BMP version of IQ Central. This can be done by going to the Maps menu and selecting Map Management, or by clicking on the Map Management button in the toolbar (shown below).

2. Go to the Maps drop down list at the upper left corner of the module's window and choose the map to which you want to add the zoom area.

3. Make sure that the Set Zoom Co-Ordinates checkbox is checked. This will allow zoom areas to be set for this image.

4. Click on the New Zoom Area button at the bottom of the window. As shown in the image at right, the cursor will now turn into a zoom area indicator with a black box around it. Click on a location within the map near where you'd like the final zone to appear. This is the current location of the center of your zoom area. (Don't worry, you will be able to relocate the zone in the next step, if you don't put it exactly where you want it right now.)


141

Figure 68 – Placing a zoom area

5. After you click on the map, the zoom area indicator will switch to a blue indicator showing the center of the zoom area, along with four corner indicators. (Shown below.) Position the zone and the corners by clicking and dragging on any of them.

Figure 69 – Using the zone corner handles to resize the zoom area Try to shape the zone so that it is approximately the same area that appears in the map that will function as the destination of this link.

6. In the Zoom Area control, type in a name for this zone.

7. In the Zoom to drop down box, select the other map that will function as the destination of this hyperlink.

8. When you are satisfied with the location of the zoom area, as well as its name and linked map, press the Save button in the Zoom Area box.


142

This will store the settings to the IQ Central database. The zoom area icon will turn green to indicate that it has been saved and is now active when this map is opened in the Map Viewer (as shown here.)

Figure 70 – Green zoom area icon indicating that the zone has been saved

9. Verify that the new Zoom Area appears in the pull-down list of the Zoom Areas control.

10. Repeat the above steps to create more zoom areas on the same map. Note that while you are creating additional zoom areas, you will not be able to see where existing zones have been set up. It's best to select adjacent areas before configuring the new zoom area, so you know approximately where the edges of the new zone should sit.

Modifying an existing zoom area Follow these steps to modify the name, link or area settings of a Zoom Area in the BMP version of IQ Central Map Manager. If you are going to link to a new map, make sure the map is already configured in the Map Manager before performing the following steps.

1. If not already open, open the Map Management module.

2. Go to the Maps drop down list at the upper left corner of the module's window and choose the map for which you want to edit a zoom area.

3. In the Zoom Areas box, select the zoom area to be edited from the drop-down list. The zoom area center and corner indicators will appear on the map.

4. If you want to change the position or shape of the zone, click and drag the zoom area indicators on the map.

5. If you want to rename the map, type in a new name in the Zoom Areas box.

6. If you want to change the hyperlink target of the zoom area, select a different map in the Zoom to drop down list.

7. When you have finished making changes to the zoom area settings, press the Save button to store the changes in the IQ Central database.


143

Deleting a zoom area Follow these steps to remove a map zoom area from a BMP map.

1. If not already open, open the Map Management module.

2. Go to the Maps drop down list at the upper left corner of the module's window and choose the map for which you want to delete a zoom area. The center indicator of the selected zoom area will appear.

3. Press the Remove button to delete the zoom area.

Using the Map Management Module With GIS Maps For a GIS-enabled IQ Central system, the Map Management Module is used to view the installed shape file data, activate and deactivate layers of information, and create and delete pre-configured 'map views'. These map views are then available for use in the Map View module.

Figure 71 – Map Management module (GIS version)

The way that the layers of GIS data appear within the Map Management module is actually defined elsewhere, in the Layers module. The best way to first get GIS shape files up and running on your system is to open the three modules at the same time: Map Management, GIS Layers, and GIS Layer Groups. Then make changes in the GIS Layer Groups and GIS Layers modules, save the changes, and then see how the maps look in the Map Management module.

The Layers module will be populated based on what shape files have been installed on your system. Investigate the list in the Layers module, and then go into the GIS Layer Groups module to define what each layer will be called when viewed in the map modules. Then you


144

can go into the Layers module and assign one of these layer groups to each layer. When you return to the Map Management module, these layer groups will now appear as items on the Layers drop-down box.

The actual appearance of layer data within the Map Management and Map View modules is set by adjusting the parameters for each layer in the Layers module. This includes the fill and outline colors for each set of shapes, the font, font color, and font size for text labels, which shape file field will provide the label information, and at what zoom levels each bit of information will appear. A detailed discussion of how to configure layers is described here.

Note Peek does not distribute BMP or GIS data files along with IQ Central. When you purchase IQ Central, your local IT or electronic resource representative will need to contact Peek Traffic in order to integrate your local mapping data into IQ Central.

Adding a New GIS Map This option is available only if you have the GIS Maps version of IQ Central installed. It cannot be accessed in the BMP Maps version of IQ Central. Follow these steps to create a new GIS map to your IQ Central environment.

1. Open the Map Management module.

2. Select Create New Map View from the Map View drop down list box, the Full extent map will be opened.

3. Enter the Name of the Map View in the map View Name field. This is the name that will reference the map when it is selected for display.

4. Enter a description of the Map in the Description field.

5. Target the area for the map view by positioning your cursor around the area that is to constitute the map view. Hold down the left hand mouse button and drag the cursor to define an area. Release the mouse button and the map will zoom in to display only the selected area. Continue this process until you have a view that displays the correct area for your map.

6. Click on the Save View button to save the map view and add it to the Map Views list.

Deleting a GIS Map View To delete a Map View that is no longer used, select the Map View that is to be deleted from the Map View drop down list. Click on the Remove View button and verify that you wish to delete the view.

Creating Map Views A 'map view' is a map display defined to appear in a certain way in the Map View module of IQ Central. The meaning of 'map view' is different on BMP and GIS systems, because the way that a 'view' is defined is fundamentally different in the two environments.

Map Views in BMP systems A 'map view' in the standard BMP version of IQ Central is just a single map file. Each bitmap map file creates a single map view. So the creation of views for the Map Viewer module is just the normal process of adding BMP files in the Map Manager module.


145

Map Views in GIS systems The GIS mapping version also uses the Map Management module to create map views. However, in GIS environment, a map view is actually a stored set of viewing parameters that defines how the data will appear when it is opened in the Map Viewer. Since GIS data can be viewed dynamically in the Map Viewer, these map view definitions can be important when you want to focus the attention of the operator on a particular region of the map, or even on a single intersection.

Creating a GIS Map View As described in the Map View Creation Overview, GIS mapping allows you to save a set of map viewing parameters as a 'map view.' These map views can then be pulled up within the Map Viewer module so the operator can see these pre-defined views of the map data. A 'map view' stores the four corners of the viewable area of the GIS data set, the zoom level, and which of the GIS data layers are visible.

To define a GIS map view:

1. If it is not already open, launch the Map Management module. This can be done by either pressing the Map Management button in the toolbar (shown at right,) pressing Alt-m,m, or by going to the Maps menu and choosing Map Management.

2. Use the Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Pan controls to display the portion of the map you wish to appear in this view.

3. Use the Layers drop down box to define which of the GIS data layers will be visible in the view. Place a checkbox next to those layers you wish to appear in the view. Remove the checkbox from those layers you wish to hide.

4. Fill in a Map View Name and a Description in the two fields at the bottom of the Map Management window. These fields will accept any alphanumeric entry, including punctuation. The Map View Name must be unique.

5. Note: The current list of Map View names can be seen by pulling down the Map Views list at the top left corner of the Map Management module. But if you select any of these other views before you define this new view, you will lose your view settings.

6. Press the Save View button, located at the top of the Map Management window.

Close the Map Management module. Open the Map View module (Press F3, or press the Maps button (shown at right) on the standard toolbar to open the Map Viewer) and select the new map view to verify that it appears as you wish it to appear.


146

Working With GIS Map Layers In a GIS-enabled IQ Central system, the GIS Layers and GIS Layer Groups are handled using two modules with those same names available on the Maps menu. The following illustration shows how GIS shape files create layers within IQ Central, which are mapped to Layer Groups within the GIS Layers module.

Figure 72 – Placing a zoom area

These layer groups then are available under the Layers button in the Map Management module. Which layers are visible or invisible are set before a Map View is saved in the Map Management module. The Map View module then uses these settings to determine what to display when a user selects a particular view of their GIS maps.

Creating GIS Map Layer Groups Layer Groups are a way that IQ Central maps the layers of your GIS shape files into the Layers that appear in Map View and the Map Management module. If you want to just use the layers that are provided by your shape files, just create a single layer group for each of them. Otherwise, you can create a group of layers of similar qualities. Say that you have shape files of 'lakes', 'rivers', streams', and 'oceans'. You may want to create a single Layer Group called 'Water' that will allow you to activate and deactivate them on your maps as a group. But be warned that linking them together will prevent you from activating or deactivating any of the shape file layers individually in your maps. Shape layers can be assigned to one, and only one, Layer Group. And Layer Groups are what you have access to in the Layers pull-down list in the Map Management module. You do not have access to the actual shape file layers in that setting. The actual assignment of shape layers to your layer groups is done in the GIS Layers module.


147

Figure 73 – Layer Groups module

Adding a Layer Group To add a new layer group to your list, follow these steps:

1. Open the Layer Groups pull-down list to see what groups have already been created. If the group you need is not already on the list, select New Layer Group... This item appears at the top of the list.

2. Type in the name of your new layer group in the Layer Group Name field. This is the text that will appear in the Layers pull-down list in the Map Management module.

3. Press the Save button to store the name of the new Layer Group.

Important If you type in a new layer group name and press Save without first choosing New Layer Group... from the top field of this dialog box, you will not be creating a new layer group, but instead you will rename whatever layer group was currently visible in the top list. For instance, on the screen above, if you neglect to change the Layer Groups pull down list from 'parks' to 'New Layer Group...' before typing in 'streets', you won't be adding a new Layer Group, but will instead be renaming the 'parks' group to 'streets'.

Changing the Name of a Layer Group To change the current name of a layer group, follow these steps:

1. Select the Layer Group you wish to modify in the top pull-down list on this dialog box.

2. Type in the new name in the Layer Group Name field.

3. Press the Save button. This will change the name of the group.


148

GIS Layers The GIS Layers, or just 'Layers', module is used to configure how GIS data will appear in the IQ Central map viewers. In this window, each row represents one layer of geographic data, and each layer represents one GIS shape file that has been stored on your system and configured in the IQ Central database. Some examples of the data that shape file layers could contain are:

Roadways

Water features

City boundaries

Landmarks

A shape file can store information about three types of geographical features: line features such as rivers and roadways, fill features such as cities and neighborhoods, and point features such as landmarks and mile markers.

The Layers module displays a list of layers in the table at the top of the screen, and the controls at the bottom to edit a single selected row of data. For more information on how to edit a layer, click on the sample screen shown above.

Note When using GIS maps, the "Layers' button in the Map Management module actually does not represent these shape-file based layers, but rather shows the names of the GIS Layer Groups that have been defined in IQ Central. Shape file layers are assigned to these layer groups here in the GIS Layers module.

Opening the GIS Layers Module There are a couple of methods to open the GIS Layers module:

Go to the Maps menu and choose GIS Layers

OR

Press Alt-m, and then the letter 'L'

Details About Configuring Layers The Layers module displays a list of layers in the table at the top of the screen, and the controls at the bottom to edit a single selected row of data. The table columns and the rows below are roughly aligned, so you will edit entries, generally, from left to right. The table itself is only used to display current settings and select which layer to edit. It is not used to edit values, with one exception. The Color columns can be double clicked, and if you don't like the current value, selecting No will open the color edit dialog box.

These values all determine how and when a layer's components are displayed on a map. The File Name, and Symbol Type and Style, are all set automatically when you add a new layer to the system. But the symbol type and style can be changed by the operator, if desired. The values that appear in the Field Name drop-down list are pulled directly from the GIS shape file. The rest of the values in a layer are defined solely by operator preference, based on how they want the shapes and labels of the data on that layer to appear on IQ


149

Central maps. The best method is to keep this module and the Map Management module open together as you go back and forth, tweaking the layer settings, saving them, and then refreshing the map view to see how the layers appear in the map environment. After the layer values have been tweaked to the operator's satisfaction, that is the best time to create views that will be available to day-to-day operators in the Map View module.

Important When changes to layer values are saved, they do not appear on the Map Management module until that window is closed and re-opened.

Figure 74 – Using the Layers module to configure GIS map layers

Always remember to Save your settings whenever you make changes, otherwise they will be lost when you exit the Layers window.

Adding a New Shape File as a GIS Layer The following steps describe how to point IQ Central at an existing GIS shape file and pulling the information in as a new layer in the Layers module:

1. Store the shape file on your computer somewhere where it will be permanently accessibly by IQ Central.

2. Go to the Maps menu and open the Layers module by selecting GIS Layers.

3. Press the New Layer button.

4. Using the Open dialog box, navigate to the place where you stored the GIS shape file, highlight it, and press the Open button.

5. The new layer will appear at the bottom of the list and will be selected. Before working with the layer, be sure to set a couple of the values immediately. First, set


150

the Symbol Characteristics > Size value to '1'. (It will start out as '-1', which will cause an error in the Map Management module.)

6. Set the Layer Group value to one of your available layer group values. It may already show that a value is present, but set it again anyway.

7. The Field Name value is pulled from within the Shape file itself. Select a field to use for the text labels of this data by choosing one of the entries in this list.

8. At least set a fill color for this data by pushing the Color > Layer button and choosing a color for this new layer.

9. Press the Save button to store the new layer in the IQ Central database.

10. Open the Map Management Module and verify that the new layer data is visible. (You may need to work with the Shape and Name range values (To/From) in the Layers module to get the data to appear.)

Deleting a GIS Layer The following steps describe how to remove a GIS layer from the list that appears in the GIS Layers module:

Note This procedure does not delete the source file for the GIS layer, namely the GIS shape file stored somewhere on your system.

1. Go to the Maps menu and open the Layers module by selecting GIS Layers.

2. Highlight the layer that you wish to delete.

3. Press the Delete button at the bottom of the window.

4. When the following dialog box appears, if you are in agreement with the deletion of all of this layer's settings, press Yes, otherwise press No to retain the layer.

Figure 75 – Verification is requested when deleting a layer

This completes the process of deleting a layer. If you wish to clean up your system of unnecessary files, you may also want to remove the shape file itself, the one that was the source of this layer, from your system.


151

Managing Devices on Maps The ability to work with devices in IQ Central's map viewer module include these functions:

Table 26 – Functions available from device icons in maps Global Functions

(Works for all device types)

Traffic Controllers & Masters

(Additional functions)

NTCIP Cameras (Additional functions)

Message Signs (Additional functions)

Place a device on the map so that it will appear in the same location whenever the Map Viewer is opened

Perform central override functions on single units or groups of devices

Streaming video in upper three zoom views

Open the Sign Control module

View the current status of the device

Open the Database Upload/Download module for a single controller or master

Open the Pan/Tilt/Zoom camera control

Run sign pixel diagnostics

Dialup connect/disconnect

Configure up to 4 zoom level representations of the device

Interactively change the zoom level view for a single device

Placing Devices on Maps Devices can be placed at locations on pre-configured maps whether you are using BMP maps or GIS maps. Placing devices on maps is not done in the Map Management module. The basic process for using devices on maps follows these steps:

1. Configure the maps to operate as you want them to

2. Add devices to your system and configure their connections to the real world hardware

3. Configure how devices change their appearance as one zooms into a map

4. Use the Maps > Place Icon on Map command to position devices on your maps

5. Open the Map View module and track the status of your devices. Zoom into the map to see more details about the state of each device .

For the most part, devices function the same way in the Map View module no matter which version of mapping you are using. However, there are differences on when the various device zoom icons are activated as you navigate around on the maps. The following topics describe how to place device icons on maps and how to specify how they will operate in the Map View environment.


152

Zoom Level Icons

Important Aside for the fact that the maintenance icon is often used as the Zoom Level 0 icon, maintenance icons are not the same as zoom level icons

The two, four, or five icons that represent an individual device in the IQ Central map view are not the same as the device icons that are specified elsewhere in IQ Central. Those icons (as configured in Tools > Advanced Options > Icon Management and Tools > Advanced Options > Link Icon to Device Type) are called 'maintenance icons' and are used everywhere else in IQ Central when displaying a list of device types. These maintenance icons are used in Device Types drop-down lists and when first placing a device on a map. But the icons or graphics that appear when viewing a live map are different than these maintenance icons.

1. First of all, 'Zoom Level Icons' is a misnomer, because these are not restricted to small iconic images; they can actually be large graphics files. This is in contrast to maintenance icons, which, in order to work properly in the interface, must be small images (i.e. actual 'icons').

2. A second difference is that there is only one maintenance icon assigned to each device type, but up to five Zoom Level Icons can be assigned to each device type. (By default, two images are assigned to sensor and weather station devices, four images for controller and camera devices, and five images for traffic sign devices.)

3. A third major difference between maintenance and Zoom Level icons is that maintenance icons can be entirely user-defined. The operator of an IQ Central system can change all of the maintenance icons for all device types in his or her system using the Tools > Advanced Options commands in the interface. Zoom Level icons, on the other hand, are fixed, at least for camera, weather station, sensor, and sign device types. (As of IQ Central version 1.2.)

The Zoom Level icons for controller type devices can be edited in IQ Central, using the Maps > Intersection Displays command.

Placing an Icon on a BMP Map Each device that you can connect with using IQ Central can be displayed on a map. To do this, you should first have allocated an icon to each device. The available icons are displayed along the bottom of the map. The drop down list boxes attached to each icon will list all the devices that have been added to the system.

Note You will only be allowed to position one instance of each device on a map. If you attempt to position a device a second time, an error message will be displayed.

The Device Icons Displayed window will list the description of each device that has been saved as an icon on this map. The Device Icons Temporarily Displayed is a list of those icons that you have added to the map but have not yet saved as a permanent part of the map. Any devices that are not in either of these lists, but do appear when you click on the drop-down list box attached to the icons, have not been added to the map.


153

Follow these steps to add a device to a BMP map:

1. Click on the drop down list box attached to the icon that represents the device that you want to add to the map. You will notice that those devices that have already been added to the Map will be grayed out in the list so that you cannot select them a second time.

2. Highlight the name of the actual device from the drop down list box and release the mouse button. The list will close and the cursor will change to a square with a cross inside.

3. Drag this square to the point on the map where you want the device located and click the left-hand mouse button. The icon will be displayed and the description of the device will be added to the Device Icons Temporarily Displayed window.

4. Repeat these steps for each Device that you want to see on the map.

5. When you are certain that the icons are in the correct position, you should save the icons to the map so that next time you access the map the icons remain positioned in the right place.

Placing an Icon on a GIS Map Icons that are place on GIS maps are geo-located using latitude and longitude values. This means that they will move with the map when the map is panned or zoomed. The icons will always be located in the same geographical position, regardless of which portion of the map is being displayed. If you zoom in to a smaller area, you might find that some of the devices “disappear”, since those devices are no longer physically located in the actual area that you are now viewing. The same thing will happen if you pan the map in any direction.

Follow these steps to place an icon on a GIS map:

1. Select the Device that is to be placed on the map from the drop down lists at the bottom of the page. All devices that are currently configured in IQCentrol will be listed here. Devices that have already been placed on the map will also not be available for placement.

2. Drag the Icon representing the Device to its exact location on the map.

3. The name of the device will appear in the Devices Temporarily Displayed list. When you are sure that it is correctly placed, click on the Device Icon and then on the Save button on the Toolbar. The device will now be listed in the Devices Displayed list.

Setting GIS Zoom Levels If GIS maps are enabled on your system, then you have the power to control how each type of device appears as you zoom into the map image. Up to five distinct zoom appearances can be set, depending on the device type. Using the GIS Zoom Levels window, you specify at what upper zoom level a particular device appearance shows up on the map. Zoom level 0 is the view to assign when you have zoomed way out on the map, showing the entire city, state or region. Zoom level 5, on the other hand, is the view you wish to see of this device when you have zoomed all the way into the map and are showing a very localized area. What you are selecting on this screen is the threshold level IQ Central will use to decide when to display the next higher level of detail about the device on the map view. The parameter that is tested against is the horizontal size of the displayed map.


154

GIS Zoom Levels - Example This example shows some settings that might be used for a portable sign device . Notice that these settings switch from the top level (simple icon) view of a portable sign to the 'small icon' view when the map display is at or below 19.8 miles. Then the GIS Map Viewer switches to the 'Medium Small Size' view of the device when the map's horizontal size is less than 6.6 miles. This process continues as you zoom into a map, until you reach the maximum detail display of the sign (Large Size) when the map displayed is less than 1.32 miles across.

Figure 76 – Setting Device Zoom Levels

Opening the GIS Zoom Settings module To open the GIS Zoom Levels window, you have a couple of options:

Go to the Maps menu, and choose GIS Zoom Levels.

or press Alt-m together and then press the letter z

Setting the GIS zoom levels for a particular Device Type These are the steps required to set the zoom levels for one kind of device:

1. Open the GIS Zoom Level window (Maps > GIS Zoom Levels)

2. In the Device Types pull-down list, choose the type of device you wish to edit.

3. Starting at the right side of the screen, set the Zoom 0 level. Set it to the horizontal size of the map where you want the device to first show up as you zoom into the image. You can either use the slider or you can type in the number (in miles) directly.

4. Set the Zoom 1 level for the next level of detail.


155

5. Repeat the process for each of the available zoom levels. (In general, signs have five levels, controllers and cameras have four levels, and sensors and weather stations use only two zoom levels.)

6. Press the Save button to store the new values in the IQ Central database.

7. If you want to modify zoom settings for other device types, select another device type and repeat the process.

8. When you are finished editing the zoom levels of devices, press the Close button to exit the Zoom Level module.


156

Viewing Maps The Map Viewer module is the primary interface for dealing with all of your devices geographically. It allows you to show pre-configured maps of your city or region, with the devices that are connected to IQ Central positioned on the map(s) at their physical locations.

The Map View module not only shows device locations, but also can be used to interact with the devices directly. The viewer can be used to:

Navigate between maps (BMP mapping) or zoom and pan across the available map data (GIS mapping)

Select pre-defined 'Map Views' to display

Poll visible devices at regular intervals

Retrieve the current status of individual devices

Left open with all device status windows open so that you can verify at a glance the current status of all devices

Zoom into detailed 'front panel displays' of controller devices

The BMP version of Map viewer, shown below, is described in the following section, titled "Using the BMP Map Viewer Interface."

Figure 77 – Map Viewer interface (BMP version)

The GIS version of Map viewer, shown here, is described in the section after that, titled "Using the GIS Map Viewer Interface."


157

Figure 78 – Map Viewer interface - GIS version

Using the BMP Map Viewer Interface When the BMP version of the Map Viewer module is first opened during a user's session, the Map Viewer module displays the first bitmap map in its list. The interface provides a group of buttons above the map, the map display area (showing any devices that are located within the area of this map), and a log of map loading activity at the bottom. Click on the portions of the Map Viewer window shown below for more details about using the BMP viewer's interface:

Figure 79 – BMP Map Viewer


158

Using the GIS Map Viewer Interface When the GIS version of the Map Viewer module is first opened during a user's session, the Map Viewer module displays the first map view in its list. The interface provides a group of buttons above the map, the map display area (showing any devices that are located within the area of this map, and a log of map loading activity at the bottom. Click on the portions of the Map Viewer window shown below for more details about using the interface:

Figure 80 – GIS Map Viewer


159

Accessing Devices in the Map Viewer Module Whether using the GIS or BMP versions of Map Viewer, there are several functions that can be performed directly from device icons located on the map. To access these functions, highlight the icon on the map that represents the device that you want to work with and click the right-hand mouse button. Each particular device type has its own set of options. The following table illustrates which options are available for which Device Type. For more information about any of these options, click on the particular function to open a pop up window with more detail.

Table 27 – Commands available in the device icon drop-down menu Type of Device Command

Save Icon Position Remove Icon Display Object Polling Rate Save Object Position Type of Grid Display (Standard, Hide, Alarm)

Intersection/Sensor

Status Save Icon Position Remove Icon

Camera

Camera Control Save Icon Position Remove Icon

Polling Rate Sign Zoom Save Object Position

Sign View

Display Object

Type of Display Grid (Standard, Hide, Alarm)

Sign (Portable, Overhead, VSL, etc.)

Status Save Icon Position Remove Icon Display Object Polling Rate Save Object Position

Weather View Type of Display Grid

Weather Station

Weather Status

Selecting a Map in the Map Viewer The image shown at right shows the steps to changing the currently selected map view in the GIS version of the Map Viewer. But the process is essentially the same in the BMP version of the viewer. The only difference is that instead of selecting a pre-defined window into the GIS map data, a 'view' in the BMP environment is just a single bitmap map file.


160

Figure 81 – Map Views menu

In either case, clicking on Map Views or Maps opens a drop-down list of the available map images configured on your system. This list is always shown in alphabetical order. Select one of the available map views and it will display in the Map Viewer window.

You cannot define maps or map views inside the Map Viewer module. That work must be done in the Map Management module. For GIS map views, the layers of data that are available in any given map view are also defined in the Map Management environment. These layers cannot be turned on or off inside the Map Viewer.

Setting the Default Map There is no place in IQ Central to explicitly select which map will appear by default in your Map Viewer. However, there is method to pick which of your map views or map files will be shown automatically whenever the Map Viewer is opened. The Maps button (BMP version) and the Map Views button (GIS version) both list the available maps that can be loaded into the viewer. These lists are alphabetical, and the first item in this list is what the Map Viewer loads as its default map.

To set a default map for the Map Viewer:

1. Open the Map Management module

2. Open the view that you wish to use as the default

3. Change the Map View Name (GIS version) or the Map name (BMP version) by adding a '0-' (a zero followed by a dash) before the actual name. This will force the map to appear first in the Map list.

4. Press the Save button to store the new name (Save View in the GIS version of Map Management.)

5. Look in the Map Views list in the Map Management module to verify that your newly renamed map appears at the top of the list.

6. Close the Map Management module.

7. Open the Map Viewer. Your selected default view should now load as the default map.

161

Chapter 10 – Polling and Scheduling Events Polling and scheduling are two different methods used by the central software to automatically retrieve data. IQ Central performs both polling and scheduling functions, and in fact several types of each.

Polling Polling is the regularly occurring attempt by the central software to go out to all devices of a specific type and retrieve their current status information. There are two kinds of polling in IQ Central: Map Polling and Log Polling.

Map Polling - Map Polling is used to define which data objects to retrieve from field devices and how often. After the data is retrieved and used by the program, it is generally discarded. Map polling is used, as the name suggests, to update the status of devices in the Map Viewer, but it also used as the source for Alarm monitoring data. The only time when this data is stored is when an alarm condition is detected, and then the details are stored to the Alarm log. The details of configuring and utilizing Map Polling are described in the Map Polling section below.

Log Polling - Log polling is similar to Map Polling in that it is used to define which data objects to retrieve from field devices and how often to do so, but unlike Map Polling, the resulting data is then stored to a data log for that device. The details of configuring and utilizing Log Polling are described in the Log Polling section below.

Note One other note about Map versus Log Polling concerns the Device Status viewer. One might expect the Status module to use the general data object polling capability of Map Polling, but that is not the case. Instead, it displays current data as retrieved by the Log Polling process, as well as general communications status information. It does not use Map Polling data.


162

Scheduling There are two types of scheduling available in IQ Central: Message Sign log retrieval scheduling, and Traffic Controller log retrieval.

Message Sign Scheduling – The Message Sign scheduling process is handled entirely within IQ Central. The details of configuring and utilizing Message Sign Scheduling are described in the Message Sign Scheduling section below.

Traffic Controller Log Retrieval – The second kind of scheduling, Traffic Control log retrieval scheduling, requires that an external software module be installed along with IQ Central. This software is called the IQ Central Scheduler. If installed on your system, you can schedule times for the central software to connect to traffic controllers or masters, and to retrieve that data logs back into the IQ Central database. These events can occur either immediately, once in the future, or at regular intervals in the future. The resulting data can then be used to generate reports. Traffic Controller Log Retrieval is described in the section below.

Map Polling Map Polling is a method in IQ Central to request that individual NTCIP data objects be retrieved from devices at regular intervals. The resulting data is used for the monitoring of devices in the Map Viewer, and also as a source of data to test for Alarm conditions. Map Polling data is not generally stored to the IQ Central database, except for individual data points when an alarm condition is detected or cleared. Because most of this data is not stored to the database, most data polling is done with Map Polling. (The IQ Central database file would grow very rapidly if too many data objects were polled using the Log Polling version of polling.)

There are four tools used to work with Map Polling:

The main map polling configuration window

The Polling Assistant

The Batch Update window

and the Dynamic Objects Configuration window.

Launching the Main Map Polling Configuration Window Map polling is configured using the Polling Options commands available under the Maps menu. The primary settings are in Maps > Polling Options > Map Polling Configuration. The Map Polling Configuration module is used to define what data objects are polled, based on device type or individual devices.

Chapter 10 – Polling and Scheduling Events

163

Map Polling Configuration The Map Polling Configuration module is used to tell IQ Central what data objects and dynamic objects should be requested from a device when it appears in the Map Viewer. This can be set by Device Type or by individual device. The Map Viewer uses this list of objects as a starting point. If the device's view in the map uses any of the objects in this map polling list, then those objects are requested from the device. The Map Viewer then uses the data to update the device's representation on the map.

Opening the Map Polling Configuration module This screen is opened by going to the Maps menu and choosing Polling Options > Map Data.

Or, by clicking on the Map Data button, which is available on either the Standard toolbar or the Map Configuration toolbar.

Using the Map Polling Configuration interface This 'Realtime Map Polling' window (shown at right) is used to define what data is retrieved (at regular intervals) from devices that are currently visible in the Map View module. A single retrieved data object is defined by creating a single row in the map polling list, displayed at the top of the Realtime Map Polling window.

Figure 82 – Interface elements of the Map Polling Configuration module

Polling object list – This list shows all of the NTCIP objects that are currently configured to provide data to the Map Viewer when the device is visible on the map.


164

Filter - Device Type – Filters the content of the polling object list to show only the data points that are currently configured for devices of this type.

Filter - by Selected Device Type – Turns the device type filter on or off.

Filter - Device – Allows a user to filter the list to show only polling objects currently configured for that specific device.

Filter - by Selected Device – Turns the device specific filter on or off.

Object – Shows the name of the object currently highlighted in the Polling object list. When a New Row button is pressed, this is where you select what object will be polled.

OID – Displays the numeric object ID of the currently highlighted data object in the Polling object list.

Description – This text shows some hints about the contents of this object, as well as its internal structure (if the object is used to store more than one data point, as many are.)

Poll frequency – This shows how often the data specified in the currently selected row of the Polling object list is requested from the device (in whole seconds.)

Enable – This is an on/off switch for this data object. An object can be configured in the Polling object list, but turned off, if you temporarily don't want to poll for that data.

Leave Connected – This defines whether the connection channel is kept open in between instances of polling for this data object.

Protocol (Normal/Dynamic) – This should be kept set to 'Normal', unless you specifically wish to poll for dynamic objects that you have defined using the Dynamic Object module of IQ Central.

New Row – Adds a new object row to the Polling object list for the selected Data Type or specific Device, whichever is currently selected in the window. Once you select the new row, you'll need to fill in the Object, Poll Frequency, Protocol, Enabled, and Leave Connected fields, and then choose the Save Row button to store it to the list.

Remove Row – Deletes the highlighted map polling object from the above polling object list.

Save Row – Stores the current settings for this data object into the table above.

Filtered Group - Enabled – This control can be used to set the Enabled state for all of the objects currently listed in the Polling objects list. The change isn't performed until you press the Save All button.

Filtered Group - Leave Connected – This control can be used to set the same Leave Connected setting for all objects currently listed in the Polling objects list. The change isn't performed until you press the Save All button.

Poll Frequency – This can be used to set the same polling frequency value for all of the rows currently listed in the Polling object list. When you enter a value here, click the Save All button to store the frequency in all of the objects listed.

Save All – Used in to store changes made to multiple rows of the Polling object group (made using the three controls to the left - Enabled, Leave connected, and Polling Frequency.)

Refresh Server Polling – This sends the current list of map polling object values to the device or all devices of this type (depending on what is selected in the Filter section above.


165

Polling Assistant – A tool that can help fill in the polling data object table when working with traffic controllers. (Note: The Polling Assistant is only available when a single device is selected. The button is grayed out when you have all devices, or all devices of a type, selected.)

Copy From – This command allows you to copy the entire Polling object list from another device. Note that this device does not have to be of the identical type.

Note Using 'Copy From' will overwrite the current data in your Polling object list. This control gives you an option to cancel out of the process if you decide not to do so.

Close – This closes the Configure Map Polling window. If you've made changes within the window that haven't been saved to the database, you will be asked if you wish to proceed. If you select Yes, your changes will be discarded. If you choose No, you will be returned to the window.

Using the Polling Assistant Since configuring map polling can be a complex process, particularly for devices such as traffic controllers that can have many data objects, IQ Central includes two tools to assist you in configuring map polling objects. The first was the Auto Populate Polling tool, available in the Configure Intersections module. The second is described here: the Polling Assistant. Unlike the Auto Populate tool, which works only for traffic controllers, the Polling Assistant can be used with any device type.

The Polling Assistant is a very smart module that presents a list of logical bits of data based on the type of device on which you are currently working. It asks you what data you wish to poll on, in the form of one screen of check boxes. It then takes the items that you check, and populates the Polling Objects list with exactly the data objects that contain that information. It uses one polling interval value for items that are considered cycle or interval status data points, and a different polling interval for more general device status objects, such as Alarms and Patterns. The example below shows how the Polling Assistant appears when working on a 3000E TS2 traffic controller.

Again, the resulting data will be used in two places, in the map viewer, and in the Alarms system.


166

Figure 83 – Intersection Polling Assistant dialog box

Controls at the bottom of the window allow you to select all of the check boxes on the window, or clear all of the check boxes.

Finally, you can either cancel out of this window to make no changes to the current Polling objects list, or you can choose OK to tell the assistant to erase the current contents of the Polling objects list and fill in the objects for all of the checked objects in this window.

Note The Polling Assistant is only available in the Map Polling Configuration window when a single device is selected. The button is grayed out when you have all devices, or all devices of a type, selected.

Caution Using the Polling Assistant will overwrite the current data in your Polling

object list. Choose the Cancel button in the Polling Assistant if you do not wish to overwrite the current list.

Notes About Configuring Map Polling for Alarm Monitoring This Polling Assistant tool can be very useful when you are attempting to set up polling for the IQ Central Alarms monitoring system. A couple of important points should be considered when picking what data to poll specifically for alarm monitoring:

The basic alarms that most users watch for are based on one item in the above checklist:

Short Alarms (basic alarms)


167

The Second-by-Second Status data objects are generally not polled for alarm monitoring (i.e. phase states, overlaps, ped states, rings, etc.)

The alarm monitoring system uses the 'Poll When Map Closed' value as its data collection interval. However, if the Map Viewer module is open, and you've configured the polled data to be retrieved more often while the map is open, AND the device in question is within the Map Viewer window, the alarm viewer will monitor the data at this higher rate.

Most users monitor the Short Alarms data objects at an interval of about 60 seconds.

Another set of data that may be important for alarm monitoring is the Detector Data that is configured in the lower right corner of the Polling Assistant window. These data objects concern Volume and Occupancy detector data, and they have their own polling interval values. Again, the alarms system uses the polling interval of 'Poll When Map Closed' unless the Map Viewer is open and the device in question is visible in the Map Viewer, at which point the Alarm monitoring system uses the Map Open polling interval.


168

Performing a Batch Update If you've configured a bunch of data objects to be polled from devices as part of your Map Polling (and Alarm Monitoring) strategy, you may, at some point, wish to set a bunch of polling objects to have the same intervals or connection settings. The Batch Update option in the Map Polling Configuration module gives you that capability. To perform a batch update, follow these steps:

1. Open the Map Polling Configuration module (Maps menu > Polling Options > Map Polling Configuration, or click on the Map Polling Configuration button in the Standard toolbar)

2. In the Map Polling Configuration, select the device that you wish to modify.

3. Select the group of polling objects that you would like to batch change.

4. Click on the Batch Update button (shown in the illustration below)

Figure 84 – Batch Update button in the Map Polling Configuration window

5. This will open the Batch Update dialog box. You can use this tool to change a group of objects to use the same map polling interval, map closed polling interval, polling object enabled flag, and leave connected flag.

Figure 85 – Batch Update dialog box

6. Set the value or values that you want to have applied to ALL of the objects you selected in the main Map Polling Configuration window.

7. Click OK to make the changes to those objects, or Cancel to leave the values where they were.


169

Dynamic Object Configuration The Dynamic Object Configuration module, also known as the 'STMP Polling' module, allows the user to configure multiple NTCIP objects in a single device into a single 'dynamic object'. Dynamic objects are part of the NTCIP standard. They are intended to be compound data objects that can easily be created and recreated, as necessary, in order to cut down on network overhead. For example, if 20 objects are called using a single command, the network traffic required to send and receive 20 separate data objects is cut down dramatically.

Figure 86 – Interface elements of the Dynamic Objects Configuration window

Dynamic objects are defined in this window, but they are actually used elsewhere within IQ Central. Once a dynamic object has been created, it is given a Dynamic Object number. It can then be called, by number, from within the Map Polling Configuration window.

Opening the Dynamic Object Configuration module The Dynamic Object Configuration module can be opened a couple of different ways in IQ Central:

Go to the Maps menu, open the Polling Options submenu, and choose Dynamic Objects.

or Press the Dynamic Objects button (shown at right) on the Map Configuration toolbar


170

Using the Dynamic Object Configuration Interface The Dynamic Object Configuration module is used to create and modify the dynamic objects list. The list is displayed at the top of the window. The rest of the window provide tools to add rows, delete rows, and save changes made to rows.

A row in the table is made up of a definition of which dynamic object to assign the object, which device type or device it applies to, and which object. In this environment, a dynamic object is defined as all of the rows that are assigned to the same dynamic object number.

Device Type to Verify OID - Why do we have a second field to select a Device Type? If we leave the 'For Device Type' field set to All Devices, we still need a device type master table to populate the object selection list. This field tells the Dynamic Object Configuration module to use this device type's object list to populate the Objects list control.

ActiveX Type - This is almost always set to 'Integer'. The only time to change this is when the Description of the object specifies that the data object is something else, such as an 'octet'.

OID Length - This should always be set to '1'.


171

Log Polling

Overview of Log Polling The two Log Polling tools mentioned in this section are used for several functions. The primary function of the Log polling module is to retrieve data objects from devices at regular intervals and to store the resulting data in the IQ Central database. A secondary function of this module is to configure how IQ Central monitors the communications connection status of each type of device. And finally, the Log Polling windows are also used to configure how often 'Time Syncing' is performed between the central IQ Central computer and the devices in the field.

Device Type Data - This module is used to define what Log Polling data should be requested from each Device Type.

Device Type Polling - This module is used to determine how often the above data should be polled for from each type of device and individual device. This module is also used to configure how often the time should be synchronized between the central computer and field devices. It is also used to define how IQ Central judges the status of communications with a device.

Launching the Device Type Data window Go to the Tools menu, open the Logging Options submenu, and choose Device Type Data.

Launching the Device Type Polling window Go to the Tools menu, open the Logging Options submenu, and choose Device Type Polling.

About the System Log The data from Log Polling is stored to the IQ Central System Log, which is discussed in detail in the "System Log" section of the Database Maintenance and Archiving chapter of this manual, beginning on page YY.


172

Device Type Data Log polling is defined on these two modules: Device Type Data and Device Type Polling. The Device Type Data module is used to define what data objects will be polled for each Device Type. It does not configure how often polling will occur. All of the rest of the poll settings, and any per-device choices, are done in the Device Type Polling module (along with a few other related settings.)

The primary function of this interface is to set up the data table that will be used within the IQ Central database to store the resulting log polling data for each type of device you are tracking. The basic steps to use this interface are:

1. Select a device type

2. Select a data object

3. Add the object to the log polling list

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all desired objects are in the list

5. Update the database table so it can receive data from the selected objects

6. Refresh the IQ Central server so that it polls for the requested data for devices of this type

Interface Controls These are the controls in the Device Type Data window:

Device Types – Use this pull-down list to choose the device type for which you will be setting the log polling objects list

Devices –This list merely operates as a reference list to show you what devices are currently configured in your system under this device type. Selecting a device in the list doesn't do anything.

Object – The NTCIP data object within the device that you wish to poll at regular intervals. Note that the interval to poll each object is set in the Device Type Polling module, not here.

Instance – In some cases, but not all, data objects are split up into several pieces to accommodate all of the values assigned to the object. For instance, the DetectorVolume object has 28 instances, one for each detector. The phaseStatusGroupGreens object (and, in fact, all of the objects in the 'phaseStatusGroup' class) have two instances: '1' for phases 1 through 8, and '2' for phases 9 through 16.

Data Type – This is a read-only field showing what type of data will be returned when the object is polled.

Description – This read-only text shows a description of what type of data the object contains, and in some cases, a bit about how the data is stored within the object. (For instance, which bit is used to track a simple binary state in the device.)

Base OID – This read-only data shows the object ID of the currently selected Object.

Add Object to List button – This button tells the module to add the currently selected Object to the 'Log Object List for Device Type' list.

Log Object List for Device Type – This shows a list of all of the data objects that are currently configured to be log polled for this type of device. Note that this table contains all


173

of your recent changes, so it may not be the same list currently being used by the IQ Central data server or within the database tables.

Update Database Table – This tells IQ Central to create the log polling data table for this Device Type, if none currently exists. Or it tells IQ Central to update the current table to include the fields that have been added since the last time the list was edited. If you have double-clicked an item in the list to tag it as a 'REMOVE' item, this button will delete the object from the Device Type table, including all the data that was previously recorded for these types of device for this data object. In such a case where you are removing data, you will be asked to verify that you do actually wish to delete the data from the IQ Central database.

Refresh Server Polling – Tells the NTCIP Data server to use the new list of objects for this type of device. This button serves the same function as the Refresh Server Polling button (shown at right) located on the Standard toolbar.

Close button – Closes the Device Type Data module without saving any changes you've made, although it will prompt you to save if it detects any changes.


174

Device Type Polling The Device Type Polling module has several functions, but the primary one is to take the objects that were defined as log polling data points in the Device Type Data module, and set up a polling interval for devices of that type. Unlike the Device Type Data module, this window allows you to set the schedule by individual devices, rather than by the whole device type. But this environment also allows you to set other polling parameters on a device-by-device basis. These include:

Intervals for Communications status checks (which show up in the Status module.)

How often to perform a time synchronization on the device (based on server PC's current date and time)

and parameters used to judge the current communications status when the device is viewed in the Map Viewer the IQ Central system log

Figure 87 – Device Type Log polling window


175

Communications Failure Testing 'Communications Failure Testing' means "How does IQ Central know when to report that a device has gone offline, or whose communications can be judged to be 'marginal'?" The parameters that determine when IQ Central will switch the comms status of a device to 'marginal' and then 'offline' are actually defined in the Device Log Polling window.

IQ Central tests a device's communications status using a cascading set of rules:

1. Open the Device Log Polling window (Tools menu, then Logging Options > Device Log Polling.)

2. Locate the communications failure testing parameters in the lower right corner of this window. These parameters use the number of poll intervals as the test conditions. Each device is polled as often as is necessary to fulfill all of its Map Polling AND its Log Polling requirements. These may be irregular intervals between polls if, say, the shortest map polling interval is 7 seconds, and the device type polling interval is set to 5 seconds. In this case, the interval between subsequent poll attempts could be 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 seconds. No matter . . . the following tests just count poll attempts and whether or not they succeed.

3. Set the Marginal Count value. This is the number of polls that must be missed in a row before the device is judged to be in a 'marginal' comms state.

4. Set the Marginal Poll Skip value. After a marginal state is determined for a device, IQ Central is instructed to skip polling for his device for this many poll intervals. It then tries again. If the attempt succeed, the device returns to a good communications status. If it fails again, IQ Central increments the count of polling failures and waits another Marginal Poll Skip duration before it tries again. It repeats this process until it either succeeds in communicating with the device, or it reaches the next test condition.

5. Set the Offline Count value. This is the number of bad poll attempts in a row (counting each marginal poll skip interval as ONE failure) before the device is judged to be 'offline'.

6. Set the Poll Persistence value. This determines how many hours, minutes, and seconds IQ Central will wait before it retests a device that has gone 'offline'. This is to prevent devices that are offline from eating up bandwidth as IQ Central repeatedly tries to regain a connection.

7. As soon as IQ Central receives a reply from the device in any of the above rules test, it changes the device's state back to 'online' and starts the testing process over again from the top.

Important Remember, the above comms failure test parameters apply to all polling, both Map Polling and Log Polling attempts at communications.


176

Message Sign Scheduling

Schedules Module IQ Central includes a schedules module that is designed especially for message signs that is completely separate from the Traffic Controller Scheduler. Message sign schedules contain a collection of Day Plans that determine what should be displayed on the sign at a particular time and/or a particular day or selection of days. See Day Plans and Schedules for more information.

When schedules are created and saved to a Device , they need to be activated before they will run. When schedules are activated (see Activate Schedule), you must remember that each and every schedule that has been saved to the Device will be activated and displayed. Please check all the schedules that are resident on the Device before activating schedules. To do this, select a schedule number on the Schedules tab and Refresh. This will recover the schedule details from the sign so that you can check the contents of the schedule. Repeat this for each available Schedule number.

Opening the Message Sign Schedules window These controls can be accessed under the Devices menu by navigating to the Message Signs > Edit Schedules control.

Day Plans and Schedules This function allows you to specify certain events that are to occur at certain times on selected days. The simplest way to describe how this works is to work though an example. We'll walk through how one would create a day plan and schedule for a message sign:

1. You must be connected to the sign before you send data to the sign. To connect to the sign, open the Sign Control window; select the required sign from the Devices list and click on the Connect button. Then return to Edit Schedules.

2. Let's assume you want to display Changeable Message 1 at 6am and Changeable Message 2 at 6pm every weekday of the year. In addition, you want Changeable Message 2 to be displayed all weekend (from 6pm on Friday until 6am on Monday) every weekend. To do this, we need to set up a schedule that will be tied to a specific day plan that will activate two separate events. To accomplish this, configure Schedule 1 to activate Day Plan 1 every month (all months checked), Monday through Friday (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday checked) every day of the month (all days checked).

3. Save this schedule to the database by clicking on the Save button.

4. Update the sign by clicking on the Update Sign button. The schedule is configured, but the day plan has not been defined yet. That's our next thing to do.

5. Click on the Day Plans tab so that we can set up Day Plan 1, which is already linked to the Schedule 1 schedule that we have just created.

6. Select Day plan Number 1, and select Day Plan Event Number 1. This Day Plan event is to be activated at 6am so the Day Plan Event Time should be set to have Hour = 6 and Minute = 0.


177

7. We then need to indicate what action is to be taken by this event number. Indicate Day Plan Action 1, which will be set up on the Events and Actions tab to display Changeable Message 1.

8. Save the Day Plan to the Database (click on Save to Database) and update the sign (click Update Sign.)

9. Select the Events and Actions tab. Here we need to set up Display Message Action 1 to display Changeable Message 1.

10. It is important that you check the content of the message that you specify here before you create the schedule. To do this, click on the Sign Control Button, select the sign and highlight the required message (in this case Changeable Message 1). Then click on the Get from Sign button and preview the message.

Note Each message has a CRC number that is calculated for it when that message is created and whenever it is changed. This is a calculated value that indicates the current version of the message. When you specify a message for an action, you must retrieve the CRC for that message from the sign. That CRC number is then stored together with the message number in the database and on the sign. If, when the schedule runs, the message that is specified in the schedule has a CRC that is different than the one that was saved at the time the schedule was created, the message will not be displayed and the action will be ignored. This eliminates the probability that another operator could change a message that is allocated to a schedule, causing an incorrect message to be displayed.

11. Before you click on Save to Database to save this action to the database and Update Sign to save this information on the sign, click on the Refresh CRC from sign so that the current version of that message is allocated to the action.

12. We must now repeat the previous two steps to create a day plan event for displaying changeable message 2 at 6pm.

13. Select the Day Plan tab.

14. Next, we need to set up Day Plan Event Number 2, which will call Day Plan Action 2 at 6 p.m. Note that the Day Plan Event Time is in military time format – 6pm is 18h00.

15. Save to the database and update the sign again.

16. Click on the Events and Actions tab to set up Day Plan Action 2 which will activate Changeable Message 2.

17. Once again, remember to check the contents of changeable message 2 before adding it to the day plan, and retrieve the CRC from the sign for that message.

18. Save the information to the database and update the sign again.

Now, as far as the displaying of Changeable Message 2 on the weekend is concerned, remember that Changeable Message 2 has been set to display at 6pm on Friday. No other action has been specified to take place until 6am on Monday morning. So, we do not have to do anything else to keep Changeable Message 2 displaying all weekend.


178

Scheduling of Traffic Controller Log Retrieval IQ Central Scheduler adds a scheduled traffic controller data log retrieval capability to the IQ Central traffic management central system. This is an add-on module that must be installed separately from the rest of IQ Central. Contact Peek Traffic to order the IQ Central Scheduler module if it is not currently installed.

The IQ Central Scheduler is a separate application that works in conjunction with IQ Central. It maintains its own database of tasks to be performed on devices that have been configured in IQ Central. The Scheduler functions as a Windows service, always running in the background. After a user schedules a particular event for a particular IQ Central device , the scheduler makes sure that those events occur on time.

With release version 1.0 of the IQ Central Scheduler, the only kind of events that can be scheduled are log retrievals from three types of traffic controllers: Peek 3000E controllers, Peek M3000E masters, and Multisonics OSAM masters. An interface is provided within IQ Central to program tasks for these kinds of devices. The full IQ Central Scheduler is composed of this interface, which is used to schedule tasks at some single point in the future or at regular intervals in the future, and the Windows service, which makes sure that those task occur at the defined time or times.

This package requires a properly installed and configured IQ Central system, version 1.2 or higher, to operate. Scheduled log retrieval can be configured for the following traffic controllers using this module:

Table 28 – Traffic Controller support for scheduled log retrieval Translator Firmware Type of Traffic Controller

Part # Version

Controller Firmware Required

Multisonics OSAM-32 Master Controller

97-599 v1.0.1 or higher v2.22

Peek 3000E Controller 97-602 v1.0.1 or higher v3.6.2

Peek M3000E Master Controller 97-601 v1.0.1 or higher v2.8.2

Once the data logs have been retrieved from one or more traffic controllers using this Scheduler module, they show up as data sets in the IQ Central Reports module.

Installing the IQ Central Scheduler To install IQ Central Scheduler on your IQ Central system, you will need the IQ Central Scheduler v1.0 installation CD. The scheduler must be installed on each computer where IQ Central is installed. The installation will require a system restart at the end of the process.

1. If a previous version of IQ Central Scheduler was installed on your system, you will need to remove it before you can install the newer version. To do this, go to the Start menu and choose Settings > Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs > IQ Central Scheduler. With the Scheduler highlighted in the programs list, choose Remove.

2. Place the IQ Central Scheduler v1.0 installation CD in the CD-ROM drive on your IQ Central computer. If you are going to install the program to a server and one or more IQ Central workstations, start by installing the Scheduler on the IQ Central server.


179

3. Autoplay should automatically start the scheduler installation script, but if your system is configured not to use Autoplay, browse to the CD directory and run the Setup.Exe file.

4. Follow the displayed steps to install the files. You will need to agree to the license agreement to continue with the install. On the third screen, Custom Setup, you have the option to pick which components will be installed and to pick where the files will install. For a single computer system or the server of an IQ Central network, go ahead and install everything. But you can use the Browse button to select a different place to install the program, if you wish.

5. Proceed through the rest of the install screens. On the last screen, select Finish to exit the installation program.

Note Although the scheduler program should be installed on each workstation where you might wish to access the schedule data, the schedule calendar itself is maintained in a centralized repository on the IQ Central server, so that everyone can see the same schedule.

6. If you are installing the program to a single IQ Central computer, that completes the install. However if you have an IQ Central network, you’ll need to complete a couple more steps to get the program working on all of the computers in your network. Repeat the above steps on each IQ Central workstation in your network, with the following changes:

7. On each workstation other than the server, when the installation gets to the third screen (Custom Setup), we want to deactivate the install of the Scheduler Service. The Scheduler Service should only be installed on the server. To deactivate this component, click on the Schedule Service item in the window and change its setting to Entire feature will be unavailable. Refer to the section below to see how this looks in the window.

8. Change the install location if you wish, then proceed with the rest of the workstation install. Note that the Browse button will not become available again until you select Required again at the top of the list. This is to prevent individual components from being installed in different locations. On the last screen, select Finish to exit the installation program.

9. Repeat the install on each IQ Central workstation where you wish to use the scheduler.

10. Now we need to make sure that the data file of scheduled tasks is available in a central location that can be accessed by the server (or single IQ Central computer) and all of the IQ Central workstations where Scheduler is installed.


180

Note The path to the network location of the IQ Central Scheduler task database can be either a mapped drive location or a UNC path. (Universal Naming Convention) Scheduler will work in either case, with one slight condition. A drive mapping, such as assigning the server drive to be the P: drive, for example, is only available if a user is logged in on the workstation. If the scheduled task is to occur when no users are logged into the workstation, the service may not be able to find the scheduled task file. Because of this, Peek recommends that you tell the Scheduler how to find the task file using the UNC path instead. As an example, if the workstation has a mapping of drive P: to be the C: drive on the server, which is where the central scheduled task file is located, the two valid options are (assuming the scheduler was installed in the default location): P:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central Scheduler\Configuration\ScheduledTasks.xml But the better choice would follow the UNC convention, which doesn’t require a user mapping to find a network location (of the form: \\servername\sharename\path\filename). In our case, it might look like this, if the sever on our network is called ‘IQ CentralServer’ and there is no sharepath: \\IQ CentralServer\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central Scheduler\ Configuration\ScheduledTasks.xml

11. If the location on the server is hidden to the workstations, you will need to move the data file out to a network location where they can access this file. If this is the case, move the ScheduledTasks.xml file out to the desired network location, and then launch IQ Central on the server.

12. Open the Scheduler interface by opening the Tools menu and choosing System Scheduler.

13. When the IQ Central Scheduler window opens, select Options from the Tools menu.

14. Now we need to point the Scheduler to the central task file. The Scheduler Options window will show that the local scheduler is pointing to the original location of the tasks file. The default location is C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central Scheduler\Configuration\ScheduledTasks.xml, but this location may have changed if you installed the Scheduler to somewhere other than the default location during a Custom install. In either case, use the Browse button to locate the task file, called ScheduledTasks.xml.

15. Once you’ve located the task file, select OK in the Scheduler Options window to accept the new location.

16. Close the Scheduler.

17. On the Windows desktop, right-click on the My Computer icon and choose Manage. In the Computer Management window, click on the Services and Applications group and choose the Services item. This will display a list of the currently active services in Windows.


181

18. Right-click on Peek Scheduler and choose Restart. After it restarts, close the Computer Management window.

19. Now we need to make sure that each workstation is also pointing to this central task database file. Go to one of the workstations and launch IQ Central.

20. Open the Scheduler interface by opening the Tools menu and choosing System Scheduler.

21. When the IQ Central Scheduler window opens, select Options from the Tools menu.

22. Now we need to point the Scheduler to the central task file. Use the Browse button to locate the ScheduledTasks.xml task file.

23. Once you’ve located the task file, select OK in the Scheduler Options window to accept the new location.

24. Close the Scheduler on the workstation and restart it.

25. Repeat steps 20 through 25 on each workstation.

This completes the installation of the IQ Central Scheduler.

Launching the Scheduler Interface The Scheduler service will start automatically each time Windows starts, but to access the task configuration interface of IQ Central Scheduler, follow these steps:

1. Open IQ Central. Be sure to log in as a user that has sufficient rights to access the Scheduler module.

2. Go to the Tools menu and choose System Scheduler.


182

Using the Scheduler Interface The Scheduler task configuration interface is shown in the figure below. There are four parts to the interface: the menu bar at the top, the tool bar just below that, the current task list on the left side of the main window area, and the configuration fields on the right side of the main window area.

IQ Central Scheduler task configuration interface

Figure 88 – Scheduled Task Editor

This interface is used to create, edit, delete, and manage traffic controller log retrieval tasks in IQ Central. The menu commands are self-explanatory. The purpose of the five toolbar buttons is shown in this figure:

Scheduler’s Toolbar

Figure 89 – Toolbar buttons in the Scheduled Task Editor

In the task list of the main Scheduler window, you can see all of the tasks that have currently been configured. The highlighted row or rows is the selected task or tasks, which can be deleted as a group. Editing can only occur on the row with the black triangle at the left end, indicating which database record is currently selected. The current values of that


183

task’s data fields are shown in the right side of the window. The operator can make changes to any of those settings to change the selected task’s operation.

Additional detail about each task is available in the Complete tab that appears at the top of the right side of the window. For the most part, this is just the same data displayed in a tabular format. One additional field that is important on the Complete tab, however, is the DeviceDisplayName field at the top of the table. The text entered here shows up in the Task list right after the“Retrieve logs from “ label.

Scheduler’s Complete tab

Figure 90 – Complete task details

These are the essentials of the IQ Central Scheduler task configuration interface. For instructions on performing specific operations with the Scheduler, refer to the following topics.


184

Adding a Scheduled Task If you wish to schedule a single or regularly-occurring retrieval of logs from a traffic controller in IQ Central, you can do this by creating a new task in the IQ Central Scheduler. To do this, you must have the device already configured and set up with a valid communications channel (a ‘connection’ in IQ Central terminology.) To create a new task, open the Scheduler module and follow these steps:

1. Open the Add Task dialog box by either pressing the Add a New Task button in the task bar (shown at right) or by going to the Edit menu and choosing Add New Task.

2. When the Add Task dialog box appears (see Figure 5), choose the device that will be the target of the log request. The device list appears at the top of the Simple tab.

Figure 91 – Task creation dialog box

3. Select which of the six available log types to retrieve from the device by placing checks in the checkboxes next to each type. You can choose one, or multiple logs.

Note The precise information that appears in each of these data sets is dependent on the device from which you are retrieving the data. The grouping of data into logs is handled differently by each type of controller and master.

4. Select how regularly the task should occur. It can be daily, weekly, or monthly.

5. If you selected Weekly, choose which days of the week you wish the retrieval to occur. If you selected Monthly, select which day of the month.


185

6. Enter the time of day on which you wish the data retrieval to occur. This time is by the IQ Central computer’s clock, and is in 24 hour (or ‘military’) time. For example, five minutes after midnight would be 00: 05 in the two time fields, and 11:32pm would be 23: 32 in the time fields.

7. If you want the task to stop occurring at some point in the future, click on the Task expires check box and enter the date that this task ends. The last log retrieval will occur at the last regularly scheduled interval on or before the beginning (00:00) of this date. (Note that you can enter a expiration time after the date in this field by typing directly into the field, should you need that option.)

8. One final task to perform to complete the setup is to name the task as you want it to appear in the task list. Click on the Complete tab and enter a descriptive name in the DeviceDisplayName field. This entry will be placed to the right of the “Retrieve logs for “ text in the main task list.

9. Click OK to accept the task settings. The new task will appear in the Task list on the left side of the window.

10. Although the task is configured in memory, it has not yet been stored to the Tasks database. To do that you can either close the Scheduler interface (this will not interfere with task events, since those are handled by the background Windows Scheduler service) or you can press the Save Changes button. (Shown at right)

This completes the creation of a task in IQ Central Scheduler. You can repeat the task creation process multiple times before saving or exiting the Scheduler module, to create tasks for differing schedules or devices.

Modifying a Scheduled Task Modify an existing task in the IQ Central Scheduler is a straight-forward process. It just involves selecting the task to be edited in the list on the left side of the Scheduler interface window, and making changes to that task in the fields that appear on the right half of the window. And then be sure to save the changes using the Save Changes button (shown at right).


186

Deleting a Schedule Task To delete a task or multiple tasks in the IQ Central Scheduler module, follow these steps:

1. Open the Scheduler interface.

2. Select the task to be deleted in the list on the left side of the window. If you want to delete multiple tasks at once, you can shift-select to add a whole range of tasks, or Ctrl-select to add individual tasks to the highlighted list. Make sure all of the tasks you wish to delete are highlighted, and more importantly, none that you don't want to delete are highlighted. (See figure below.)

Figure 92 – Selecting multiple tasks for deletion

3. To delete the selected tasks, either press the Delete Selected Task(s) button in the toolbar (shown at right), or go to the Edit menu and choose Delete selected task(s).

4. Although the task or tasks are deleted in memory, the change has not yet been stored to the Tasks database. To do that you can either close the Scheduler interface (this will not interfere with task events, since those are handled by the background Windows Scheduler service) or you can press the Save Changes button. (Shown at right)

This completes the deletion of tasks in IQ Central Scheduler.

Changing the Location of the Task Database If you wish to move the location of the IQ Central Scheduler tasks database, you can move the file manually, but you will also need to point all of the Scheduler modules on all IQ Central workstations to find the file in the new location . The file itself is called ScheduledTasks.xml, a standard XML data file. By default, it is stored at C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central Scheduler\Configuration\. This file can be moved anywhere where all Scheduler clients can access it, either locally or across a network. Once the file has been moved, open the Scheduler interface on each workstation, and follow these steps:


187

1. Go to the Tools menu and open the Options window.

Figure 93 – Options dialog box for the System Scheduler

2. Select the Browse button and navigate to the new location of the tasks file.

3. Highlight the tasks file and select Open.

4. Select OK to save the new database location.

5. Restart the Scheduler interface.

6. The next few steps are only important on the one machine where the Scheduler service is running. This would be on the stand-alone computer, or the server of the IQ Central system, if that's where the IQ Central Scheduler was defined to run on your network. On the Windows desktop, right-click on the My Computer icon and choose Manage.

7. In the Computer Management window, click on the Services and Applications group and choose the Services item. This will display a list of the currently active services in Windows.

8. Right-click on Peek Scheduler and choose Restart. After it restarts, close the Computer Management window.

9. Repeat this process on the other workstations, if there are any.

This completes the process of changing the location of the scheduled tasks database file.


188

189

Chapter 11 – Alarm Monitoring Prior to version 1.5 of IQ Central, alarm monitoring in the software was linked solely to the Map Viewing module. This limited its usefulness considerably, so a new global device monitoring alarms system has been created and added to IQ Central.

The core of the new alarm monitoring system is the IQ Alarm Processor, a Windows Service that now runs in the background and is automatically started whenever the server is powered up, and is automatically restarted if it should ever go down (for example, when the office loses power or when Windows locks up.)

The other components of the new alarm monitoring function include an Alarm Configurations module, where new alarm tests are defined for devices, an Alarm Status viewer module, Alarm and Device History reports, and a new status bar that indicates overall alarm status with an icon and informative tooltip text.

The basic idea for performing alarm monitoring in IQ Central follow these six steps:

1. Install the Peek IQ Alarm Processor along with IQ Central

2. Define what data, when retrieved from devices, will cause IQ Central to raise an alarm

3. Define how alarm states are indicated in the IQ Central interface (in the Status bar and in the Alarm Status module)

4. Monitor the status bar to see when alarms are detected

5. When an alarm is detected, open the Alarm Status module to get the details and then either handle the situation or acknowledge the alarm to be handled later.

6. To diagnose ongoing or chronic problems, use the history reports in the Alarm Status module to troubleshoot the problem.

The next sections describe how to use the various parts of the alarm monitoring system that were introduced above.


190

Using the Alarm Configuration Window The Alarm Configuration window is a standalone application that is launched from within IQ Central. It performs the function of allowing a user to define what alarm conditions will trigger alarms within IQ Central. These alarm conditions are based on data retrieved from devices via Map Polling. So the operator configures IQ Central to retrieve certain NTCIP data objects from a set device or type of device, and the Alarm Configuration window is then used to define what operating limits will be used to trigger alerts within IQ Central's alarm system.

Launching the Alarm Configuration Window The Alarm Configuration window can be launched in a couple of ways:

Go to the Tools menu, open the Alarms group and choose Configuration

or

Right-click on the alarm icon located in the IQ Central status bar (at the bottom of the main window) and choose Alarm Configuration

Alarm Configuration Interface

The Alarm Configure window's interface is described below. It has four basic areas:

a device list on the left

an inherited alarm condition area in the upper right,

the defined alarm condition list in the middle right

buttons to add, delete and save changes to the alarm conditions list, in the bottom right of the window

Chapter 11 – Alarm Monitoring

191

Figure 94 – Alarm Configuration window

It's important to remember that this interface doesn't show anything about the current state of alarms. It only shows what alarm conditions have been defined.

Alarm conditions can be defined globally, for all devices in the system, by entering them under the System node. Or they can be defined for a device type or group type by defining the alarm condition at that level. Or they can be defined on a device-by-device basis, by entering the condition at the lowest level of the device hierarchy tree. The left side of the interface shows the list of devices in a variety of formats, based on which tab is selected at the bottom of the area. The default view is 'View by Group', which is shown in the illustration below.


192

Figure 95 – Device Hierarchy - 'View by Groups'

Each device, group or device type, or the System node is given a graphical icon which shows what alarm conditions have been defined for that node. The appearance of this icon follows these rules:

Node Icon Meaning

No alarm conditions are defined or inherited at this node level

At least one alarm condition has been defined at this node level

At least one alarm condition has been defined at this node level AND it has also inherited at least one alarm condition from a node higher in the device tree

This node has inherited at least one alarm condition from a node higher in the device tree


193

View By Type Display The 'View by Type' tab in this window works in the same way as the 'View by Groups', except that the device trip in the left part of the window is organized by device type, rather than Groups. This tree view uses the same node icons to indicate assigned and inherited alarm conditions, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 96– Alarm Configuration window - "View by Type"


194

All Alarms Display The final method of organizing the device tree is a simple 'All Alarms' view, which simply lists all of the configured alarms in the system. Alarm conditions cannot be added, edited or deleted in this view, although the list can be sorted. As you can see from the figure below, this is a list of all alarm conditions sorted by Severity level.

Figure 97 – Alarm Configuration window - "All Alarms"

It is useful to note that if you find the alarm condition you're looking for in the All Alarms display, select it, and switch back to one of the other two displays, you will be presented with the editing controls for that device and alarm condition.

For details on how to create, delete, or modify an alarm condition, refer to the "Setting Up a New Alarm" topic.


195

Using the Alarm Status Window The Alarm Status module is used to view and track all of the alarms that are currently active in the system. An alarm is 'active' if no data has been received that acts as a 'cleared' state for the alarm. (The clear state for an alarm is defined when one defines an alarm condition.)

Launching the Alarm Status Module There are a couple of methods that can be used to launch the Alarm Status module:

Go to the Tools menu, choose Alarms, and then select the Status command

or

Right-click on the alarm status icon in the IQ Central status bar at the bottom of the IQ Central window, and choose Alarm Status.

or, probably the easiest option:

Press the F7 function key.

Using the Alarm Status Interface When the Alarm Status module appears, it shows a list of all of the currently active alarms, meaning device data that was retrieved during polling and resulted in tripping an alarm condition. 'Current Alarms' are those that have not been cleared by the data going back into the acceptable range. Alarms that have been 'acknowledged' in the main IQ Central window will show up in this list.

Figure 98 – Alarm Status window

The alarms list is sorted by date and severity, by default, but it can be resorted by the user at any time by clicking on one of the column headers in the list. Clicking on a column header again will toggle the sort between ascending and descending sorts.


196

The Dock/Restore button tells the Alarm Status window to 'dock' itself along the left edge of the IQ Central window or to return to its previous position.

The Auto Refresh feature is OFF by default. This option tells the module whether or not to update the current list with the latest alarms that have occurred. The Refresh View button will perform this refresh of the list manually, whenever the button is pressed. The Auto Refresh refreshes the current alarms list every 10 seconds or so.

Note It may be useful to turn off the auto-refresh function when you have sorted the list in some manner, because the auto-refresh function will automatically return the alarm list to its default sort criteria of ascending date and descending severity.

The buttons at the bottom left of the window provide access to the alarm history viewer with two different filtering criteria, each based on whichever current alarm row is selected in the current list. The Display Alarm History option opens the Alarm History viewer and filters the list by the currently selected alarm type. The Display Device History option opens the Alarm History viewer and filters the list by all alarms (current and historic) that have occurred for the selected device.

The background and text colors that appear in the Alarm Status window's alarm list can be modified using the Settings controls located in the Alarm Configuration module.

Note Some useful information about setting up polling for alarm monitoring is provided in the topic "Using the Polling Assistant" in the Polling & Scheduling Events chapter.


197

Setting Up a New Alarm This topic describes how to create new alarm conditions in IQ Central, and also how to delete alarm conditions, and modify existing alarm conditions.

Creating a New Alarm Condition These are the steps to perform when you want to set up a new device-based alarm condition in IQ Central:

1. Open the Alarm Configuration module. (Tools menu > Alarms > Configuration, or right-click on the alarm icon in the status bar and choose Alarm Configuration)

2. If you are hoping to apply the alarm condition to a device type, switch the view to View by Type with the tab at the left end of the bottom edge of the window.

3. On the left side of the window, select the group, device type or device for which you wish to define the alarm condition. (If it will be an alarm condition that is to apply to all devices in the system, choose the System node.)

4. Click on the Add button at the bottom of the alarm conditions list. A new item will appear in the alarm condition list. Alarm conditions have some graphical indicators to provide information about the state of the alarm condition definition, as shown in the next figure.

Figure 99 – Features of the alarm conditions list in the Alarm Configuration window

5. Select an alarm Type from the drop-down list. This list is populated based on what type of device or devices are covered by the selected node.

6. Choose the Severity of the alarm that will be generated should this condition be breached. The Severity of an alarm condition is used to determine how IQ Central will respond when this level severity of alarm appears. Whether or not the status bar alarm icon blinks, or if it generates a tooltip text message, or if there is an audio indication that this type of alarm has arrived are defined by severity level in the Alarm system Settings window.


198

7. Type a Message that will appear when the alarm condition is detected. This message will also be stored in the Historical Alarm database.

8. If the alarm condition has an expanded detail arrow in the corner, click on it to access the extra data fields that are available to define this type of alarm condition.

Figure 100 – Example of data fields in the expanded alarm conditions view

9. Fill in any additional fields required to define the alarm condition. An expanded alarm condition view can provide extra fields to define what inputs are used and how they mathematically tested, or it can provide a way for you to only test individual bits in a retrieved data object.

10. Once the alarm condition is defined, you will see a yellow triangle at the upper left corner of the alarm row. This indicates that the condition has been modified, but not saved. Press the Save button at the bottom of the list. The yellow triangle should disappear.

That completes the creation of an alarm condition. The new alarm condition becomes active as soon as you save it. You can create or edit more conditions, or exit the window at this point.


199

Editing an Existing Alarm Condition To edit an alarm condition, follow these steps:


2. Select the node in the device tree for which the alarm condition is defined.

3. Select the alarm condition that you wish to change.

4. Make the desired change. You may need to expand the alarm condition box to see all of the fields that define it.

5. When you are finished modifying the alarm condition, press the Save button at the bottom of the alarm conditions list.

That completes the modification of an alarm condition. The new settings for the alarm condition become active as soon as you save the alarm. You can create or edit more conditions, or exit the window at this point.

Deleting an Alarm Condition To delete an alarm condition, follow these steps:


2. Select the node in the device tree for which the alarm condition is defined.

3. Select the alarm condition that you wish to delete.

4. Press the Delete button at the bottom of the list. Notice that the alarm condition is not removed from the list immediately, however the yellow triangle does appear at the top left corner of the alarm condition. This means that the alarm condition has been marked for deletion.

Caution Before proceeding, be sure you have marked the correct alarm

condition for deletion. Once the alarm condition is deleted and the change is Saved, it cannot be recovered. It will need to be re-created if you wish to use that alarm condition again.

5. Press the Save button at the bottom of the list to finish deleting the alarm condition.

That completes the deletion of an alarm condition. The old alarm condition will go inactive as soon as you save the deletion.


200

Handling Alarms If you have configured alarm conditions in your alarm system, alarms will begin showing up in your IQ Central interface in a number of ways, depending on how you configured your alarm system and what severity level of alarms are being detected. IQ Central provides tools for monitoring alarms, but how your office handles these alarms will depend on using procedures that respond to the signals that IQ Central provides.

1. When a Critical level alarm (typically) arrives, you may have configured it to give a pop-up message in the status bar (as shown below). This pop-up will not disappear until you acknowledge the alarms. This is intended to make sure that serious alarms are actually seen by human eyes.

Figure 101 – A critical alarm configured to display a tooltip popup message

2. To acknowledge such an alarm, right click on the alarm icon in the status bar. (The alarm icon, by the way, will always show the highest level of alarm that is currently active in the system.) In the popup menu, choose Acknowledge Alarm. This does not clear the alarm or remove it from the Alarm Status viewer. It just removes the immediate alert.

Figure 102 – Acknowledge the alarm to temporarily remove the tooltip message from

your IQ Central display

3. Presumably, at this point, you will wish to dispatch someone to address the problem with the device, or at least schedule some action.

4. For normal status monitoring, you may wish to keep the Alarm Status window open as a status monitoring tool in your IQ Central interface. If you open the Alarm Status module (F7), choose the Dock button, and check the Auto Refresh checkbox, this module will sit on the left edge of your IQ Central window and continuously update to show the current state of active alarms. Keeping this module open will not change the way that the alarm icon in the status bar behaves.


201

Figure 103 – The Alarm Status module docked to the IQ Central window and auto

refreshing

5. Another way to monitor the normal status of alarms is to hover over the alarm icon in the toolbar. This will present a summary of the current alarm condition within IQ Central at the moment, as shown below.

Figure 104 – Current alarm status tooltip visible when hovering over the alarm icon

6. You may wish to attempt to troubleshoot an alarm. One way to do this is to select the alarm in the Alarm Viewer module and use the two buttons at the bottom of the module to investigate the history of this type of alarm and this device within your system.


202

Configuring the Alarms System The Alarms system has a set of global parameters that determine how the system operates, based on alarm severity level. These parameters determine how the alarm service presents an incoming alarm, in both audio and visual representation.

Opening the Alarm Parameters The Alarm Parameters window is accessible from the Alarm Configuration module. Follow these steps to open the Alarm Parameters window:


2. Click on the Settings button at the bottom of the Alarm Configuration window. (shown at right)

3. Select the tab for the alarm severity level whose behavior you wish to modify.

Setting the Parameters There are three levels of alarms available in IQ Central: simple informational alarms, more serious Warning alarms, and the most important 'Critical' alarms which usually deal with operational shutdowns, security issues, or serious safety issues. The Alarms System Settings window has three tabs of settings, one for each type of alarm. The same controls are available on each pane, but the settings are independent of one another.

Typical Settings for a Critical Alarm The following figure shows what the Critical Settings pane looks like with some typical values entered.

Figure 105 – Alarm System Settings - Critical settings


203

Audio Settings No Sound – As the name suggests, when this severity level of alarm arrives, IQ Central does not make a sound. This is typically the setting for Informational alarms.

System Sound – This option tells IQ Central to play one of the standard Windows system sounds when this type of alarm arrives.

Play Wave File – Another option to the System Sound above is to provide IQ Central with your own audio file (a .wav file) to be played whenever this severity of alarm arrives. It's important to keep this sound file short, say no more than 5 seconds, so that many incoming alarms will not step on one another during their audio alerts. To use this option, click on the Play Wave File check box and then press the Browse button to open an Open file dialog box where you can navigate to, and select, your desired audio file.

Test – This button toggles between 'Test' and 'Stop Test'. When the test is activated, it will play either the system sound or the selected .wav file, using the repeat interval specified below.

Repeat Interval – This setting tells IQ Central how many seconds to wait before repeating the sound. This repetition will continue until the alarm is 'acknowledged' in the Status bar. Setting this value to 0 tells the alarm system to play the sound only once and stop.

Visual Settings Fore Color – The color of the font text that will appear in the Alarm Status module for an alarm with this severity level.

Back Color – The color of the background for an alarm of this severity level as it appears in the Alarm Status module.

Flash Repeat Interval – This tells IQ Central whether or not to blink the alarm icon in the IQ Central status bar. To configure a flashing icon, check this checkbox, and then set the number of seconds for each phase of the flash. (e.g. Setting a value of 2 here will cause the icon to stay ON for 2 seconds and then go OFF for 2 seconds, for a flash cycle length of 4 seconds.)

Show Popup – This tells IQ Central to display a persistent pop-up tooltip window over the alarm icon in the Status bar whenever this level of alarm arrives. This is typically only turned ON for critical alarms, because this kind of display will require a user to 'acknowledge' each alarm that arrives before the pop-up can be dismissed from the screen. Setting this value ON for informational alarms, for example, could result in an annoying situation in which the user is perpetually required to acknowledge incoming alarms while working with IQ Central.

After you've made changes to the available settings, you can either switch to the other alarm severity panes and make changes there, or you can click OK to save the new settings and leave the Alarm System Settings window, or click Cancel to discard your changes and exit the settings window.


204

Typical Settings for A Warning Alarm

Figure 106 – Alarm System Settings - Warning settings

As an example of how the Warning alarm indicators may be set up, the above dialog box shows that this type of alarm will cause a custom sound file to play once, and then the alarm will appear in the Alarm Status module with an orange background with black text. The alarm icon will not blink and no popup will appear over the IQ Central status bar.

Typical Settings for an Informational Alarm

Figure 107 – Alarm System Settings - Info settings

Finally, the above screen shows how one might configure an Info alarm to be alerted within IQ Central. In this example, the arrival of an Informational alarm will not generate any sound effects, nor will it flash the alarm icon or show a popup message. This type of alarm will appear as a yellow row with brown text in the Alarm Status module.

205

Chapter 12 – Reports There are three sources of data for reports within IQ Central: device configurations, device activity, and user activity. Reports on device configurations would include data about how many and what types of devices are configured in IQ Central. Reports on device activity would include event log reports, performance data, environmental data, and any other data collection logs that the devices collect. And reports on user activity could include IQ Central login/logout and account activity records, as well as any front panel interface activity logs that are collected by field devices.

Report generation in IQ Central is based on the reporting tools of the Microsoft Access database in which IQ Central stores its data. A set of pre-configured reports is included in the IQ Central Report Selection Module, but additional reports can be configured for IQ Central using your own copy of Microsoft Access and its report configuration tools.

Using the Reports Interface The Report Selection window in IQ Central is used to select from a list of pre-configured reports. When a report is selected and you select the Create Report button, the data is retrieved from the IQ Central Access database and formatted as a Word file. Once visible in the Word window, all of the tools of the Word environment are available. This means that the appearance of the report can be reformatted to meet your needs, or a template can be applied to meet a standard report layout. This also means that the data in the report can be exported using any of the Word export filters.

Only one report can be selected and created at a time. If the report you need is not visible on the list, it is possible to create a new report using the Access database environment.

Applying Report Filters The Report Selection window also allows the operator to select what filters or sorting criteria to use when generating the report.

Note Some of the reports do not utilize all of these filter selections.

First check the box next to the report that is required. Then select the parameters that will further define the report. Each of the report filters is described below. Once you have made the required selections, click on the Create Report button to process the report.

Date Range If you click on “For Date Range”, the Date Range fields will open allowing you to select the required date range for the report. Click on the drop down list box for Start Date and End Date to open a calendar page from which you can select the required dates.

If you click on “For All Dates” the Date Range selection boxes will not be displayed and the report will be generated for all dates.


206

Device Type If you click on “For Selected Device Type”, the available Device Types will be listed in the window and you will be able to select the required Device Type by highlighting the required device Type in the drop down list

If you click on “For All Device Types”, the Device Type selection will not be displayed and the report will be generated for all Device Types.

Devices If you click on “For Selected Devices”, all the Devices for the selected Device Types will be listed, allowing you to select a specific device. Click the drop down list box and highlight the required device.

If you click on “For All Devices”, the Device selection will not be displayed and the report will be generated for all devices.

Users If you click on “For Selected Users”, a Users list will open, allowing you select a specific user. Click the drop down list box and highlight the required user.

If you click on “For All Users”, the User selection will not be displayed and the report will be generated for all Users.

Chapter 12 – Reports

207

Generating Source Data for Reporting It is important to remember when running an IQ Central report that the process of running the report generates no new data. It counts entirely on the existing data stored in the IQ Central Access database. There are a couple of different methods/tools used to populate the database with the data you will need. Data comes from possible sources:

User activity

Device configuration data

Device log files

Getting this data into the access database depends on the source and type of data. Some data, like IQ Central user activity, is automatically logged by the software. This is why users must log in when starting the application. Other data is created as a side-effect of normal user operation, such as device configuration information. When you create an instance of a device type, the information for the device is stored in the database and becomes available for reporting.

The third source of data, however, requires a bit more IQ Central configuration. Devices often keep data logs of what is going on in and around their location. To store this data in the IQ Central database, there are a couple of methods, depending on the type of device and the type of log:

Alarms and Status event logs This kind of data can be retrieved by IQ Central using the Log Polling functionality. This involves regularly sending out a message to a device and asking for the status of pre-configured pieces of data. This kind of data retrieval should be used sparingly, since regular reporting of many data points can quickly generate a huge amount of data. This type of data retrieval can be done for any type of device and is called Log Polling.

Controller Log Retrieval Traffic controllers are often configured to store large amounts of operational, user access, and environmental data on-board. This information can be pulled back into IQ Central using scheduled log retrieval. This source of data is only available for controllers and master controllers, and the exact data that is available depends on the make and model of controller being accessed.

Message Sign Log Retrieval Another source of error log data is message signs. Message Signs can be configured to collect user-defined error logs, and these logs can be retrieved into the IQ Central database using the Message Sign Bulk Operations module.


208

Exporting Report Data Once a report has been created using the Report Selection module, it is presented in a Word window. In Word, you have the option to export the report data in a variety of formats.

Basic Export 1. If you want to keep the basic report before making any changes, save the Word file.

2. If you just want the table headers and data, highlight the report's header and delete it.

3. Open the File menu and choose Save As.

4. In the Save as type: pull-down list, choose the type of data export you wish to generate. Common types of data export include: XML, HTM, RTF (rich text format), or TXT file.

5. Type a file name and save the file.

Structured Export 1. If the basic method doesn't provide enough data structure for the final destination,

you can perform a bit more pre-export manipulation to get a more usable data source. Again, delete any non-data text from the file. But keep the column headers. The text to remove may include header and report footer text, as well as graphical elements such as rules.

2. Now we need to convert the data text to a table. Highlight the data, including the header row. Go to the Table menu and choose Convert > Text to Table.

3. When asked for details on the conversion method to use, remember that the number of columns will usually equal the visible number of columns plus one (for an initial spacing tab), and be sure to separate the columns at 'Tabs'.

4. If there is a blank column at the left edge of the table, highlight it and go to the Table menu and choose Delete > Columns to remove it.

5. Verify that the table is logically consistent. If there are problems with the conversion, you can undo the conversion (Edit > Undo, or CTRL-Z) and try again.

6. When the data is complete and correctly formatted within the table, highlight the table and Copy it.

7. Open Microsoft Excel.

8. Past the table into Excel.

9. Save the data file. You now have an easily-ported data file of the report.

Chapter 12 – Reports

209

Creating a Custom Report The method to create a custom report in IQ Central requires you to close IQ Central and open the IQ Central database with Microsoft Access. The creation of Access reports takes a bit of knowledge and practice, but it is very powerful. The basic process is described here:

1. Close IQ Central.

2. In Windows, navigate to the location of your IQ Central database. The file is called NTCIPServerDB.mdb. The default location for this database file is C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\.

3. When you find the file, double-click it to open it in Microsoft Access.

4. Click on the Reports button on the left side of the database window.

5. A report is based on a set of data. You can use either a simple data Table (such as the table 'DeviceList') or a Query as your data source. A query is a way to sort, merge, combine, filter, or repackage the data on one or more tables into a new listing that shows only the data you want. If the table or query already exists from which you wish to pull your report, you can go ahead and start building the report. If not, you will need to go to the Query section of the database and put together the data set you need. Only after you've got the set of data you wish to report on can you start to generate the report. (Once a query is set up, the next time you run the report the query will go back to the source data tables and update itself. In this way, the report will include the latest data stored in the database.)

6. To create a report from scratch, you can either generate a new report by clicking the New button at the top of the window or click on the 'Create report by using wizard' option at the top of the Reports list. In either case, the first step will be to name the report. The second step will be to tell Access what data set (Table or Query) to use as the report's data source. To create a report by modifying an existing design, select the report that you want to emulate, choose Copy, and then Paste it to a new file name. When the new file appears in the Reports list, highlight it and click the Design button at the top of the window. Keep in mind that the name you give a report is the name that will appear in IQ Central's Report Selection list.

Note A report's name is important. If you wish to hide a report so that it will not appear in the Report Selection list, just start the reports name with an underscore character ('_') AND ALSO right-click on the report, select Properties, and make sure the Hidden check box is checked. One may wish to do this if one is creating a single report with several sub-reports within it. You probably would not want the sub-reports to show up on the Report Selection list in IQ Central. Just give them names that start with an underscore, such as '_Critical Alarms', and call the sub-report from a master report that doesn't start with an underscore, such as 'Alarm Events'.

7. Select a data source for the report, place the fields you want to appear in the report, and format the text fields and labels as desired.

8. Save the report.


210

9. Test it to see if it presents the data you need in the manner you had hoped for.

10. Tweak and save the report until it fits your requirements.

11. Close Access.

12. Restart IQ Central.

13. Open the Report Selection window and verify that your new report appears in the list.

211

Chapter 13 – User Management & Security The IQ Central has a three tiered user-level security system that limits what each logged-in user can access within the IQ Central environment. It controls access by requiring that all users log into the system before they can perform an actions. By default, the system is delivered with three User Accounts, each with its own preset Password, already created.

Table 29 – Pre-configured User Accounts User Name Password Access Level

Level1 1 Operations Level2 2 Maintenance Level3 3 Administration

It would be wise of you to add your own Users Accounts. After you've created your own user accounts, you can then delete the above standard accounts so that you have complete control over who has access to your system, and at what level. Keep in mind that only users with Administration Level access have full control of the system, including the ability to add and delete other User Accounts.

The system will not allow you to delete the Administration user if you have not first created another Administration user. We advise that you not limit the access of the Administration Access Level (as defined in the Access Levels module.) The Administration level of access should always have full read-write ability for all functions. This is important so that you have at least one level of users that has access to the full functionality of the system.

For more details on how to manage user accounts and the general security of IQ Central, please check the related topics below.


212

Managing User Accounts User Accounts are used to control who can access what parts of the IQ Central interface. User accounts are split into three levels of access: Operations level, Maintenance Level, and Administration level. The exact access that each of these levels gains is set using the Access Levels module, which is discussed in the Managing IQ Central Security topics. But managing the accounts themselves is done mostly using the User Management controls under the Tools menu. Unless you change the settings yourself, user management functions are only available to those users with Administration access.

Note Even if a user does not have administrative level access to IQ Central, he or she can still change the account password on his or her own account.

The primary tool used to perform these functions is the User Administration Module.

Adding a New User Account Open the User Administration module by going to the Tools menu and selecting User Administration, then click on Add/Delete. Note that the User Administration tools are only available to users with Administration level access.

To add a new User, select the required level (Operations, Maintenance or Administration) from the drop down list at the top of the window. Click on the New button and the New User fields at the bottom of the window will become available for input. Enter the Name of the new user as well as their Password. The Password must be entered twice, in the Password field and in the Confirm field, in order to verify that you have typed what you thought you did. Passwords can be anything up to 10 characters in length, can contain letters and/or numbers, and are case-sensitive.

Once you have filled in the fields, choose the Add button to add the new user to the list above. Verify that the user appears in the left window, and verify that this list is showing the proper access level, as indicated by the selected item in the top pull-down box and also by the color-coding of the name itself.

When you are finished adding new accounts, select Close to exit the User Administration module.

Deleting a User Account To remove a User Account from the system, open the User Administration module by going to the Tools menu and choosing User Administration, then clicking on Add/Delete. Only users with Administration level accounts can access the commands in the User Administration submenu. In the window, make sure the user's account you wish to delete appears in the right-side window. (Accounts in the left-side window do not activate the Remove button when selected.) To make the account appear in the right-side list, make sure the access level pull down at the top of the window is set to one of the other two levels to which this user does NOT belong. That moves those types of users to the left-side list, and your user will then appear in the right-side list. Now, highlight the Name of the user's account you wish to delete and click the Remove button.

When you are asked to verify the deletion of the account, be sure you are deleting the correct account, and choose Yes to proceed. Choose No if you decide to keep the account.

Chapter 13 – User Management & Security

213

Note IQ Central will not allow you to delete the last remaining Administration level user account.

Changing the Security Level of a User Each user account in your IQ Central installation is assigned to one of the three security levels: Operations, Maintenance, or Administration. You can change the security level assigned to a given account using the User Management module.

To change the security level of an account, open the User Maintenance module by going to the Tools menu and choosing User Management, then click on Add/Delete. Locate the user account you wish to change and notice what its current security level is. Make sure that the security group chosen at the top of the window is the destination group into which you wish to switch the user. This is important because only users on the right-side list can be changed, and that list is made up of users who are currently in a group other than the currently selected one. Select the user to be modified, and press the << button to move it into the left-side list. When finished, press close to save the changes and close the User Management module.

Note It is important to remember that 'Security Level' and 'Access Level' are two separate concepts within IQ Central. Security Level is the level assigned to an individual user account, which is selected from the three pre-configured security levels. Access level, on the other hand, is a way of modifying what the members of the Operations, Maintenance, and Administration group can access within the IQ Central interface. Security Level assigns the levels to users; Access Levels define exactly what each of those levels can do.

Caution Do not change the last Administration level account. IQ Central will

not allow you to delete the last Administration account, but it will allow you to reassign it to a lower security level. If you lock yourself out of the ability to change user accounts, you will not be able to regain access to the full system without contacting Peek Technical Support.

Changing Your Password Any user logged into the IQ Central system can change their own password, as long as they know their existing password.

1. To change your password, go to the File menu and choose Change Password.

2. In the Change Password dialog box, type in your Old Password. Be sure to match the case of the old password.

3. Type the new password into the Password field. Be sure to write it down somewhere, since passwords are encrypted and cannot be retrieved from the database if they are forgotten.


214

4. Type the new password again in the Confirm field.

5. Press the Change button to make the modification to your user account.

6. Click Close to exit the Change Password dialog box.

Setting a User Password Passwords are attached to individual User accounts. Passwords can be anything up to 10 characters in length, can contain letters and/or numbers, and are case-sensitive. Please make a note of your password, as it is stored on the system in an encrypted format so there is no way to retrieve the password if you forget it.

Typically, there are only two ways to modify a password: either by the Administrator user when the User Account is first created, or by the logged-in user himself. However, there is a work-around method to change the password of an existing account if you are an Administration user.

To Change the Password of another User if You are an Administration User 1. Open the User Administration module. (Tools menu > User Administration >

Add/Delete) or via the Toolbar button.

2. Write down the name of the account you wish to modify. Be sure to match the case of all letters in the Name.

3. Make sure the selected security level (Operations/Maintenance/Administration) is something other than the one assigned to the target user.

4. Select the User Account in the right-side list.

5. Press Remove to delete the account. Verify that you do wish to remove the account.

6. Select the Security Level that you wish the user to have with the new password using the pull-down list at the top of the window.

7. Click the New... button.

8. Type in the name of the account you just deleted. Be sure to match the account name exactly.

9. Enter the new password in both the Password and the Confirm fields.

10. Press the Add button to add the user account.

11. Click on the Close button to exit the User Administration module.

The account now exists with a new password.


215

User Administration Module The User Administration module allows an Administration level user to add, delete, and modify the security level of user login accounts within IQ Central. Click on the image below to see additional details about the controls in this module.

Figure 108 – User Administration module


216

Managing Security Security within IQ Central is enforced by the fact that every user who wishes to use the controls of the system and access the devices being managed must first log into the system before any controls are available. User Management is a separate part of this process, and is described in the Managing User Accounts topics.

But after user accounts have been defined, there are several other tools for reviewing, modifying and monitoring system security, as described in the following topics:

Device Security (NTCIP device passwords) - Only available for Message Signs in IQ Central v1.1 through v1.4

Access Levels for user accounts

Viewing a list of all logged in users

As an example of the importance of maintaining system security, please notice what can happen if the wrong person has access to the Central Override capability for traffic controllers in IQ Central. A Central Override can be sent to one or many devices. If an unauthorized person were to send a central override to multiple traffic controllers in your system, and say, they put those intersections into Flash mode during rush hour, one can imagine that this would cause a serious safety problem, as well as a logistics nightmare. For this reason, Flash override commands require a user to type in his or her user account login and password again, before the override command will be sent. But, of course, this safety feature emphasizes the importance of maintaining network security. If the network administrator has not maintained control of user accounts and passwords, access to critical features such as Flash overrides may be available to personnel who should not have it.

Currently Logged In Users This module performs two important functions:

It lists all of the user sessions that are currently logged into IQ Central. This includes all local logins as well as all users across a network, if you have a networked IQ Central system. It also may include some agent logins, such as the IQ Central scheduler service or the IQ Alarm Processing service.

It allows an administrator level user to shut down another user login remotely. This is intended to allow an administrative level user to restart an entire IQ Central network from one workstation when necessary for database maintenance.

Opening the Currently Logged In Users window The Currently Logged on Users command on the Tools > User Administration menu displays a listing of all of the users that are currently logged into IQ Central. Or you can use the Currently Logged in Users button on the User Administration toolbar (shown at right.)


217

Shutting Down a User Login Follow these steps to shut down a user login:

1. Open the Currently Logged In User window

2. Select the login that you wish to shut down by placing a check in its checkbox. You can choose one or multiple accounts to shut down. (If the login has become active since the window was opened, you can update the list by pressing the Refresh List button.)

Caution Performing the next step on a user account where the user is making

changes to the database can result in that user losing his or her changes. Be very careful that no one is doing major edits to the database when you request this shutdown.

3. Press the Shutdown selected Clients button, located at the bottom of the window.

4. A warning message will appear within each of the client windows, like the one shown below.:

Figure 109 – Each login that will be shut down sees this message

5. After the warning message, the IQ Central window hosting the chosen user login will close.


218

Access Levels Module You can set various access levels for each user that has access to the system. The functions that a particular user can access are set based upon the Security Level that is set for that operator.

Each User Account has a security level allocated when the account is created. IQ Central has three default security levels: Operations, Maintenance, and Administration. Every module and window in IQ Central has controls on it. Using the Access Levels module, you can specify which controls are accessible by each level of user. Each level can have one of three types of access allocated – Read-Write, Read Only, or Not Accessible. Read-Write allows the user full access to the field or control function. Read-Only allows limited access, (i.e. the user can only view the field or control function, but cannot make changes.) And Not Accessible renders that field or control completely unavailable to that level of user.

Note It is important to remember that 'Security Level' and 'Access Level' are two separate concepts within IQ Central. Security Level is the level assigned to an individual user account, which is selected from the three pre-configured security levels. Access level, on the other hand, is a way of modifying what the members of the Operations, Maintenance, and Administration groups can access within the IQ Central interface. Security Level assigns the levels to users; Access Levels define exactly what each of those levels can do.

Version 1.6 also added a couple of enhancements to the Access Levels module. First, the columns of the table can now be used to sort the table by that column's data. Just click on the column header to switch between an ascending or a descending sort order. And a second change is that the MDI item in the Access Levels list (Choose 'MDI' in the Select Window field), which is used to control what menus and interface elements are accessible by each of the three user groups, now includes a full listing of the command path for the menu item in the Description field. This is very helpful when an administrator is trying to restrict access to particular controls in IQ Central. The figure below shows the Access Level Module's MDI list, sorted by the Description field.

Figure 110 – MDI selection in the Access Levels window


219

The MDI selection in the Access Levels window allows an administrator to control what commands each group can see (and use) in the IQ Central menus

Changing the Access Level for a Module Control

1. To do this, click on the Select Form drop down list box and highlight the form for which you want to set access levels.

2. Each control that is available on the form will be listed in the Control name list. The description field provides you with a brief description of what the function of the control is. Select the control you wish to modify.

3. When the control is selected, its details will be displayed in the edit fields below the data window. Select the applicable access requirement for each Level and click on the Apply button.


220

221

Chapter 14 – Database Maintenance & Backup

IQ Central uses an Access database to store all device data, event log information, program data, and system logs. The topics in this section describe how to work with the database, how to keep it operating correctly, and how to backup and restore part or all of the database.

Working in the IQ Central Access Database IQ Central stores most of its configuration and customer information in a single Microsoft Access™ database. Some configuration of IQ Central requires that the operator open this database and make some modifications directly to the tables stored there. If you need to open and modify the IQ Central database, be aware of the following facts:

The central Access database for IQ Central is stored at C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Peek Traffic\IQ Central\. The file is called NTCIPServerDB.mdb. This area of your hard drive may have been locked down by your IT staff. However, to use IQ Central, you will have already requested Administration access to this folder in order to use the application.

This database file will always be stored in the above location, no matter where you installed the rest of IQ Central.

Caution BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN EDITING THE DATABASE DIRECTLY. FOLLOW DIRECTIONS ABOUT DOING SO EXPLICITLY, SINCE MODIFICATION TO ANY OTHER TABLE IN THE DATABASE WHILE YOU ARE WORKING IN THE FILE COULD RENDER YOUR IQ Central INSTALLATION INOPERABLE.

When editing values in Microsoft Access, your changes will be saved automatically whenever you exit a record.

It is OK to edit the values stored in the IQ Central tables in Access, but do not change the names of the tables themselves, or the field column names within those tables.


222

Here is a list of the tables included with an installation of IQ Central:

Figure 111 – IQ Central database table listing

To edit the contents of a table, simply double-click on the table to open it, highlight the cell you wish to change, and type your change.


223

System Logging IQ Central has several tools that allow the system to record a history of events that have occurred during operation. This System Log keeps track of user activity, changes to the device and connections lists, communications events, and optionally, user comments. The event log entries can be viewed from within the User Comments Module, or they can be printed as an Event Log report.

Note The System Log is a different log record than logs retrieved from traffic controllers and master controllers using the System Scheduler tool, and it is also different than the Device Event Logs retrieved from Message Signs. Those events are stored in separate tables within IQ Central. The System Log is more like the top level record of activities within the software package.

The system log can grow quite large if there are a lot of devices being tracked, especially if Extended Logging has been turned on. This is the point of the Size Event Log module, to allow for the management of the size of the System Log.

Size Event Log Module The Event Log Size module is used to define how much space the IQ Central System Log can take up within your IQ Central Access database, and on your hard drive. This tool sets the number of event log records the system will track. IQ Central will never grow the table to a size larger than the one defined here. When the table is full, IQ Central will begin overwriting the oldest records.

The module also displays how much of the currently configured space is being used by log records and the number of entries this represents. By default, the System Log event table is configured to be 21,000 records.

Opening the Event Log Size Module To open the Event Log Size module, you can perform one of the following options.

Go to the Tools menu and choose Logging Options and then Size Event Log.

or you can select the Event Log Size icon on the System Maintenance toolbar

Note If you resize the log to smaller number of records than the current setting, you will be deleting records in the database. If there is data stored in those records, they will be erased.

Extended Logging Extended Logging is an option available under the Tools > Logging Options menu. This option controls the amount and type of detail that is included in the event log files. For standard operation, extended logging should not be turned on, since it can cause the log data tables to grow very quickly. It should only be turned on if additional detail is required in the log file for diagnostic purposes.


224

If Extended Logging is active, a check mark will appear next to it when the drop down menu is opened. If there is no check mark, Extended Logging is inactive. To make it active when it is inactive, or inactive when it is active, click on the menu option and follow the prompts.

User Comments Module The IQ Central System log can be documented. Users can attach comments to events to describe what was happening, what caused the event, or what the resolution was.

To add a particular note to a specific event, open the User Comments module by selecting User Comments from the View menu. A window will open, allowing you to enter a comment for a particular event. If you know the date of the event for which you want to add a comment, enter that date in both fields. If you are not sure of the date, you can enter a range of dates so that all the events that were logged between those dates will be displayed in the list so that you can locate the required event.

You can also specify that events logged by a specific operator should be displayed. To do this, select the specific operator from the drop down list box. Only events logged for that operator will be displayed so that you can add the required comment.

Adding a Comment

1. Locate the event for which you want to add a comment. Click on that event and the 'Comment' field will be activated.

2. Type in the comment you wish to attach to the event.

3. Click the Save button and the comment will be added to the event log. The comment will also be included on the Event Log report when it is printed.


225

Archive and Restore Module This option is used to create backups of your database, and/or to restore your database from one of these backup files. You either can choose to archive the entire database or select specific tables for archiving. When restoring from a file, you can choose which specific tables from the archives to restore into the current database.

The module acts on a database table-by-table basis. So, one select s the tables one wishes to work with, and then chooses whether to ‘archive’ the tables to an external Microsoft Access database file (i.e. a .mdb file), or to ‘Restore’ the selected tables from an external Access file.

Figure 112 – IQ Central Archive and Restore module

As long as no significant database changes have occurred as part of an IQ Central update, which is specified in the release notes for the update, the Archive and Restore module can be used to back up your database information before the software update, and then it can be used to restore the data back into your updated system.


226

227

Chapter 15 – IQ Central Customization IQ Central has historically been a user-customizable application that allowed a great deal of freedom when it came to configuring the interface and the operation of its various modules. As the application has evolved, however, Peek Traffic has attempted to steer the application more toward a user-friendly interface and away from pure customizability.

Several of the customizing modules are still available within IQ Central, however it is recommended that extensive customization of the application using these tools be avoided, unless you are working with a qualified Peek Traffic customer service representative, and you fully understand the impact that your changes will have on the rest of the program.

The tools that still remain within IQ Central to customize its operation are:

Icon Management - Used to set icons for modules within IQ Central. This should not be confused with intersection icon management, which is handled using the traffic controller map management tools.

BlockBuilder - Used to set up master block tables within the IQ Central database.

FormBuilder - Used to define and modify module window interfaces and link them to items in the IQ Central database.


228

Device Icon Management The Icon Management module is a simple interface for attaching graphical icons to key functions within IQ Central. The module can be launched by going to the Tools menu, choosing Advanced Options and then Icon Management, or by clicking on the Icon Management icon (shown at right) in the System Maintenance toolbar.

It has the following controls:

Select Icon

Icon Name

Icon File Name

Icon Detail

Using this interface, you can perform the following functions:

Editing an Existing Icon

Adding a New Icon

Deleting an Icon

Linking an Icon to a type of device

Icons You can specify the icons that are to be used in the map system. The system is installed with standard icons, but you can customize these to suite your needs. You can use any .ico file (size 32x32). To access the icon information, click on Icons from the Maps menu. You can add new icons or you can delete or edit existing icons.

Adding an Icon

Deleting an Icon

Editing an Icon

Icon Name Enter the name of the icon as it should appear in the Icon Names list when you access icons in IQ Central. Select the icon you want to use from the drop down box, or choose to Add a New Icon.

Icon File Name The Icon File Name indicates the physical location of the saved Icon File on your computer’s hard drive. You can enter the name and full path of the icon file or you can click on browse to select the icon.

Highlight the .ico file that is to be added and click on the Open button. The file name and its complete path will be stored in the Icon File Name field.

If you manually enter the path and file name in the Icon File Name field, you can click on the Test Icon button to “test” that the path and file name that you entered is correct.

Chapter 15 – IQ Central Customization

229

Icon Detail If you choose to add a new Icon, or you just want to view the details for the Icon file selected, click on the Icon Detail button. The following information will be displayed:

Icon Name

Icon Filename

To add a new Icon, enter the name of the Icon and then enter the filename (including its path) in the filename field. If you do not know the full path and file name, click on the Browse button to navigate to the directory that contains the Icon file that you want to use.

If you enter the file name manually, you can check that it is correct by clicking on the Test Icon button. This will locate the Icon and display it sop that you can verify that the correct Icon has been selected.

Click on Save to save the Icon to the database and have it allocated to the Device Type.

Editing an Icon If you want to change the image that is being used as an icon, click on that icon from the Icon Names drop-down list box. The current icon will be displayed. Browse to the new .ico file that is to be used and select that file. The new picture will then be used. You will not be able to use an icon file that is already being used. This will prevent any confusion about what the icon actually represents when it is displayed on your map.

Creating an Icon from an Image File If you do not have an appropriate .ico file and no software available for the creation of .ico files, you can create one by opening any other type of graphic image in Windows Paint, setting the image size to 32 x 32 pixels, and saving it as a bitmap file (.bmp), but before you save it change the extension to .ico. If you do this, the image file will be useable by IQ Central as a device or interface icon.

Adding an Icon

To add a new icon:

1. Select Add a New Icon from the Icon Names drop-down list box.

2. Enter the name that is to be used by the Map system to identify the icon.

3. Enter either the full path and file name of the icon file, or click browse to locate the icon file.

4. Select the icon that you want to use and then click on the Open button.

Note If you choose to enter the file and path name of the .ico file (without using the browse button), you can check the icon file by clicking on the Test Icon button.


230

5. The icon that you have selected will be displayed on the form so that you can check that you have selected the correct one.

6. Once you have added the required information, click on Add to add the information to the system.

Chapter 15 – IQ Central Customization

231

Link Icon to Device Type Module When you have added all the icons to the system (see Adding an Icon), you can link each Device to a particular icon. To do this, select Link Icon to Device Type from the Map menu.

All the Device Types that are installed in the system will be displayed in the drop down list box attached to the Device Types field. Select a Device and then double click that Device Type in the list that is displayed. This will open the form to allow you to allocate an icon to that Device Type.

Click on the Icon names drop down list box and all the available icons will be displayed. Select the one that you want to use for the Device Type that is highlighted. That icon will display next to the field so that you can check that it is the correct one. When you have selected the correct one, click on the Link to Icon button to complete the process.

Note that you will not be permitted to allocate an icon to more than one Device Type. This ensures that there is no confusion when the icons are placed on a map.


232

BlockBuilder & FormBuilder Block Builder is a function that allows objects to be grouped into Manufacturer Specific Object Groups. It facilitates the conformance of the uploading and downloading of object to and from controllers that operate under legacy protocols.

FormBuilder is used to connect the blocks of a legacy controller to the display windows within IQ Central.

Users of IQ Central should never need to use BlockBuilder or FormBuilder.

BlockBuilder Module The BlockBuilder module, which should only be used by advanced Administrators of an IQ Central system, can be launched in a couple of ways:

Using the toolbar: Click on the button, located on the Administration toolbar.

Through the menus: Go to the Tools menu and choose Advanced Options > BlockBuilder.

With the keyboard shortcut: Just remember, its an alternate TAB: Hold down the ALT key and press t, then a, then b.

Using the BlockBuilder Module Block Builder is a function that allows objects to be grouped into Manufacturer Specific Object Groups. It facilitates the conformance of the uploading and downloading of object to and from controllers to legacy protocol.

FormBuilder Module FormBuilder is an interface that allows IQ Central to be customized in the screens used to interact with the IQ Central database. FormBuilder requires a detailed knowledge of the underlying database structure and contents of the IQ Central database.

The FormBuilder module, which should only be used by advanced Administrators of an IQ Central system, can be launched in a couple of ways:

Using the toolbar: Click on the button, located on the Administration toolbar.

Through the menus: Go to the Tools menu and choose Advanced Options > FormBuilder.

With the keyboard shortcut: Hold down the ALT key and press t, then a, then f.

Warning BlockBuilder and FormBuilder should only be used by very advanced users. It is not recommended for any operator of IQ Central without the direct supervision of a Peek Traffic representative. Contact Peek Traffic for more information on using the BlockBuilder module.

233

Glossary 1880EL The model number of a Transyt brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

3000E The model number of a Peek brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

3800EL The model number of a Transyt brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

390CJ The model number of a Traconex brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation. 'CJ' stands for "Chris Johnson", a senior engineer from the old Traconex Corporation days, and now with Peek Traffic.

820A The model number of a Multisonics brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

Actuated Identifies a type of traffic controller which responds to calling signals generated by the actions of either vehicles or pedestrians. See also Semi-actuated and Fully-actuated.

Adaptive Split Control A means of intersection split selection based on vehicular activity.

Advance Call Detector A detector located a considerable distance upstream from an intersection which calls the green to that approach.

Advance Warning A per-movement output used to give advance notice of an upcoming yellow or red indication. Typically used at hidden intersections with “prepare to stop” indicators.

ASTC Controller Advanced Solid State Traffic Controller: the name given to a controller design specified by New York City DOT. This acronym was chosen to distinguish it from the more general ATC standards development program.

ATC Controller Advanced Traffic Controller, a design developed per the ATC standards development program of the State of California and the Federal Highway Administration. Requires the controller to have a separate engine board and run the Linux operating system.

Auto/Manual Switch A traffic cabinet switch which, when operated, discontinues normal signal operation and permits manual operation.

Barrier A logical term to describe a line of compatibility in a multi-ring intersection signal plan in which all rings are interlocked. Barriers assure that there will be no concurrent selection and timing of conflicting phases for traffic phases on different rings.


234

BIU Bus Interface Unit, required to interface a TS-2, Type 1 traffic controller to any type of cabinet hardware. Converts NEMA TS2-Type 1 EIA/TIA-485 Serial Data to cabinet discrete inputs and outputs.

Cabinet An outdoor, weather-tight enclosure for housing controller units, master units, detector electronics and other associated traffic control or monitoring equipment.

Call The result of a detector or signal activation by either a pedestrian or a vehicle. A signal to the controller indicating that a vehicle or pedestrian is present and is 'requesting' the right-of-way.

Connected

Connected and Disconnected are separate states than Online /Offline . A device is 'connected' if the communications channel to that device has been opened on the IQ Central computer. A connected device does not mean that any communications with the device have occurred, just that the channel has been opened on the PC end.

CMU/MMU Conflict Monitor Unit - Also known as an MMU (Multifunction Management Unit). This device monitors the green, yellow, and red AC loadswitch outputs for conflicts, the absence of a proper red signal and the watchdog signal from the controller. Any real and potential unsafe condition will force the intersection controller into flash mode.

Device

In IQ Central, a 'device ' is any piece of hardware or software that the application manages using the NTCIP communciations protocol. The pre-configured device types in IQ Central are message signs, traffic controllers, master controllers, weather stations, RTMS sensors, and traffic cameras. But additional device types can be created by the user.

Detector Failure For traffic controller operation, this is a detector which fails to indicate that a vehicle is present when it is, or fails to go off when a vehicle is absent. Types of failures include non-operation, chattering, and erroneous signaling.

Dimming This feature of some traffic controllers allows the brightness of selected non-LED traffic signal indicators to be lowered during night time operation, typically by lowering the voltage applied to the output.

Disconnected

Connected and Disconnected are different states than Online /Offline . A device is 'disconnected' if the communications channel to that device has been closed or lost on the IQ Central computer. Only connected devices can also be 'online'.

Dual Entry A mode of dual-ring traffic controller operation in which one phase in each ring must be in service. If a Call does not exist in a ring when the controller crosses the barrier to activate a phase within the ring, a phase is selected in that ring to be activated in a predetermined manner.

EGB

Glossary

235

Extended Green Band

EP End of Permissive

EPP A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'End of Pedestrian Permissive'.

Flash Memory Flash memory is a type of nonvolatile memory. The data stored in flash will be saved during long periods of power outage. It is a variation of electrically erasable programmable read-only memory. (EEPROM)

FO See 'Force Off'.

FOM Fiber Optic Modem, a device that modulates a signal appropriately so it can be transmitted over fiber optic cables.

Force Off Action taken by an external source which generates a signal to the intersection controller, causing termination to begin in the phase currently exhibiting the right-of-way. Used in Preemption and Coordinated operation.

Fully Actuated Identifies a type of intersection control in which every phase has a vehicle detection capability.

FSK Frequency shift key, A form of digital frequency modulation employing discrete frequencies for specific signals, for example for marking signals. The transmitter is changed from one frequency to another, keyed to represent a different information character with each frequency.

GIS

Geographical Interface Systems - The attachment of geographical information (i.e. coordinates or GPS data) to data points in a database.

Greenband Analysis A method of analyzing the amount of green light time available in a set of coordinated traffic intersections.

Greenband The time, in seconds, elapsed between the passing of the first vehicle and the last possible vehicle in a group of vehicles moving in accordance with the designed speed of a progressive traffic control system.


236

HDLC Address

HDLC stands for "High-level Data Link Control," which is a group of protocols for transmitting synchronous data packets between point-to-point nodes. In HDLC, data is organized into a frame. The HDLC level is above the SNMP , NTCIP and STMP protocol layers, which means that the HDLC frames are what surround SNMP (and NTCIP, and STMP) data transfers. The HDLC frame is synchronous and therefore counts on the physical layer (e.g. TCP/IP, RS-232, etc.) to control clocking and synchronization of the transmission and reception of frames. A numerical address is used by HDLC to direct these frames across the network to the proper location.

Intersection The location where two or more roadways meet or cross, or a Controller assigned to work in such a location.

Interval A unit of time that is assigned to a certain controller behavior or signal output by a time-based (non-NEMA) traffic controller.

IQ The brand name for a line of traffic control equipment and software produced by Peek Traffic Corporation.

ITS Intelligent transportation systems

Lead/Lag Operation A feature of some traffic controllers which makes it possible to reverse the phase sequence on a phase-pair basis. When the phase pairs (such as 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8) are reversed, the odd phase will lag the even phase instead of leading it as it does in normal operation.

M3000 The model number of a Peek brand master traffic controller unit manufactured by Peek Traffic Corporation.

MAC Address The unique numerical identifier for a physical device that is attached to the Internet. Stands for 'Media Access Control' Address.

Maintenance Icon

There are two types of icons associated with devices within IQ Central: Maintenance Icons and Zoom Level Icons . Maintenance Icons are used in device type drop-down lists, menus, and dialog boxes, as well as when first placing a device on a map. There is only one maintenance icon associated with each type of device. The icons assigned to device types can be edited in IQ Central using the commands under Tools >Advanced Options.

Marginal

This is the online state for a device that is supposed to be online. A device is judged to have a marginal communications state if IQ Central attempts to communicate with it, and fails, a set number of times.

MCE A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Manual Control Enable'.

Glossary

237

MIB

A Management Information Base - A generic collection of information that has been organized heirarchically. A MIB usually describes a network object so that it can be used with a generic communications protocol, such as SNMP or NTCIP . Each bit of information in a MIB file has a unique object identifier which is identified either by its object name or its object descriptor.

MIlitary Time

A method of indicating the time of day that is often used in the military. In this time-keeping method, the time starts at midnight, indicated as 00:00, and proceeds to a time of 24:00 at the following midnight. Civilian time can be converted to military time by adding 12 to the hour for any hour after noon. But since most of you traffic industry guys are ex-military, you probably already know all this.

MMU Malfunction Management Unit, See 'CMU/MMU'.

MOE Methods of efficiency. In traffic control, this is a common method to assess the performance of a configured intersection controller's operation.

MSCLR A traffic controller screen display abbreviation standing for 'Main Street Clearance'.

Multisonics A traffic equipment and software company owned by U.S. Traffic Corporation.

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association. The industry group that has designed one of a couple of competing standards for intelligent traffic control systems.

NTCIP

A standard communications protocol used to connect traffic support hardware and computers together in a non-proprietary manner. It stands for 'National Transportation Communications for ITS Protocol'. IQ Central is designed as a central software system to communicate with any traffic hardware that speaks the NTCIP protocol. A website at www.ntcip.org describes the protocol and its purpose. NTCIP is a specialized subset, or specialized version, of the more generic SNMP communications protocol. NTCIP uses the same data structures and methods as SNMP, including MIBs, Object Identifiers, and Object Names.

Object Identifier

Within a MIB file, a bit of information can either be identified by its object identifier or its object name . An object identifier uses a series of numbers (without any spaces or alphabetic characters) separated by periods, to indicate the heirarchical placement of a piece of information. For example, a bit of data may have the object identifier of 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.3.3.1. Within a MIB file, the Object Identifier must be unique. An Object Identifier is functionally equivalent to the alphanumeric Object Name which is assigned to the same bit of information.


238

Object Name

Within a MIB file, a bit of information can either be identified by its object identifier or its object name . An object name is an alphanumeric name with no spaces that indicates heirarchy by separating different domain levels by periods. For example, an object name might be: device .device-type.devicenumber.control.onoffswitch. An Object Name is functionally equivalent to the numeric object identifier which is assigned to the same bit of information.

Offline

A device is considered offline if no logical communications are occurring between the device and IQ Central. This could be caused by a user command to go 'Offline', by the device disconnecting, or by a problem that shuts down the connection. A device can either be online , marginal , or offline.

OID See 'Object Identifier'.

OLA Overlap A (for example). A traffic controller screen abbreviation. Overlaps are typically identified with a single letter identifier, hence Overlap A (OLA) through Overlap P (OLP) may appear in a controller interface.

Online

A device is considered online if it has an open connection and if logical communications have occurred between the device and IQ Central. A device can either be online, marginal , or offline .

OSAM-32 The model number of a Multisonics brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

PA Phase allocation

PE A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Preemption'.

Peek Traffic A traffic equipment and software company owned by Signal Group Corporation.

Preemption An alternative interval timing plan for a traffic controller, typically triggered by a 'preemption input' being signalled ON by emergency response or police personnel.

RCU Remote Communications Unit - Used in some cities to interface a controller or another device to a coaxial cable communications facility.

RGB A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Reduced Green Band'.

ROM Read Only Memory, hard written memory in a computer that is maintained even when power is removed. Typically used to store basic OS code and firmware programs.

Glossary

239

SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control

Semi-Actuated Identifies a type of intersection control that has one or more phases that lack a vehicle detection capability.

Serial Interface A device, which processes information one (1) bit at a time from the computer to a printer or another peripheral unit.

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol - A generic communications protocol used to allow intelligent network devices to communicate with one another, and with network device management software. SNMP is part of the well known TCP/IP protocol suite.

SPL See 'Split'.

SP Start Permissive period

Split In a coordinated traffic system, each intersection in an artery must have the same cycle time. So instead of set times for each phase, a coordinated intersection has a split assigned to each phase. A split is a percentage of the total time available in the cycle.

STMP

Simple Transportation Management Protocol - A subset of the NTCIP protocol for simplified management and communications between traffic equipment and software.

TBC Time-based coordination. Indicates that coordination or plan selection is based upon the time of day using an internal clock.

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The most common pair of protocols used to send data across an Ethernet or the Internet. Each component in such a system is assigned a unique IP address.

T/F Terminal and Facilities

Time Reference Point A point in time which serves as the start time or source time reference for an entire artery or region of traffic flow. For example, in the timing diagram for a single street, each intersection has a time offset between the start of its cycle and one arterial signal which serves as the Time Reference Signal. The start of the Green time reference signal in this system is known as the Time Reference Point.

TOD Time of Day


240

TMM-500 The model number of a Traconex brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

Traconex A traffic equipment brand owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

Transyt A traffic equipment brand owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

USB Universal Serial Bus. A common computer peripheral interface.

US Traffic A traffic equipment and software company owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

WRM Walk Rest Modifier

Watchdog A monitoring circuit external to a traffic controller which senses a controller output via the BIU. If no change in state of this output is detected for a CMU-programmed amount of time (typically 1 second), this denotes a controller unit error, at which point the CMU or MMU will put the intersection into FLASH mode.

Zoom Level Icons

There are two types of icons associated with devices within IQ Central: Maintenance Icons and Zoom Level Icons . Zoom Level Icons are used only in map views, to show the current state of a device . There can be up to five Zoom Level Icons associated with each type of device. The number assigned depends on the type of device. Signs have five zoom level icons. Traffic controllers and cameras each have four zoom level icons. Weather stations and sensors each have two zoom level icons. With the exception of traffic controllers, these zoom level icons cannot be edited in IQ Central. The icons assigned to traffic controllers can be edited using the GIS Zoom Levels command under the Maps menu.

241

# 1880EL: The model number of a Transyt brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

3000E: The model number of a Peek brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

3800EL: The model number of a Transyt brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

390CJ: The model number of a Traconex brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

820A: The model number of a Multisonics brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

A Actuated: Identifies a type of controller which responds to calling signals generated by the actions of

either vehicles or pedestrians. See also Semi-actuated and Fully-actuated.

Adaptive Split Control: A means of intersection split selection based on vehicular activity.

Advance Call Detector: A detector located a considerable distance upstream from an intersection which calls the green to that approach.

Advance Warning: A per-movement output used to give advance notice of an upcoming yellow or red indication. Typically used at hidden intersections with "prepare to stop" indicators.

ASTC: Advanced Solid State Traffic Controller: the name given to a controller design specified by New York City DOT. This acronym was chosen by Peek Traffic to distinguish it from the more general ATC standards development program.

ATC: Advanced Traffic Controller, a design developed per the ATC standards development program of the State of California and the Federal Highway Administration. Requires the controller to have a separate engine board and run the Linux operating system.

Auto/Manual Switch: A traffic cabinet switch which, when operated, discontinues normal signal operation and permits manual operation.

B Back Panel: A board within a controller cabinet upon which are mounted field terminals, fuse

receptacles or circuit breakers, and other components of traffic controller operation not included in the controller unit itself, or its ancillary devices. Such back panels are typically found in older traffic control cabinets.

Backplane: A printed circuit connector interface board, typically with no active or passive components. However, the use of passive components is accepted for most applications.

Barrier: A logical term to describe a line of compatibility in a multi-ring intersection signal plan in which all rings are interlocked. Barriers assure that there will be no concurrent selection and timing of conflicting phases for traffic phases on different rings.

Baud Rate: The data transfer rate of data transmission to a communications channel, usually expressed in 'bits per second'.

BIU: Bus Interface Unit, required to interface a TS-2, Type 1 traffic controller to any type of cabinet hardware. Converts NEMA TS2-Type 1 EIA/TIA-485 Serial Data to cabinet discrete inputs and outputs.

BPS: Bits Per Second - a measure of data transmission speed

Buffer: A temporary storage location for data. The buffer accumulates backed up information for later release. A device or section of memory used to compensate for differences in data transfer flow speeds or variable latencies in a communications channel.


242

C Cabinet: An outdoor, weather-tight enclosure for housing controller units, master units, detector

electronics and other associated traffic control or monitoring equipment.

Call: The result of a detector or signal activation by either a pedestrian or a vehicle. A signal to the controller indicating that a vehicle or pedestrian is present and is 'requesting' the right-of-way.

Capacity: The maximum number of vehicles that can pass over a given lane or roadway during a given period, under prevailing traffic conditions.

CBD: Central business district. The portion of a municipality in which the dominant land use is intense business activity.

Channel: An information path from a discrete input to a discrete output.

Checksum: A numerical value that is calculated by applying a predefined algorithm to a set of data. It is used to determine if a portion of memory or a message has been corrupted in any way.

Clearance Interval: The interval from the end of the right-of-way of one phase to the beginning of a conflicting phase.

Closed-Loop System: A software and hardware system in which a computer controls an external process using information received from the process. For example, the closed loop in a traffic control system is from the computer to the controllers and then from the detectors back (through the controller) to the computer.

CLR: Traffic controller screen abbreviation for 'Phase Clearance'. Includes Ped Clearance times for CNA phases.

CMU/MMU: Conflict Monitor Unit - Also known as an MMU (Multifunction Management Unit). This device monitors the green, yellow, and red AC loadswitch outputs for conflicts, the absence of a proper red signal and the watchdog signal from the controller. Any real and potential unsafe condition will force the intersection controller into flash mode.

CNA: Call to Non-Actuated. Provides a method of phase timing where vehicle and pedestrian detectors are not required to serve the associated phases, with operation as defined by NEMA. An actuated controller feature in which the associated phase will always serve the Walk plus Ped Clear time, regardless of detector inputs.

Compatibility Line: In traffic intersection controller operations, this is the dividing line crossing both rings (in dual ring operation) that separates compatible phase combinations. Usually, it divides phases associated with North/South from those associated with East/West. Also known as the 'Barrier'.

Conditional Service: A dual-ring feature which allows re-service to an odd phase (i.e. a left turn phase) once the opposite 'through' phase has gapped out. The service is conditional upon the time remaining in the adjacent 'through' phase's Max timer.

Conflict Monitor: A device used to continually check for the presence of conflicting signal indications coming from a traffic controller, and to provide an output in response to the conflict (usually All Flash).

Conflicting Phases: Two or more traffic flows which would result in interfering traffic movements if operated concurrently.

Connected: Connected and Disconnected are seperate states than Online/Offline. A device is 'connected' if the communications channel to that device has been opened on the IQCentral computer. A connected device does not mean that any communications with the device have occurred, just that the channel has been opened on the PC end.

Controller: A device which, through software and firmware programming, manages the sequence and duration of traffic signals. Also, a device which manages the sequence and duration of variable message sign messages.

Glossary

243

Coordination: Also known as 'COORD'. The state where two or more intersections are configured to communicate with each other in order to time their signals in some manner that improves the greater system performance, rather than being timed independently at each intersection. Such independent operation, by contrast, is known as Free operation.

COTS: Commercial off the Shelf - standard product offering available for purchase from commercial vendors.

CPU: Central Processing Unit - The chip that controls all computer operations and performs computations. Also may refer to the entire physical unit housing the chip.

CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check. A form of checksum data verification used to verify the validity of information transferred across a communications channel.

Critical Intersection: A selected, heavily traveled intersection within a coordinated traffic artery. (See 'Coordination') This intersection would be employed to dynamically control the split at other intersections within the artery, based on its vehicle detector inputs.

CVM: Controller voltage monitor. An open collector output that is maintained 'low' by a traffic controller as long as the internally generated operating voltages are within tolerances. This output is used by a conflict monitor to place the intersection in Flash, should all voltages fail in the controller.

Cycle: The total time required to complete one complete set of signal states around an intersection. In basic, pre-timed control, the cycle length is fixed. In actuated systems the cycle length can be increased up to a predetermined maximum, based on the continued detection of vehicles. In a coordinated system, the cycle of all connected intersections are monitored continuously and adjusted as needed to maintain the coordinated plan.

Cycle Zero Point: See 'Time Reference Point'

D Database: Traffic controllers and central system software (such as IQCentral) typically uses two

distinctly different meanings for the term 'database'. The first is the typical one used in most computer systems: a central system stores and maintains all of the information it gathers from the field about all connected devices in a set of database files on the central computer. The second meaning of database pertains only to traffic controllers. This meaning of 'database' is defined as the complete set of operating parameters stored in a single traffic controller or master controller.

Density: A measure of the concentration of vehicles in an intersection, stated as the number of vehicles per mile (space density) or as the flow volume divided by the average speed (point density.)

Detection Zone: The area of the roadway in which a vehicle will be detected by a vehicle detector.

Detector: A device that senses the presence or absence of a vehicle in a particular area (the Detection Zone). Vehicle detection methods include inductance detecting loops (the most common type), piezo pressure sensors, light beam sensors, radio ID sensors, air tube sensors, and mechanical switches.

Detector Failure: A detector which fails to indicate that vehicle is present when it is, or fails to go off when a vehicle is absent. Types of failures include non-operation, chattering, and erroneous signaling.

Detector Memory: A feature of some controllers in which the actuation of a detector is retained in memory until the corresponding phase is serviced.

Device: In IQCentral, a 'device' is any piece of hardware or software that the application manages using the NTCIP communciations protocol. The pre-configured device types in IQCentral are message signs, traffic controllers, master controllers, weather stations, RTMS sensors, and traffic cameras. But additional device types can be created by the user.

Dimming: This feature of some controllers allows the brightness of selected traffic signal indicators to be lowered during night time operation, typically by lowering the voltage applied to the output.


244

Disconnected: Connected and Disconnected are different states than Online/Offline. A device is 'disconnected' if the communications channel to that device has been closed or lost on the IQCentral computer. Only connected devices can also be 'online'.

DLL: A dynamically linked library file. In the Windows environment, programs store data, graphics, and other resources in these linked libraries. IQCentral, TOPS, IQ-Link and most other Windows applications use them.

Dual Entry: A mode of dual-ring operation in which one phase in each ring must be in service. If a Call does not exist in a ring when the controller crosses the barrier to activate a phase within the ring, a phase is selected in that ring to be activated in a predetermined manner.

Duplex: Two-way communications over a single communications link.

E EEPROM: Electronically erasable/programmable read-only memory, the programmable memory storage

area in many traffic control components.

EGB: Extended Green Band

EP: A traffic controller display screen abbreviation for 'End of Permissive'.

EPP: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'End of Pedestrian Permissive'.

EPROM: Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (typically using UV light to erase)

F Flash Memory: Flash memory is a type of nonvolatile memory. The data stored in flash will be saved

during long periods of power outage. It is a variation of electrically erasable programmable read-only memory. (EEPROM)

FO: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Force Off'.

FOM: Fiber Optic Modem, a device that modulates a signal appropriately so it can be transmitted over fiber optic cables.

Force Off: Action taken by an external source which generates a signal to the intersection controller, causing termination to begin in the phase currently exhibiting the right-of-way. Used in Preemption and Coordinated operation.

FSK: Frequency shift key, A form of digital frequency modulation employing discrete frequencies for specific signals, for example for marking signals. The transmitter is changed from one frequency to another, keyed to represent a different information character with each frequency.

Fully-Actuated: Identifies a type of intersection control in which every phase has a vehicle detector input capability.

G GIS: Geographical Interface Systems - The attachment of geographical information (i.e. coordinates or

GPS data) to data points in a database.

Green Band: The time, in seconds, elapsed between the passing of the first vehicle and the last possible vehicle in a group of vehicles moving in accordance with the designed speed of a progressive traffic control system.

Greenband Analysis: A method of analyzing the amount of green light time available in a set of coordinated traffic intersections.

Glossary

245

H HDLC Address: HDLC stands for "High-level Data Link Control" which is a group of protocols for

transmitting synchronous data packets between point-to-point nodes. In HDLC, data is organized into a frame. The HDLC level is above the SNMP, NTCIP and STMP protocol layers, which means that the HDLC frames are what surround SNMP (and NTCIP, and STMP) data transfers. The HDLC frame is synchronous and therefore counts on the physical layer (e.g. TCP/IP, RS-232, etc.) to control clocking and synchronization of the transmission and reception of frames. A numerical address is used by HDLC to direct these frames across the network to the proper location.

I Intersection: The location where two or more roadways meet or cross, or a Controller assigned to work

in such a location.

Interval: A unit of time that is assigned to a certain controller behavior or signal output by a time-based (non-NEMA) traffic controller.

IQ: The brand name for a line of traffic control equipment and software produced by Peek Traffic Corporation.

ITS: Intelligent transportation systems

L Lead/Lag Operation: A feature of some traffic controllers which makes it possible to reverse the phase

sequence on a phase-pair basis. When the phase pairs (such as 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8) are reversed, the odd phase will lag the even phase instead of leading it as it does in normal operation.

M M3000: The model number of a Peek brand master traffic controller unit manufactured by Peek Traffic

Corporation.

MAC Address: The unique numerical identifier for a physical device that is attached to the Internet. Stands for 'Media Access Control' Address.

Maintenance Icon: There are two types of icons associated with devices within IQCentral: MaintenanceIcons and Zoom Level Icons. Maintenance Icons are used in device type drop-down lists, menus, and dialog boxes, as well as when first placing a device on a map. There isonly one maintenance icon associated with each type of device. The icons assignedto device types can be edited in IQCentral using the commands under Tools >AdvancedOptions.

Marginal: This is the online state for a device that is supposed to be online. A device is judged to have a marginal communications state if IQCentral attempts to communicate with it, and fails, a set number of times.

MCE: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Manual Control Enable'.

MIB: A Management Information Base - A generic collection of information that has been organized heirarchically. A MIB usually describes a network object so that it can be used with a generic communications protocol, such as SNMP or NTCIP. Each bit of information in a MIB file has a unique object identifier which is identified either by its object name or its object descriptor.

Military Time: A method of indicating the time of day that is often used in the military. In this time-keeping method, the time starts at midnight, indicated as 00:00, and proceeds to a time of 24:00 at the following midnight. Civilian time can be converted to military time by adding 12 to the hour for any hour after noon. But since most of you traffic industry guys are ex-military, you probably already know all this.


246

MMU: Malfunction Management Unit, See 'CMU/MMU'.

Module: A functional unit that plugs into an assembly. In the IQCentral environment, a module is a piece of software that makes up a functional component of the entire IQCentral system.

MOE: Methods of efficiency. In traffic control, this is a common method to assess the performance of a configured intersection controller's operation.

MSCLR: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation standing for 'Main Street Clearance'.

Multisonics: A traffic equipment and software company owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

N NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association. The industry group that has designed one of a

couple of competing standards for intelligent traffic control systems.

NTCIP: A standard communications protocol used to connect traffic support hardware and computers together in a non-proprietary manner. It stands for 'National Transportation Communications for ITS Protocol'. IQCentral is designed as a central software system to communicate with any traffic hardware that speaks the NTCIP protocol. A website at www.ntcip.org describes the protocol and its purpose. NTCIP is a specialized subset, or specialized version, of the more generic SNMP communications protocol. NTCIP uses the same data structures and methods as SNMP, including MIBs, Object Identifiers, and Object Names.

O Object Identifier: Within a MIB file, a bit of information can either be identified by its object identifier or

its object name. An object identifier uses a series of numbers (without any spaces or alphabetic characters) separated by periods, to indicate the heirarchical placement of a piece of information. For example, a bit of data may have the object identifier of 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.3.3.1. Within a MIB file, the Object Identifier must be unique. An Object Identifier is functionally equivalent to the alphanumeric Object Name which is assigned to the same bit of information.

Object Name: Within a MIB file, a bit of information can either be identified by its object identifier or its object name. An object name is an alphanumeric name with no spaces that indicates heirarchy by separating different domain levels by periods. For example, an object name might be: device.device-type.devicenumber.control.onoffswitch. An Object Name is functionally equivalent to the numeric object identifier which is assigned to the same bit of information.

Offline: A device is considered offline if no logical communications are occurring between the device and IQCentral. This could be caused by a user command to go 'Offline', by the device disconnecting, or by a problem that shuts down the connection. A device can either be online, marginal, or offline.

OID: See 'Object Identifier'.

OLA: Overlap A (for example). A traffic controller screen abbreviation. Overlaps are typically identified with a single letter identifier, hence Overlap A (OLA) through Overlap P (OLP) may appear in a controller interface.

Online: A device is considered online if it has an open connection and if logical communications have occurred between the device and IQCentral. A device can either be online, marginal, or offline.

OSAM-32: The model number of a Multisonics brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

P PA: Phase allocation

Glossary

247

PE: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Preemption'.

Peek Traffic: A traffic equipment and software company owned by Signal Group Corporation.

Preemption: An alternative interval timing plan for a traffic controller, typically triggered by a 'preemption input' being signalled ON by emergency response or police personnel.

R RCU: Remote Communications Unit - Used in some cities to interface a controller or another device to a

coaxial cable communications facility.

RGB: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Reduced Green Band'.

ROM: Read Only Memory, hard written memory in a computer that is maintained even when power is removed. Typically used to store basic OS code and firmware programs.

S SDLC: Synchronous Data Link Control

Semi-Actuated: Identifies a type of intersection control that has one or more phases that lack a vehicle detector input capability.

Serial Interface: A device, which processes information one (1) bit at a time from the computer to a printer or another peripheral unit.

SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol - A generic communications protocol used to allow intelligent network devices to communicate with one another, and with network device management software. SNMP is part of the well known TCP/IP protocol suite.

SP: Start Permissive Period

SPL: See 'Split'.

Split: In a coordinated traffic system, each intersection in an artery must have the same cycle time. So instead of set times for each phase, a coordinated intersection has a split assigned to each phase. A split is a percentage of the total time available in the cycle.

STMP: Simple Transportation Management Protocol - A subset of the NTCIP protocol for simplified management and communications between traffic equipment and software.

T T/F: Terminal and Facilities

TBC: Time-based coordination. Indicates that coordination or plan selection is based upon the time of day using an internal clock.

TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The most common pair of protocols used to send data across an Ethernet or the Internet. Each component in such a system is assigned a unique IP address.

Time Reference Point: A point in time which serves as the time reference for an entire artery or region of traffic flow. For example, in the timing diagram for a single street, each intersection has a time offset between the start of its cycle and one arterial signal which serves as the Time Reference Signal. The start of the Green time reference signal in this system is known as the Time Reference Point.

TMM-500: The model number of a Traconex brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

TOD: Time of Day


248

Traconex: A traffic equipment brand owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

Transyt: A traffic equipment brand owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

U US Traffic: A traffic equipment and software company owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

USB: Universal Serial Bus. A common computer peripheral interface.

W Watchdog: A monitoring circuit external to a traffic controller which senses a controller output via the

BIU. If no change in state of this output is detected for a CMU-programmed amount of time (typically 1 second), this denotes a controller unit error, at which point the CMU or MMU will put the intersection into FLASH mode.

WRM: Walk Rest Modifier

Z Zoom Level Icons: There are two types of icons associated with devices within IQCentral:

MaintenanceIcons and Zoom Level Icons. Zoom Level Icons are used only in map views, to showthe current state of a device. There can be up to five Zoom Level Icons associatedwith each type of device. The number assigned depends on the type of device. Signshave five zoom level icons. Traffic controllers and cameras each have four zoom levelicons. Weather stations and sensors each have two zoom level icons. With the exceptionof traffic controllers, these zoom level icons cannot be edited in IQCentral. Theicons assigned to traffic controllers can be edited using the GIS Zoom Levels commandunder the Maps menu.

249

Index 1 1.2MB ................................................................. 5

100 WidthTo...................................................... 134

100.................................................................. 134

150.................................................................... 50

175kb .................................................................. 5

180kb .................................................................. 5

1880EL ..................................................... 80, 233

1880EL Controller............................................. 80

195kb .................................................................. 5

1st Interval ........................................................ 65

3 3000E ............................................................. 233

3000E Controller Parameter Fields.......................................... 65

3000E Controller............................................... 65

3000E TS2 working....................................................... 165

3000E TS2...................................................... 165

300kb .................................................................. 5

32pm............................................................... 184

32x32 .............................................................. 228

353kb .................................................................. 5

3800EL ................................................. 5, 80, 233

3800EL Master Parameter Fields.......................................... 80

3800EL Master ................................................. 80

3800EL Master ................................................. 80

390CJ ....................................................... 80, 233

390CJ Controller Parameter Fields.......................................... 80

390CJ Controller............................................... 80

3rd Sheet ........................................................ 124

5 5.1MB ................................................................. 5

50 56

5-Section Prot ................................................... 56

6 675kb .................................................................. 5

6am on Monday morning ........................ 118, 176

8 820A.......................................................... 56, 233

820A Controller Parameter Fields .......................................... 56

820A Controller ................................................. 56

820A OSAM ...................................................... 56

A About....................................................... 131, 153

About IQCentral .......................... 10, 34, 131, 153

About window Shows..................................................... 10, 34

About window.................................................... 10

Absence ............................................................ 65

AC loadswitch ......................................... 234, 237

Accant ............................................................... 33

Accept ............................... 92, 101, 145, 178, 184

Access Device......................................................... 159

Access............................................................. 159

Access............................................................. 218

Access Level Module's MDI list....................... 218

Access Levels Changing .................................................... 218 Opens ........................................................... 10

Access Levels ................................................... 10

Access Levels Module ............................ 122, 218

Accessible ....................................... 138, 202, 218

Account 1, 4, 8, 10, 19, 22, 25, 34, 101, 134, 205, 211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 218

Acknowledge........................... 189, 195, 200, 202

Acknowledge Alarm ........................................ 200

Acknowledge incoming alarms........................ 202

Action Column................................................. 124

Activate button ........................................ 128, 129

Activate Message.................................... 114, 124

Activate Schedule ................................... 118, 176


250

Activating Amber Alert......................................... 127, 128 Remove button ........................................... 212 Scenario...................................................... 127

Activating......................................................... 127

Activation Indicate ....................................................... 129

Activation.......................4, 83, 113, 118, 124, 127

Activation Priority ............................................ 129

Active ...10, 29, 36, 56, 65, 92, 95, 124, 139, 178, 186, 195, 197, 200, 216, 223

Active Circuits ................................................... 65

Active Memory ............................................ 92, 95

Active SF........................................................... 56

Active Sp Function Circuits ............................... 56

ActiveX Type ................................................... 169

Activity ..36, 56, 76, 128, 129, 157, 158, 205, 207, 233

Activity Log...................................................... 128

Activity window................................................ 129

Actuated ................56, 76, 85, 165, 233, 235, 239

Actuation ........................................................... 65

Adaptive Split Control...................................... 233

Add Connection................................................. 45

Add Connection Button ..................................... 45

Add Device........................................................ 39

Add Device button pressing ........................................................ 39

Add Device button............................................. 39

Add New..........34, 38, 39, 45, 104, 184, 212, 228

Add New Device......................10, 34, 38, 39, 104

Add New Task choosing ..................................................... 184

Add New Task................................................. 184

Add Object List button ................................................... 172

Add Object ...................................................... 172

Add Task dialog Open ........................................................... 184

Add Task dialog .............................................. 184

Add/Delete ..........................10, 34, 212, 213, 214

Add/Delete Users .............................................. 34

Add/Edit Opens ........................................................... 10

Add/Edit .............................................................10

Add/Edit Device Window ...................................39

Add/Edit Layer Groups Opens ...........................................................10

Add/Edit Layer Groups ......................................10

Add/Remove....................................................178

Added Initial.................................................65, 76

Added Initial Calculation ....................................76

Add-Edit.............................................................39

Adding Device ...........................................................39

Adding ...............................................................39

Adding Zoom Areas BMP Maps ..................................................138

Adding Zoom Areas.........................................138

Address number........................................................104

Address ...........................................38, 39, 56, 65

Adjust...........................65, 85, 105, 143, 165, 239

Adjust MX3 ........................................................65

Administration allows ..........................................................215 delete ..........................................................211 remaining ....................................................212

Administration............................................21, 134

Administration Level ................211, 212, 213, 215

Administration toolbar......................................232

Administration User .................................211, 214

Administrative ....................................10, 212, 216

Administrator Community ................................122

Administrators IQCentral.....................................................232

Administrators.......8, 33, 101, 122, 129, 157, 158, 212, 214, 216, 218

Administrators..................................................232

Adobe® Photoshop®.......................................139

Advance Call Detector.....................................233

Advance Warning ............................................233

Advance Warning Logic.....................................65

Advanced......5, 10, 34, 36, 55, 65, 104, 107, 110, 111, 152, 232, 233, 236

Advanced button Clicking .......................................................110

Advanced button..............................................110

Index

251

Advanced Options .................... 10, 152, 232, 236

Advanced Options submenu open ........................................................... 104

Advanced Options submenu........................... 104

Advanced Screen ................................... 110, 111

Advanced Sign Message Edit......................... 110

Advanced Traffic............................................. 233

AdvancedOptions ........................................... 236

Alarm Handling ..................................................... 200 point ........................................................... 165

Alarm . 1, 5, 10, 26, 29, 34, 37, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52, 76, 83, 86, 90, 159, 161

Alarm .............................................................. 216

Alarm Condition Deleting ...................................................... 197

Alarm Condition .............................. 161, 190, 195

Alarm Condition .............................................. 197

Alarm Configuration Interface ......................... 190

Alarm Configuration window Launching................................................... 190 Using .......................................................... 190

Alarm Configuration window........................... 190

Alarm Configure.............................................. 190

Alarm Details Viewing......................................................... 29

Alarm Details .................................................... 29

Alarm History Viewer ................................ 10, 195

Alarm icon inserts........................................................... 86

Alarm icon blinks............................................. 197

Alarm Parameters Opening...................................................... 202

Alarm Parameters........................................... 202

Alarm Parameters window open ........................................................... 202

Alarm Parameters window.............................. 202

Alarm Processing service ............................... 216

Alarm Statistics Icon .............................................................. 29

Alarm Statistics ................................................. 29

Alarm Status icon................ 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33

Alarm Status Interface .................................... 195

Alarm Status Module Launching................................................... 195

Alarm Status Module....................................... 195

Alarm Status Window Using .......................................................... 195

Alarm Status Window........................................ 29

Alarm System Settings.................................... 202

Alarm Viewer........................................... 165, 200

AlarmGroupState.2 ........................................... 86

Alarms Display ................................................ 190

Alarms System Configuring ................................................. 202

Alarms System........ 1, 5, 165, 189, 190, 197, 200

Alarms System................................................ 202

Alarms System Settings window leave ........................................................... 202

Alarms System Settings window..................... 202

Alarms window.................................................. 50

All objects ........................................................ 168 release notes .................................................. 5

All Alarms........................................................ 190

All Alarms Display ........................................... 190

All Configured User Accounts ......................... 122

All Currently Logged-on Users ........................ 122

All Devices set............................................................... 169 Status ........................................................... 42

All Devices ........................................................ 42

All Flash .......................................................... 234

All Pages..................................................... 97, 98

All polling......................................................... 175

Allocate Device Type................................................ 229

Allocate ........................... 118, 129, 152, 176, 218

AllowDuplicates............................................... 134

Allows Administration............................................. 215 IQCentral ...................................................... 53 oeprator ...................................................... 110

Allows.............. 1, 5, 10, 34, 36, 37, 40, 43, 45, 46

Allows................................................................ 53

Allows copying .................................................. 99

Allows SNMP .................................................. 107

ALT key ........................................................... 232

Alt-D pressing ........................................................ 39


252

Alt-D .................................................................. 39

Alt-D,c,b ............................................................ 34

Alt-D,c,c............................................................. 34

Alt-D,c,v............................................................. 34

Alt-D,i,u ............................................................. 34

Alt-D,m,a ........................................................... 34

Alt-D,m,b ........................................................... 34

Alt-D,m,c ........................................................... 34

Alt-D,m,e ........................................................... 34

Alt-D,m,f ............................................................ 34

Alt-D,m,m .......................................................... 34

Alt-D,m,o ........................................................... 34

Alt-D,m,s ........................................................... 34

Alt-D,n ............................................................... 34

Alternate Flash .................................................. 65

Alternatively............................................. 101, 109

Alt-F,L................................................................ 34

Alt-F,O............................................................... 34

Alt-F,p................................................................ 34

Alt-F,x ................................................................ 34

Alt-F4............................................................. 9, 34

Alt-H,a ............................................................... 34

Alt-H,i ................................................................ 34

Alt-m................................................................ 153

Alt-M,g............................................................... 34

Alt-M,i ................................................................ 34

Alt-M,L............................................................... 34

Alt-M,o,d ............................................................ 34

Alt-M,o,m........................................................... 34

Alt-M,o,r............................................................. 34

Alt-M,p............................................................... 34

Alt-M,z ............................................................... 34

Alt-T,a,b............................................................. 34

Alt-T,a,f.............................................................. 34

Alt-T,a,i .............................................................. 34

Alt-T,a,L............................................................. 34

Alt-T,a,t.............................................................. 34

Alt-T,c ................................................................ 34

Alt-T,d................................................................ 34

Alt-T,L,d............................................................. 34

Alt-T,L,e............................................................. 34

Alt-T,L,s .............................................................34

Alt-T,u,a .............................................................34

Alt-T,u,c .............................................................34

Alt-T,u,L .............................................................34

Alt-T,u,p .............................................................34

Alt-T,v ................................................................34

Alt-V,i .................................................................34

Alt-V,m...............................................................34

Alt-V,r.................................................................34

Alt-V,s ................................................................34

Alt-V,t.................................................................34

Alt-V,u................................................................34

Alt-w.............................................................15, 34

Alt-W key pressing ........................................................34

Alt-W key ...........................................................34

Alt-w,1................................................................33

AM .......................................................................1

AMBER..............................................................34

Amber Alert Administration..............................127

Amber Alert button Press...........................................................127

Amber Alert button...........................................127

Amber Alerts Activating ............................................127, 128 Creating ......................................................128 Verify...........................................................128

Amber Alerts............................................1, 10, 34

Amber Alerts....................................................127

Amber Alerts....................................................128

Amber Alerts....................................................129

Amber Alerts....................................................129

Amber Alerts Module .......................................127

An Activate Message.......................................114

An Overview ..................................1, 10, 128, 129

AND ...................................95, 165, 175, 190, 209

And Not Accessible .........................................218

Another Zoom level display ........................................81

Another ........................................9, 10, 15, 33, 43

Another during .................................................202

Another set data .............................................................165

Index

253

Another set ..................................................... 165

Anti-Backup Phases ......................................... 56

Any set fonts ........................................................... 117

Any set............................................................ 117

Appear ... 1, 10, 14, 15, 20, 28, 29, 33, 36, 39, 53, 81, 83, 85, 86, 92, 95, 104, 107, 110, 122, 129, 137, 139, 143, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 152, 153, 160, 163, 165, 182, 184, 185, 195, 197, 202, 209, 212, 213, 216, 223, 228, 238

Appearance Changing...................................................... 85

Appearance .................................................. 1, 81

Application manages ..... 1, 10, 46, 101, 161, 175, 229

Apply button.................................................... 218

Applying Report Filters.............................................. 205

Applying .......................................................... 205

April 2007............................................................ 5

Archive............................................................ 225

Archive’ tables.......................................................... 225

Archive’ ........................................................... 225

Arial................................................................. 134

AriAndrews ..................................................... 212

Around .............................................................. 56

As data .............................................................. 99 name .......................................................... 202

As 149

ASC .................................................................. 76

Assign Device .......................................................... 37

Assign ................................................... 10, 22, 34

Assign blocks data .............................................................. 10

Assign blocks.................................................... 10

Assign Peds 1-16.............................................. 65

Assignedto ...................................................... 236

Assistant Polling ........................................................ 163

Assistant ......................................................... 163

Assistant ......................................................... 165

Associated 2nd Loop ........................................ 56

ASTC........................................................... 5, 233

ASTC Controller .............................................. 233

ATC Controller ................................................ 233

Attempt....... 15, 36, 42, 43, 47, 88, 114, 152, 161, 165, 175, 200, 212, 227, 234, 236, 238

Attempt succeed ............................................. 175

Audio Settings ................................................. 202

Auto................... 56, 65, 76, 81, 88, 165, 195, 200

Auto Perm ......................................................... 65

Auto Populate Polling IQCentral ...................................................... 81

Auto Populate Polling........................................ 81

Auto Populate Polling........................................ 88

Auto Populate Polling button............................. 88

Auto Populate Polling tool choosing ............................................... 88, 136 Device Specific ............................................. 81

Auto Populate Polling tool ................................. 81

Auto Refresh ........................................... 195, 200

Auto Refresh checkbox check .......................................................... 200

Auto Refresh checkbox................................... 200

Auto/Manual Switch ........................................ 233

Automatic .............. 1, 5, 36, 86, 88, 107, 114, 136

Automatic Incident use.................................................................. 1

Automatic Incident Management ................ 1, 107

Automatic Log Off ......................................... 9, 36

AutoNumber .................................................... 134

Available Icon.................................................... 83

Available Log Table Columns ......................... 124

Avg Vehicle Length ........................................... 56

B Back Color....................................................... 202

Backup .................................... 1, 56, 76, 221, 225

Backup Clock Bad............................................. 56

Bad Coordination Plan ...................................... 56

Banded.................................................... 157, 158

Barrier ..................................................... 233, 234

Base................................................................ 172

Base OID......................................................... 172

Basic ...... 5, 26, 33, 65, 81, 85, 92, 110, 131, 137, 165, 172, 189, 190, 208, 209, 238, 239


254

Basic Export .................................................... 208

Basic Reports.................................................. 208

Basic Steps Set Up........................................................... 81

Basic Steps ....................................................... 81

Batch Update Performing ..........................163, 165, 168, 169

Batch Update .................................................. 163

Batch Update button ....................................... 168

Batch Update dialog open............................................................ 168

Batch Update dialog........................................ 168

Baud Rate ................................................... 56, 65

Baud Rate Div ................................................... 56

Baud Rate Divisor ............................................. 56

Beacon Type ................................................... 113

Below, At ........................................................... 86

Between Controllers.......................................... 99

Between Loops ................................................. 56

Between Open Modules Switching ...................................................... 15

Between Open Modules.................................... 15

Bitmap file ....................................... 137, 138, 229

Bitmapped ....................................................... 138

Bitmapped file ................................................. 138

BIU ..............................................65, 76, 234, 240

Blank ............................................................... 128

Blank Sign ....................................................... 128

Blankdefault.bmp ............................................ 137

Block 98 transmitting ................................................... 92

Block 98 ............................................................ 92

Block Builder ................................................... 232

BlockBuilder ................................10, 34, 227, 232

BlockBuilder Module Launching ................................................... 232 Using........................................................... 232

BlockBuilder Module ....................................... 232

BlockBuilder Module ....................................... 232

Bmp file ........................................................... 138

BMP Map Data Loading ....................................................... 137

BMP Map Data................................................ 137

BMP Map Management...................................137

BMP Map Viewer.............................................157

BMP Map Viewer Interface..............................157

BMP Map Views ..............................................131

BMP Maps Adding Zoom Areas ....................................138

BMP Maps .....................................1, 20, 134, 137

Both Places .......................................................95

Bottom ..7, 15, 26, 39, 45, 47, 48, 86, 92, 98, 121, 134, 145, 148, 149, 150, 152, 153, 157, 158, 165, 190, 195, 197, 200, 202, 212, 216

Box .....10, 30, 36, 38, 48, 51, 55, 86, 88, 92, 109, 111, 114, 116, 117, 120, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 152, 165, 168, 184, 186, 197, 202, 205, 209, 212, 213, 218, 224, 228, 229, 231, 236

Box asking .........................................................36

Brightness........................................................117

Brightness Control 10, 23, 34, 107, 109, 113, 117, 118, 120, 121, 176

Brightness Control Module ........................34, 117

Browse...............85, 138, 178, 186, 202, 228, 229

Browse window..................................................85

Browser .............................................................34

Build 1843............................................................1

Build 2116............................................................1

Bulk Opens ...........................................................10

Bulk....................................................................10

Bulk..................................................................116

Bulk Operations Opens ...........................................................10 part ..............................................................114

Bulk Operations .................................................10

Bus Interface Unit ....................................234, 240

Button If ..................................................................113

Buttons Standard Toolbar ..........................................19

By Devices.................10, 37, 38, 48, 51, 163, 190

By Group ...................................................48, 190

By Type .......................................48, 51, 190, 197

C Cabinet ..............................................56, 234, 240

Index

255

Cabinet Door Opened....................................... 56

Calculation ........................................ 76, 123, 124

Called IQCentral Scheduler................................... 161 which responds .......................................... 233

Called47, 56, 65, 76, 88, 117, 124, 134, 137, 138, 143, 146, 152

Camera 1, 5, 9, 10, 24, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101, 103, 104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114, 118, 120, 122, 124, 127, 129, 131, 136, 152, 153, 157, 158, 159, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 184, 205, 229, 231, 234, 235,�236, 237, 238, 239, 240

Camera Browser Module .................................. 34

Camera Control Module.................................. 105

Camera Management ................................. 1, 103

Camera NTCIP ............................................... 104

Camera Preset................................................ 124

Camera Toolbar................................................ 24

Camera Video Configuration Opens........................................................... 10

Camera Video Configuration ............................ 10

Camera Video Configuration ............................ 34

Camera-NTCIP ....................................... 103, 104

Camera-NTCIP Device Creating...................................................... 104

Camera-NTCIP Device ................................... 104

Cameras > Browser ................ 10, 24, 25, 34, 103

Cameras > Video Connections......................... 10

Cancel Pressing ....................................................... 92

Cancel button Choose....................................................... 165

Cancel button.................................................... 92

Cancel button.................................................. 165

Cars Before Red ............................................... 76

Cascade............................................................ 15

Cascaded Windows .................................... 15, 34

Causes..... 1, 26, 42, 46, 118, 122, 139, 149, 175, 176, 189, 202, 216, 223, 224, 234, 235, 236, 238

Caution - Before.............................................. 197

Caution - Before proceeding........................... 197

Caution - Using Polling Assistant......................................... 165

Caution - Using ............................................... 163

Caution - Using ............................................... 165

CDPD Mode ...................................................... 45

Cells .................................................................. 98

Central Access Database ............................... 221

Central application-wide.................................... 10

Central Archive................................................ 225

Central Customization................................. 1, 227

Central database............................................... 98

Central focus ..................................................... 34

Central Help .................................................. 1, 19

Central Help System ......................................... 34

Central INSTALLATION INOPERABLE.......... 221

Central judges status .......................................................... 171

Central judges ................................................. 171

Central login/logout ......................................... 205

Central Override access ........................................................ 216 Performing .................................................... 53 Traffic Controllers ....................................... 101

Central Override........................................ 1, 5, 47

Central Override window................................. 101

Central Port ....................................................... 65

Central Scheduler ........................................... 178

Central synchronizes......................................... 32

Central v1.1..................................................... 216

Central v1.6....................................................... 53

Central Version 1.7 ............................................. 1

Central-software.............................................. 101

Change button Press .......................................................... 213

Change button................................. 184, 185, 186

Change button................................................. 213

Change Password dialog ................................ 213

Change setting ................................................ 178

Changeable clicking........................................................ 109

Changeable..................................................... 109

Changeable..................................................... 114

Changeable..................................................... 118

Changeable..................................................... 176

Changing Device Types.................................... 46


256

Channel Assignments ....................................... 76

Channel Setup .................................................. 76

Chapter ....1, 7, 29, 30, 32, 37, 53, 103, 107, 123, 127, 131, 161, 171, 189, 195, 205, 211, 221, 227

Chapter 10 ............................................ 1, 32, 161

Chapter 10 - Polling .................................... 1, 161

Chapter 11 ............................................ 1, 29, 189

Chapter 11 - Alarm Monitoring ............................ 1

Chapter 12 - Reports................................... 1, 205

Chapter 13 - User Management.................. 1, 211

Chapter 14 - Database Maintenance .......... 1, 221

Chapter 15 - IQCentral Customization ........ 1, 227

Character Height ............................................. 113

Character Width .............................................. 113

Check Auto Refresh checkbox............................... 200

Check .1, 10, 48, 51, 65, 86, 90, 92, 99, 109, 113, 116, 118, 120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 165, 174, 176, 184

Checkboxes ............................................ 124, 184

Choose 'MDI.................................................... 218

Choose No ........................................ 48, 163, 212

Chris Johnson ................................................. 233

Christmas .......................................................... 56

Christmas Day................................................... 56

Christmas Eve................................................... 56

Circuit Overrides ............................................... 65

Circuit Plans ...................................................... 65

CJ 233

Ckts 1-255......................................................... 65

Clear.......48, 56, 65, 76, 107, 114, 120, 121, 165, 195, 200

Clear Event Log use .............................................................. 121

Clear Event Log .............................................. 120

Clear Event Log .............................................. 121

Clear Event Log Entries Selected Event Group Only ........................ 120

Clear Event Log Entries .................................. 120

Clear Events.................................... 107, 120, 121

Clear Failed Detector ........................................ 56

Client/Server ..................................................... 45

Close – This.....................................................163

Close button press ...........................................................153

Close button ................................................48, 99

Close button ....................................................153

Close button ....................................................172

Close button ....................................................214

Close Excel......................................................124

Close Microsoft Access ...................................134

Closed polling interval .....................................168

CMU point ....................................................234, 240

CMU ................................................................234

CMU ................................................................240

CMU/MMU.......................................234, 237, 240

CMU-programmed detected ..............................................234, 240

CMU-programmed...........................................234

CMU-programmed...........................................240

CNA ...................................................................65

Color pushing .......................................................149

Color ....................10, 83, 85, 90, 92, 95, 143, 148

Color ................................................................149

Color ................................................................195

Color ................................................................202

Color Codes.......................................................95

Color Coding Table Cells ....................................................95

Color Coding......................................................10

Color Coding......................................................95

ColorBlue.........................................................134

ColorGreen ......................................................134

ColorRed .........................................................134

Columbus Day ...................................................56

Columns ...38, 48, 56, 97, 98, 124, 134, 148, 195, 208, 218, 221

COM shows............................................................38

COM ..................................................................38

Combination ......................................................34

Comm ..........................................................43, 65

Comm Copy.......................................................65

Index

257

Comm Stats ...................................................... 43

Comm Stats view.............................................. 43

Comm/System .................................................. 56

Comm/System Setup........................................ 65

Command Selection ......................................... 56

Commands full listing .................................................... 218

Commands .. 1, 10, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 37, 42, 56, 101, 107, 109, 114, 122, 152, 159, 163, 169, 175, 182, 195, 212, 216

Comment Adding ........................................................ 224

Comment .................................................... 10, 34

Comment ........................................................ 224

Comments Module.......................................... 224

Comms switch ......................................................... 175

Comms ....................................................... 30, 43

Comms ........................................................... 175

Communications .... 1, 5, 9, 10, 28, 30, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 55, 81, 83, 86, 88, 101, 103, 104, 109, 113, 117, 118, 120, 122, 128, 129, 131, 136, 157, 158, 159, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 184, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

Communications channel .. 9, 109, 113, 117, 118, 122, 128, 131, 163, 176, 234

Communications Failure Testing .................... 175

Communications Unit...................................... 238

Community...................................................... 122

Community Name changes...................................................... 122

Community Name ........................................... 122

Complete ... 1, 7, 8, 10, 20, 39, 46, 55, 81, 85, 88, 90, 92, 95, 98, 99, 109, 114, 118, 120, 124, 131, 133, 134, 138, 150, 153, 159, 160, 161, 163, 165, 171, 172, 176, 178, 182, 184, 186, 197, 205, 207, 208, 209, 211, 213, 221, 223, 225, 227, 228, 229, 231, 232, 235,�239, 240

Complete set.... 1, 7, 8, 20, 39, 46, 81, 85, 90, 92, 95, 98, 99, 109, 114, 118, 120, 131, 133, 138, 150, 153, 159, 160, 161, 163, 165, 171, 172, 176, 178, 182, 184, 186, 205, 207, 209, 213, 221, 223, 225, 227, 229, 232, 235, 239, 240

Computer’s ............................................. 184, 228

Concerning IQCentral ........................................................ 4

Concerning ......................................................... 4

Cond.................................................................. 65

Cond Overlap .................................................... 65

Configs 1-10...................................................... 65

Configuration Polling........................................................... 19

Configuration............................................. 1, 5, 10

Configuration files ............................................. 10

Configure BMP Maps ...................................... 131

Configure GIS Maps................................ 131, 148

Configure interface............................................ 83

Configure Intersection Interface........................ 83

Configure Intersections icon ............................. 81

Configure Intersections Module Launching ..................................................... 81

Configure Intersections Module ........................ 53




Configure Intersections window portion........................................................... 85

Configure Intersections window ........................ 81




Configure Layers............................................. 133

Configure Logs................................................ 114

Configure Map Polling window........................ 163

Configure Spreadsheet ................................... 124

Configure Spreadsheet button ........................ 124

Configuring Intersection Open............................................................. 81 Opens ........................................................... 10 Overview....................................................... 83

Configuring Intersection .................................... 10

Conflict Monitor Unit................................ 234, 237

Connect/Disconnect ........................................ 109

Connected setting ........................................... 163

Connection channel .......................................... 30

Connection Manager......................................... 37

Connection Name ....................................... 38, 45

Connection Timeout .......................................... 45

Connection Type Parameters Required ................................... 45


258

Connection Type ........................................... 1, 43

Connection Type ............................................... 45

Connection’ ..................................................... 184

Connections Adding........................................................... 45 choosing ....................................................... 45 Deleting......................................................... 45 Editing........................................................... 45 Managing ...................................................... 37 open.............................................................. 45 Opens ........................................................... 34 Overview..................................................... 104 Select.................................................... 39, 104 type ............................................................. 103 Wait............................................................... 45

Connections ............................1, 9, 10, 26, 28, 30

Connections list................................... 37, 38, 104

Connections Module Overview....................................................... 45

Connections Module ......................................... 10

Connections Module ......................................... 45

Contact Information............................................. 4

Contact Name ........................................... 65, 130

Contact Peek Traffic ....................... 1, 178, 232

Contacting Peek Technical Support ......................... 213 Peek Traffic ................................................ 1

Contacting ........................................................... 1

Contacting ....................................................... 213

Context Sensitive Help...................................... 34

Context-specific menu opens ............................................................ 14

Context-specific menu....................................... 14

Control clocking............................................... 236

Control Flags..................................................... 56

Control Mode................................................... 114

Control Name .................................................. 218

Controller..................................................... 97, 98

Controller assigned work ................................................ 53, 88, 136

Controller assigned ........................................... 53

Controller assigned ........................................... 88

Controller assigned ......................................... 136

Controller crosses ........................................... 234

Controller Firmware Required ......................... 178

Controller Log Retrieval .................................. 207

Controller Upload...............................................90

Convert ....................118, 176, 208, 234, 237, 240

Converts NEMA TS2-Type ......................234, 240

Converts TS2-Type .........................................234

COORD .............................................92, 101, 239

Coord Constants................................................56

Coord Enhanced................................................65

Coord Phases....................................................65

Coord Plans.......................................................56

Coord Setup ......................................................76

Coordinated 1, 5, 10, 20, 34, 53, 81, 85, 131, 133, 134, 137, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 153, 158, 159, 160, 165, 172, 212, 233, 235, 236, 239, 240

Coordination discusses ........................................................1

Coordination ........................................................1

Coordination Plans ............................................56

Cophase ............................................................65

Copy Data..........................................................99

Copy During.......................................................65

Copy From.................................................99, 163

Copying Settings Between Controllers........................99

Copying .............................................................99

Corel® Paint Shop Pro® .................................139

Cory Dibert ..........................................................4

COS Lead/Lag .......................................................65

COS...................................................................65

COS/F TOD ..............................................................65

COS/F................................................................65

Counts ...........................43, 65, 76, 175, 207, 236

Counts/Minute ...................................................76

Couple bitmap .........................................................137 types .............................................................85 ways......................................................81, 157

Create................................50, 104, 129, 146, 209

Create report ...................................................209

Create Report button select...........................................................205

Create Report button .......................................205

Index

259

Crisis Management..................... 1, 127, 128, 129

Critical......................... 26, 29, 200, 202, 209, 216

Critical Change ................................................. 26

Critical Settings............................................... 202

Cross . 10, 22, 34, 53, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 101, 136, 152, 157, 158, 159, 165, 227, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 239, 240

CS Time Plan ..................................................... 65

CS..................................................................... 65

CSV .................................................................. 65

Ctrl-click .......................................................... 101

Ctrl-F4............................................................... 34

Ctrl-select........................................................ 186

Ctrl-z ............................................................... 208

CTS................................................................... 65

Current. 10, 15, 26, 28, 32, 33, 36, 37, 46, 48, 50, 51, 81, 85, 88, 90, 95, 109, 113, 114, 118, 136, 139, 145, 146, 148, 161, 163, 165, 172, 174, 176, 182, 190, 195, 200, 213, 223, 225, 229, 236, 240

Current Alarms........................................ 195, 200

Current Date ............... 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 174

Current displaying sign............................................................. 109

Current displaying........................................... 109

Current Groups list................................ 48, 50, 51

Current Logged................... 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33

Current Polling ................................................ 165

Current setting ................................................ 223

Current Time............................. 26, 28, 29, 30, 33

Current User Accounts ..................................... 10

Current User icon.............................................. 33

Current Users ....................................... 10, 33, 36

Currently 9, 10, 15, 19, 29, 33, 34, 36, 42, 47, 48, 50, 56, 80, 81, 88, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 113, 114, 122, 139, 146, 153, 157, 158, 159, 163, 165, 172, 178, 182, 186, 195, 200, 213, 216, 223, 235

Currently exhibiting ......................................... 235

Currently exist................................................. 114

Currently Logged In Users.............................. 216

Currently Logged-in .......................................... 34

Currently transmitting........................................ 92

Currently working............................................ 165

Currently-logged................................................ 34

Custom Report ................................................ 209

Customizability ................................................ 227

Cycle Num .............................................................. 56

Cycle Lengths ............................................. 56, 65

Cycle Timer value ............................................................. 85

Cycle Timer ....................................................... 85

Cycle/Offset/Split/Free TOD Circuits ................................................. 65

Cycle/Offset/Split/Free ...................................... 65

D Darken............................................................... 56

Data Sending ........................................................ 98

Data................................................................... 98

Data Bits............................................................ 56

Data covers ..................................................... 134

Data files ......................................................... 137

Data From Getting .......................................................... 97

Data From ................................................... 10, 95

Data handling needs ......................................... 90

Data list ............................................................. 86

Data Manager Quick History ................................................ 26 referencing.................................................... 26 state.............................................................. 26

Data Manager ................................................... 26

Data Manager ................................................... 26

Data Manager icon............................................ 26

Data Manager icon tool ..................................... 26

Data Manager Quick History Viewing ......................................................... 26

Data Manager Quick History............................. 26

Data Manager Status ........................................ 26

Data Manager Status Icon ........ 28, 29, 30, 32, 33

Data Manager toolbar Double-clicking ............................................. 26

Data Manager toolbar ....................................... 26

Data object polling........................................... 161

Data Objects .83, 85, 86, 161, 163, 169, 172, 197


260

Data set ........................................................... 145

Data Type................................................ 163, 172

Database......................................................... 134

Database listing................................................. 99

Database Maintenance ................................... 221

DataPath ......................................................... 134

Date Range For All Dates ............................................... 205

Date Range ............................................... 42, 121

Date Range ..................................................... 205

Date/Time.......................................................... 32

Dates.5, 32, 42, 76, 120, 121, 184, 195, 205, 224

Day Time............................................................ 107

Day........................................................ 56, 65, 76

Day Plans 1-16.................................................. 56

Day Plans 1-300................................................ 65

Day Plans tab.......................................... 118, 176

Daylight Savings ......................................... 65, 76

Deact-Delay ...................................................... 65

Default ............................................. 114, 134, 160

Default Layer Values....................................... 134

Default Map Setting......................................................... 160

Default Map..................................................... 160

Default Time............................................ 111, 112

Define Layer Groups ....................................... 133

Delay ................................................................. 65

Delay Inhibits..................................................... 65

Delete Administration ............................................. 211 Alarm Condition .......................................... 197 Connection.................................................... 45 Device..................................................... 38, 40 Device Group.............................. 47, 48, 50, 51 Device Type.................................................. 46 GIS Layer.................................................... 150 GIS Map View............................................. 144 Group............................................................ 52 Icon ............................................................. 228 Layer........................................................... 148 Map............................................................. 139 Map View............................................ 143, 144 Schedule Task............................................ 186 User Account ......................212, 213, 214, 215

Delete................................................ 1, 10, 34, 37

Delete Group Button Press.............................................................52

Delete Group Button..........................................48

Delete Group Button..........................................52

Delete Selected Task press ...........................................................186

Delete Selected Task ......................................186

Describe ...1, 5, 10, 29, 30, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 48, 55, 81, 85, 103, 104, 117, 118, 120, 122, 138, 143, 145, 149, 150, 157, 158, 159, 163, 165, 169, 172, 176, 184, 189, 190, 197, 205, 209, 216, 221, 224, 233, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

Describes IQCentral Version 1.5 .........................1

Description -- Entered........................................38

Description – This....................................163, 172

Det 1-12 Plans 1-3 Inhibits ..........................................65

Det 1-12.............................................................65

Detail display sign .............................................................153

Detail display ...................................................153

Details.1, 7, 10, 14, 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 56, 65, 76, 81, 83, 90, 104, 105, 110, 111, 113, 114, 116, 118, 121, 128, 130, 131, 138, 139, 143, 146, 148, 153, 157, 158, 159, 161, 171, 176, 182, 189, 190, 197, 208, 211, 215, 218, 223, 229, 232

Details About Configuring Layers ....................148

Detected CMU-programmed ..............................234, 240

Detected ...10, 28, 29, 56, 83, 114, 161, 172, 189, 197, 200, 233, 234

Detected ..........................................................234

Detected ..........................................................234

Detected ..........................................................240

Detection Zone ..........................83, 172, 233, 234

Detector Accum.................................................56

Detector Accumulation ......................................56

Detector Constant Call ......................................56

Detector Copy Group.........................................65

Detector Data ..................................................165

Detector Diag.....................................................56

Detector Erratic Output......................................56

Detector Failure ...............................................234

Detector Non-Lock.............................................65

Index

261

Detector Plan No .............................................. 56

Detector Plans .................................................. 56

Detector Repair................................................. 56

Detector Switching Enable................................ 65

Detectors result .............................................................. 4 Trailing ......................................................... 65

Detectors 1-12 .................................................. 65

Detectors 1-64 ............................................ 65, 76

DetectorVolume .............................................. 172

Device Accessing................................................... 159 Adding .......................................................... 39 Managing ..................................................... 37

Device............................................................... 37

Device Add/Edit window ................................... 38

Device Address Set .............................................................. 104

Device Address................................................. 39

Device Address............................................... 104

Device Configuration list ................................. 104

Device Configurations................. 10, 47, 104, 207

Device Configurations window Opens........................................................... 10

Device Configurations window.......................... 10

Device Configurations window........................ 104

Device Connection Details Viewing......................................................... 30

Device Connection Details................................ 30

Device Connection/Responding ....................... 30

Device fails ....................................................... 30

Device Groups button clicking ....................................... 47, 50, 51, 52

Device Groups Module Launching..................................................... 47

Device Groups Module ..................................... 47

Device Groups Module ..................................... 47

Device Groups window open ............................................................. 48 Parts ............................................................. 48 Using ............................................................ 48

Device Groups window..................................... 48

Device Heirarchy ............................................ 190

Device History................................................. 189

Device Icon ............................................... 10, 153

Device Icons Displayed window...................... 152

Device Icons Temporarily Displayed............... 152

Device Icons Temporarily Displayed window.. 152

Device List window............................................ 48

Device Log Polling Opens ........................................................... 10

Device Log Polling ............................................ 10

Device Log Polling window Open........................................................... 175

Device Log Polling window ............................. 175

Device Logs ................................ 42, 43, 175, 207

Device Management Introduction................................................... 38 Open............................................................. 39

Device Manager ................................................ 37

Device Messages list .............................. 109, 129

Device Security ....................................... 122, 216

Device Security Module Opening ...................................................... 122

Device Security Module .................................. 122

Device Specific Auto Populate Polling tool ............................ 81 set................................................................. 81

Device Specific.................................................. 81

Device Status Opens ........................................................... 10

Device Status tool ............................................. 30

Device Type Data............................................ 172

Device Type Log ............................................. 174

Device Type Log polling window..................... 174

Device Type Management ................................ 38

Device Type Manager ....................................... 37

Device Type Module Link Icon ..................................................... 231 open.............................................................. 46

Device Type Module ......................................... 46

Device Type Module ....................................... 231

Device Type Polling ........................................ 174

Device Types list ......................................... 37, 38

Device View .............................................. 33, 163

Device which.. 1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 129, 152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178, 182, 184, 207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 240


262

Device which manages sequence ...1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 129, 152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178, 182, 184, 207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 240

Device window ................................................ 104

Device Zoom Levels Opens ........................................................... 10

Device Zoom Levels.......................................... 10

Device Zoom Levels.......................................... 81

Device-by-device.........................10, 37, 174, 190

DeviceDisplayName................................ 182, 184

Device-Level Security ................................. 1, 122

DeviceNode....................................................... 76

Devices Activity ............................................... 205

Devices Connected ..................................... 26, 30

Devices Displayed list ..................................... 153

Devices Module Overview....................................................... 38

Devices Module................................................. 38

Device's NTCIP Status Viewing ......................................................... 37

Device's NTCIP Status...................................... 37

Devices on Maps............................................. 131

Devices Responding Status............................................................ 30

Devices Responding ......................................... 30

Devices Temporarily Displayed list ................. 153

Devices –This list ............................................ 172

Devices Toolbar ................................................ 25

Devices Window.......................................... 39, 40

Device-specific ............................................ 25, 92

DeviceStatus41Device ...................................... 42

DeviceStatus41Device-CommStatus ................ 43

DeviceStatus41Device-History.......................... 43

DeviceStatus41DeviceType .............................. 42

Device-type-based standard ............................... 1

Diag Green Ext.................................................. 56

Diagnostic Recalls............................................. 56

Diagnostic Tests use .............................................................. 113

Diagnostic Tests.............................................. 113

Diagnostic Tests ..............................................114

Diagnostic Tests ..............................................116

Diagnostic Topics ....................................114, 116

Diagnostics ......1, 10, 56, 107, 113, 114, 116, 223

Dial Retries ........................................................56

Difference ..........................................95, 152, 159

Different in Active Memory' - The ......................95

Different in Both Places' - The...........................95

Different in the Device' - The .............................95

Dim Alt Half........................................................76

Dim Don't Walik .................................................56

Dim Dont Walk...................................................65

Dim Red.................................................56, 65, 76

Direction ..........................................................153

Disable AOR......................................................56

Disappear ........................................................153

Discarded ........................................................122

Discrete input discrete output ......................................37, 103

Discrete output discrete input.........................................37, 103

Discribes..............................................................1

Discusses Coordination....................................................1

Discusses ............................................................1

Display Alarm History ......................................195

Display button..................................................109

Display Device History.....................................195

Display Message on Sign ................................109

Display Object .................................................159

Display Object Polling Rate .............................159

Display Only ............................................109, 144

Display Only button .........................................109

Displays command ..........................................152

Dist ....................................................................56

Dock button choose ........................................................200

Dock button .....................................................200

Dock/Restore button........................................195

DON'T DO IT .....................................................46

Door Open .......................................................113

Door Status......................................................116

Index

263

Double-clicking Data Manager toolbar .................................. 26 NTCIP Server............................................... 28

Double-clicking ................................................. 26

Double-clicking ................................................. 28

Double-clicking ............................................... 104

Download.......................................................... 90

Drag Icon ............................................................ 153

Drag ................................ 38, 83, 97, 98, 144, 152

Drag ................................................................ 153

Drag ................................................................ 157

Drag ................................................................ 158

Drop ... 38, 86, 109, 120, 139, 144, 145, 152, 153, 205, 212, 218, 223, 224, 228, 231

Drop Address.............................................. 38, 39

DST................................................................... 56

DST Adjustment................................................ 56

Dual Entry ..................................... 56, 65, 76, 234

Duration traffic signals .............................. 152, 165, 178

Duration ... 1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 65, 76, 81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 124, 129

Duty .................................................................. 88

Dyn Max Step ................................................... 76

Dynamic Press .......................................................... 169

Dynamic.......................................................... 169

Dynamic Max .................................................... 76

Dynamic Object Configuration Opening...................................................... 169 tells ............................................................. 169

Dynamic Object Configuration . 10, 161, 163, 165, 168

Dynamic Object Configuration ........................ 169



Dynamic Objects............................... 20, 163, 169

Dynamic Objects button Press .......................................................... 169

Dynamic Objects button.................................. 169

Dynamic Objects Configuration window ......... 169

Dynamic Omit/Recall ........................................ 65

Dynamic Omits ................................................. 65

Dynamic Recall ................................................. 65

E Eastbound Thru................................................. 56

Easter Monday .................................................. 56

Edge IQCentral window ....................................... 195

Edge................................................ 7, 10, 38, 134

Edge................................................................ 195

Edge................................................................ 197

Edge................................................................ 200

Edge................................................................ 208

Edit Connection ................................................... 45 Device..................................................... 38, 40 Device Types................................................ 46 Existing Alarm Condition ............................ 197 Existing Map ............................................... 139 Existing Message ....................................... 109 Font ............................................................ 117 Icon..................................................... 228, 229 LayerName ................................................. 134 SNMP Device Security ............................... 122 Values........................................................... 92 Zoom Areas ................................................ 139

Edit .......................................... 1, 7, 10, 14, 34, 37

Edit > Undo ..................................................... 208

Edit Connection Button ..................................... 45

Edit Device Button............................................. 40

Edit existing icons ........................................... 228

Edit existing messages ................................... 110

Edit Master Fonts10, 34, 107, 109, 113, 117, 118, 120, 121, 176

Edit menu ................................................ 184, 186

Edit Message button clicking........................................................ 109 press........................................................... 110

Edit Message button ....................................... 109

Edit Message button ....................................... 110

Edit Message window ..................................... 109

EEPROM............................................. 56, 65, 235

EEPROM Loaded w/Keyboard ......................... 65

EEPROM Write ................................................. 56

EGB........................................................... 65, 234

EGB Percentage ............................................... 65

EIA/TIA-485 Serial Data.......................... 234, 240


264

Either pedestrian ....................................................... 4

Either................................................................... 4

Electronically erasable/programmable ............ 235

Email ................................................................... 4

Emergency ..........................1, 101, 127, 235, 238

Emergency Response.............101, 127, 235, 238

Empty .............................................................. 109

Enable set ............................................................... 163

Enable .................9, 42, 56, 65, 76, 137, 139, 153

Enable ............................................................. 163

Enable ............................................................. 168

Enable Coord During Cyclic Int ......................... 65

Enable Leading Overlaps.................................. 65

Enable Signal Head Program............................ 65

End Pedestrian Permissive................................ 235 Permissive .................................................. 235 Ref ................................................................ 65

End Absence Mon Hour .................................... 65

End Date ......................................................... 205

End Duration ................................................... 129

End Duration Message.................................... 129

End Duration message specified .................... 129

End-of-Line Delay ............................................. 56

Enhanced .......................................................... 65

Enhanced Perm ................................................ 65

Enhancements ............................................ 5, 218

Ennumerated Example........................................................ 92

Ennumerated..................................................... 92

Enter Description.................................................. 138 Name .......................................... 138, 144, 212

Enter 8, 10, 36, 38, 39, 76, 92, 111, 117, 129, 134

Enter/Edit ......................................39, 40, 45, 104

Enter/Edit Connections window ........................ 45

Enter/Edit Device ................................ 10, 39, 104

Enter/Edit Device Type Opens ........................................................... 10

Enter/Edit Device Type ..................................... 10

Enter/Edit Device Type ................................... 104

Enter/Edit Device Type window

Close...........................................................104 opens ..........................................................104

Enter/Edit Device Type window.......................104

Entire 820A/OSAM ............................................56

Entire Database.......................90, 92, 97, 98, 225

Enumerated Values ...........................................92

EP....................................................................235

EPP .................................................................235

Equal ...............................................................208

Erratic ................................................................65

Erratic Output ....................................................56

Error......1, 10, 34, 43, 56, 92, 107, 114, 116, 120, 137, 149, 152, 207, 234, 240

Error Logging on Message Signs ....................120

Error Logs Opens ...........................................................10 portion .........................................................120

Error Message .................................................152

ESRI ....................................................................1

ESRI GIS .....................................................1, 137

Ethernet .....1, 10, 38, 39, 104, 122, 236, 237, 239

Event Groups...........................................120, 121

Event Log .....10, 34, 65, 120, 121, 205, 221, 223, 224

Event log records system.........................................................223

Event log records.............................................223

Event Log Size open ............................................................223

Event Log Size ..................................................10

Event Log Size ................................................223

Event Log Size icon select...........................................................223

Event Log Size icon.........................................223

Event Log Size Module Opening ......................................................223

Event Log Size Module....................................223

Events..............................................................120

Example Ennumerated ................................................92

Example...................29, 33, 42, 53, 54, 85, 86, 88

Example IQCentral ............................................54

Example Network ..............................................53

Example Screen ..............................................122

Index

265

Example Topography........................................ 54

Excel file ......................................................... 124

Exceptionof ............................................. 236, 240

Existing GIS ............................................................. 149

Existing ........................................................... 149

Existing Alarm Condition Editing ........................................................ 197

Existing Alarm Condition................................. 197

Existing Device Group Modifying.............................. 47, 48, 50, 51, 52

Existing Device Type ........................................ 46

Existing device type except changes........................................................ 46

Existing device type except .............................. 46

Existing Group Modifying...................................................... 51

Existing Group ............................................ 48, 50

Existing Group .................................................. 51

Existing Map Editing ........................................................ 139

Existing Map ................................................... 139

Existing Message Edit ............................................................. 109

Existing Message............................................ 109

Expand Scenario ..................................................... 129 Scenarios ........................................... 128, 129

Expand............................................................ 128

Expand............................................................ 129

Expand............................................................ 129

Expand............................................................ 197

Expect Status ......................................................... 161

Expect............................................................... 39

Expect............................................................. 161

Exporting Report Data................................................ 208

Exporting......................................................... 208

Ext Coor Type................................................... 56

Ext Start Override Preemeption........................ 65

Extended................................................... 34, 223

Extended Green Band .................................... 234

Extended Logging......................... 10, 21, 34, 223

F F1 34

F2 34

F3 pressing .............................................. 157, 158

F3 34

F3 157

F3 158

F4 34

F6 34, 127

F6 key Press .......................................................... 127

F6 key ............................................................. 127

F7 Press .......................................................... 195

F7 34

F7 195

F7 200

Facilities .................................................. 238, 239

Fail Max Recall Phase ...................................... 65

Fail Max Recall Times....................................... 65

Fail Max Time.................................................... 65

Fault Frame....................................................... 76

Feature emphasizes........................................ 216

Features ... 1, 5, 56, 101, 105, 107, 122, 123, 134, 138, 148, 178, 195, 197, 216, 234, 236

February 20......................................................... 1

February 2007..................................................... 5

February 2008..................................................... 5

Feed NTCIP........................................................... 10

Feed .................................................................. 10

Feed .................................................................. 56

Fiber Optic Modem.......................................... 235

Field .1, 5, 7, 8, 10, 20, 28, 32, 33, 37, 38, 39, 43, 45, 46, 48, 51, 53, 54, 56, 64, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 101, 104, 107, 109, 111, 114, 118, 120, 124, 131, 133, 134, 138, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 153, 159, 160, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 176, 178, 182, 184, 185, 186, 197, 205, 207, 209, 212, 213, 214, 218, 221, 223, 224, 225, 227, 228, 229, 231, 232, 235, 240

Field Name.............................................. 148, 149


266

Field set........................................................... 169

Field stores...................................................... 114

FieldName....................................................... 134

Fields appropriate ............................................. 90

Figure1, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 37, 39, 42, 43, 48, 50, 51, 52, 54, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 101, 110, 111, 117, 131, 143, 146, 148, 150, 153, 157, 158, 159, 163, 165, 168, 169, 174, 182, 184, 186, 190, 195, 197, 200, 202, 215, 216, 218, 225

File fields ......................................................... 134

File menu Open ........................................................... 208

File menu ...................................................... 9, 36

File menu ........................................................ 208

File menu ........................................................ 213

File Name................138, 148, 208, 209, 228, 229

Filename ......................................................... 229

Filter - Device .................................................. 163

Filter - Device Type ......................................... 163

Filtered Group ................................................. 163

Filters ....................10, 29, 42, 163, 195, 205, 209

Find Information .................................................. 1

Finished adding............................................... 138

Finished creating............................................. 109

Finished modifying .......................................... 197

Firmware ..1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 129, 152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178, 182, 184, 207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 240

Firmware programming ....1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 129, 152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178, 182, 184, 207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 240

Fixed Time ...................................................... 112

Flash ....56, 65, 76, 101, 110, 114, 202, 216, 234, 235, 237, 240

Flash Alt Half Hertz ........................................... 76

Flash Code........................................................ 65

Flash Dont ......................................................... 65

Flash Dont Walk................................................ 65

Flash Don't Walk ............................................... 56

Flash Dwell........................................................ 76

Flash Entry Phase .............................................76

Flash Feedback Detected..................................56

Flash Memory..................................................235

FLASH mode ...........................................234, 240

Flash OL Green .................................................56

Flash OL Red ....................................................56

Flash OL Yellow ................................................56

Flash On/Off ....................................................110

Flash Plans 1-16................................................65

Flash Red ..........................................................76

Flash Red Overlaps...........................................56

Flash Red Phases .............................................56

Flash Repeat Interval ......................................202

Flashes/minute ..................................................65

Floating Windows .......................................................15

Floating..............................................................15

Fltxoy ...............................................................110

FO..............................................................65, 235

FOM.................................................................235

Font any set ........................................................117 Editing .........................................................117

Font ...................................1, 10, 34, 37, 107, 114

Font Color........................................................143

Font Editor access.........................................................117

Font Editor .......................................................117

Font Editor .......................................................117

Font Editor Interface Using...........................................................117

Font Editor Interface ........................................117

Font Editor window parts ............................................................117

Font Editor window..........................................117

Font files ............................................................10

Font Size .........................................................143

Font View Opens ...........................................................10

Font View...........................................................10

Font View.........................................................117

FontBold ..........................................................134

FontColorBlue..................................................134

Index

267

FontColorGreen .............................................. 134

FontColorRed ................................................. 134

FontItalic ......................................................... 134

FontName ....................................................... 134

Fonts Module .................................................. 117

FontSize.......................................................... 134

For All Dates ................................................... 205

For All Device Types....................................... 205

For All Devices................................................ 205

For All Users ................................................... 205

For Date Range .............................................. 205

For Device Type ..................................... 169, 172

For Selected Device Type .............................. 205

For Selected Devices...................................... 205

For Selected Users ......................................... 205

Force....... 30, 56, 65, 76, 122, 160, 234, 235, 237

Force Off................................................... 65, 235

Force Output..................................................... 56

ForceOff.......................................................... 235

Fore Color....................................................... 202

Forever ........................................................... 129

FormBuilder Launching................................................... 232

FormBuilder ................................ 10, 34, 227, 232

FormBuilder .................................................... 232

FormBuilder Interface ..................................... 232

FormBuilder Module ....................................... 232

Free .................................. 4, 56, 65, 92, 101, 239

Free Plan .......................................................... 56

Free, Flash...................................................... 101

Friday checked ....................................... 118, 176

From activating ............................................... 146

From Database ................................................. 98

From eating up................................................ 175

FSK................................................................. 235

FTP Data .......................................................... 21

Full . 10, 15, 29, 33, 128, 134, 138, 144, 178, 211, 213, 218, 223, 228, 229

Full Extent....................................................... 144

Full listing command ................................................... 218

Full listing........................................................ 218

Fully Actuated ................................................. 235

Fully-actuated.................................................. 233

Further Details........................................... 38, 116

G G1C................................................................... 65

G2C................................................................... 65

GBP Omits ........................................................ 56

Generalized Real-time ...................... 88, 136, 165

Generate ......................................................... 207

Generating Data Reporting .................................................... 207

Generating Data.............................................. 207

Geographical...... 20, 81, 133, 134, 137, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 153, 158, 159, 160

Geo-located..................................................... 153

Get From Sign......................................... 118, 176

Gif...................................................................... 85

GIS Device Zoom Levels Setting ........................................................ 152

GIS Device Zoom Levels ................................ 152

GIS Layer Groups Creating ...................................................... 148 Opens ........................................................... 34

GIS Layers .............................................. 148, 150

GIS Layers Module Opening ...................................................... 148

GIS Layers Module ......................................... 148

GIS Map .5, 10, 20, 131, 134, 137, 144, 145, 146, 148, 153, 158, 159

GIS Map Data Loading....................................................... 137

GIS Map Data ................................................. 137

GIS Map Data ................................................. 159

GIS Map Layer Groups ................................... 146

GIS Map Layers Defining ...................................................... 134

GIS Map Layers .............................................. 134

GIS Map Viewer ...................................... 153, 158

GIS Map Viewer Interface............................... 158

GIS Map Viewer switches ............................... 153

GIS Zoom Level Setting ........................................................ 153

GIS Zoom Level .............................................. 153


268

GIS Zoom Level .............................................. 240

GIS Zoom Levels commandunder Maps menu ......................................... 236, 240

GIS Zoom Levels commandunder .................. 236

GIS Zoom Levels commandunder .................. 240

GIS Zoom Levels window open............................................................ 153

GIS Zoom Levels window ............................... 153

GIS Zoom Settings Opening ...................................................... 153 Opens ........................................................... 34

GIS Zoom Settings...................................... 10, 20

GIS Zoom Settings............................................ 34

GIS Zoom Settings.......................................... 153

GIS-based ....................................................... 134

GISData .......................................................... 137

GIS-enabled .................................... 131, 137, 143

GIS-enabled IQCentral............................ 131, 143

GIS-mapping ................................................... 137

GIS-mapping enabled ..................................... 137

Give.........104, 110, 134, 163, 168, 200, 209, 233

Global IQCentral Modules................................... 7

Glossary .............................................................. 1

Glossary-Connected ....................................... 234

Glossary-Device.............................................. 234

Glossary-Disconnected ................................... 234

Glossary-GIS................................................... 235

Glossary-HDLC Address................................. 236

Glossary-Maintenance Icon ............................ 236

Glossary-Marginal ........................................... 236

Glossary-MIB .................................................. 237

Glossary-Military Time .................................... 237

Glossary-NTCIP .............................................. 237

Glossary-Object Identifier................................ 237

Glossary-Object Name.................................... 238

Glossary-Offline .............................................. 238

Glossary-Online .............................................. 238

Glossary-SNMP .............................................. 239

Glossary-STMP............................................... 239

Glossary-Zoom................................................ 240

Go Maps ........................................................... 139

Go.......9, 15, 28, 36, 42, 50, 55, 65, 81, 103, 104, 122, 127, 131, 134, 137, 138

Go OFF............................................................202

Good Friday.......................................................56

Graphic File Changing.......................................................85

Graphic File .......................................................85

Green start .............................................................239

Green....56, 65, 76, 83, 85, 86, 95, 109, 113, 116, 120, 233, 234, 235, 237

Green...............................................................239

Green Extension Time.......................................56

Green Overlap ...................................................83

Green Phase selected.........................................................86

Green Phase .....................................................83

Green Phase .....................................................86

Greenband.......................................................235

Greenband Analysis ........................................235

Grid Display Type ............................................................159

Grid Display .....................................................159

Group...........................................................50, 52

Group button clicking ..........................................................47

Group Description........................................48, 51

Group Name ..........................................10, 48, 51

Groups List ........................................................48

Groups Module ..................................................47

Guaranteed Passage.........................................76

H Handling

Alarms.........................................................200

Handling ..........................................................200

Hardware piece .................................1, 10, 161, 175, 229

HDLC.........................................................65, 236

HDLC Address.................................................236

HDLC stands ...................................................236

Heirarchical indicate................................................237, 238

Heirarchical......................................................237

Index

269

Heirarchical..................................................... 237

Heirarchical..................................................... 238

Heirarchical..................................................... 238

Heirarchy ................................................ 237, 238

Help File Version 1.29 ........................................ 1

Help File Version 1.32 ........................................ 1

Help menu .............................................. 131, 153

HelpTopic-Time .............................................. 113

Higher PE ......................................................... 65

High-level Data Link Control ........................... 236

Historical Alarm............................................... 197

History....................................... 5, 26, 28, 43, 189

Horizontal........................................................ 153

Horizontal Border............................................ 113

Horizontally Tiling............................................................. 15

Horizontally ....................................................... 10

Horizontally ....................................................... 15

Hovering Over ........................................... 26, 28, 29, 30

How GIS Map Layers Work ............................ 134

However, IQCentral .......................................... 26

HTM ................................................................ 208

I I/O Mode ........................................................... 65

I/O Steering....................................................... 65

Ico ........................................................... 228, 229

Ico file ..................................................... 228, 229

Icon Adding ........................................................ 231 Drag ........................................................... 153 Placing ....................................................... 153

Icon button Link............................................................. 231

Icon button ........................................................ 83

Icon button ...................................................... 231

Icon Detail button............................................ 229

Icon File contains...................................................... 229

Icon File .......................................................... 228

Icon File .......................................................... 229

Icon File .......................................................... 229

Icon File .......................................................... 229

Icon File Name................................................ 228

Icon From.................................... 29, 85, 228, 229

Icon Management ....................... 10, 34, 152, 227

Icon Names............................................. 228, 229

Icon Names list................................................ 228

Icon opens window.......................................................... 28

Icon opens......................................................... 28

Icon representing ............................................ 153

Icons Adding .......................................... 83, 228, 229 Alarm Statistics............................................. 29 Creating ...................................................... 229 Deleting ...................................................... 228 Editing................................................. 228, 229 Linking ........................................................ 131 locate .......................................................... 229 name........................................................... 229 Placing........................................................ 152 see Adding.................................................. 231 Sign .................................................... 157, 158 Tooltip............................................... 26, 28, 30

Icons............................................................ 10, 26

Icons associatedwith ............................... 236, 240

Icons Displayed window.................................. 152

Icons operate slightly differently........................ 85

Icons Temporarily Displayed........................... 152

Icons Temporarily Displayed window.............. 152

Icons/Intersection.............................................. 85

ID 65, 83, 163, 172, 233, 234

IDs NTCIP........................................................... 10

IDs..................................................................... 10

If button.......................................................... 113

If Extended Logging ........................................ 223

If O/L ................................................................. 65

If You............................................................... 214

Image File ..................................... 5, 85, 139, 229

IMPORTANT..................................................... 46

Important - Remember .................................... 175

In Device Type................................................ 104 popup menu................................................ 200


270

In 1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14, 15, 20, 22, 24, 25, 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 64, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 101, 103

In Both Places ................................................... 95

In communicating ............................................ 175

In configuring map....................................... 5, 165

In contrast ....................................................... 152

In installing ...................................................... 104

In interfering .................................................... 233

In tripping ........................................................ 195

Incident Configuring ................................................. 123

Incident........................................................ 10, 34

Incident............................................................ 123

Incident............................................................ 124

Incident Management Module.....10, 34, 123, 124

Incident Management Template.xls ................ 124

Incident Spreadsheets Configuring ................................................. 124

Incident Spreadsheets .................................... 124

Include Alarm Configurations .................................. 189

Include 1, 5, 10, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 48, 55, 76, 81, 83, 85, 103, 104, 107, 118, 120, 122, 124, 127, 129, 134, 143, 145, 157, 158, 159, 163, 165, 169, 172, 174, 176, 184

Increment ........................................................ 175

Index use .................................................................. 1

Index ................................................................... 1

Indicate Activation .................................................... 129 heirarchical ......................................... 237, 238 which fails ................................................... 234

Indicate.4, 26, 28, 30, 33, 48, 83, 90, 92, 95, 114, 118, 124, 127, 129

Info ............................................................ 34, 202

Information path ...10, 37, 38, 45, 83, 86, 88, 101, 103, 104, 120, 122, 136, 163, 184, 234

Informational setting ......................................................... 202

Informational ..................................................... 29

Informational ................................................... 202

Informational Alarm

Typical Settings...........................................202 Informational Alarm .........................................202

Informative.......................................................189

Inhibit Delay.......................................................56

Inhibit Max .........................................................65

Input Lock ..........................................................65

Input Objects ...................................................124

Inserts Alarm icon .....................................................86

Instance .................1, 81, 146, 152, 163, 172, 207

Instance – In ....................................................172

Integer .............................................................169

Intelligent transportation systems ............211, 227

Interacting With...............................................................98

Interacting..........................................................98

Interaction With Central Database ..........................................98

Interaction With..................................................98

Interactive Upload/Download Module................53

Interconnection ..................................................37

Interface...............................................................7

Interface Controls ............................................172

Internet ............................104, 122, 236, 237, 239

Intersection ..........................................81, 83, 236

Intersection Configuration..................................85

Intersection Failed .............................................83

Intersection Flash ..............................................83

Intersection Icon Image Library .........................85

Intersection Icons Linking...........................................................86 Setting Up Map Polling .........................88, 136

Intersection Icons ........................................81, 85

Intersection ONLINE..........................................83

Intersection Polling Assistant dialog ................165

Intersection Status...................................157, 158

Intersection Status window open ....................................................157, 158

Intersection Status window..............................157

Intersection Status window..............................158

Intersection Toolbar...........................................22

Intersection/Sensor..........................................159

Intersections > Copy Database .........................10

Index

271

Intersections > Upload/Download... 10, 34, 97, 98

Intersections Module......................................... 81

Interval56, 65, 101, 123, 161, 163, 165, 168, 171, 172, 174, 175, 178, 235, 236, 238

Intro Polling ........................................................ 171

Intro................................................................. 171

Introduction Device Management .................................... 38

Introduction ....................................................... 38

IP shows ........................................................... 38

IP 239

IP 239

IQ 1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 101, 103, 104, 105, 107, 109, 110, 113, 114, 116, 117, 118, 120, 122, 123, 124, 127, 128, 129, 131, 133, 134, 136, 137, 138, 139, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 152, 153, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 163, 165, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 178, 181, 182, 184, 185, 186, 189, 190, 195, 197, 200, 202, 205, 207, 208, 209, 211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 218, 221, 223, 224, 225, 227, 228, 229, 231, 232, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

IQ ATC Controller Parameter Fields.......................................... 76

IQ ATC Controller ............................................. 55

IQ ATC Controller ............................................. 76

IQ ATC Fields ................................................... 76

IQ CentralServer’ ............................................ 178

IQCentral 1.5 .................................................... 47

IQCentral Access.................... 205, 207, 221, 223

IQCentral Access Database ........................... 221

IQCentral application Closes .......................................................... 34

IQCentral application ........................................ 10

IQCentral application ........................................ 34

IQCentral BMP................................................ 131

IQCentral computer’s...................................... 184

IQCentral Database ............................ 95, 98, 134

IQCentral Help ........................................ 1, 10, 19

IQCentral Help System..................................... 34

IQCentral Installation Manual ............................. 5

IQCentral Layer............................................... 148

IQCentral login ................................................ 101

IQCentral login/logout ..................................... 205

IQCentral Maps ................................. 53, 157, 158

IQCentral Menus ........................................... 7, 10

IQCentral Network............................................. 55

IQCentral Operating Manual Welcome......................................................... 1

IQCentral Operating Manual ............................... 1

IQCentral Operating Manual ............................... 5

IQCentral Report Selection Module ................ 205

IQCentral Reports Reports. Opens ............................................ 10

IQCentral Reports ............................................. 10

IQCentral Reports ........................................... 178

IQCentral System...................................... 53, 224

IQCentral toolbars ............................................. 10

IQCentral Update Release History...................... 5

IQCentral Version 1.2 Release Notes................. 5




IQCentral/Device Icons/Intersection ................. 85

IQCentral's Map Management ........................ 137

IQCentral's Map View ..................................... 139

IQCentral's MapFiles....................................... 137

IQCentral's Status bar..... 7, 10, 14, 15, 26, 30, 34

IQCentrol......................................................... 153

IQConnect Hardware ........................................ 55

Isonly............................................................... 236

IT 131, 143, 221

ITS...... 1, 5, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55, 81, 104, 120, 122, 157, 158, 159, 163, 169, 172, 184, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

J January 2006 ...................................................... 5

Jlx 110

Jpg .................................................................... 85

Jpx................................................................... 110

July 2005............................................................. 5

June 2008 ........................................................... 5


272

K Keyboard...1, 7, 14, 15, 34, 56, 92, 157, 158, 232

Keyboard Beep ................................................. 56

Keyboard Shortcuts........................................... 34

King Day............................................................ 56

L LabelPosition................................................... 134

Large Size ....................................................... 153

Large Tool Icons ............................................... 10

Last Car Passage.............................................. 65

Last Car Passage Phases................................. 56

Last Edited .......................................................... 1

Layer ............................................................... 149

Layer Editor Open ........................................................... 134

Layer Editor ..................................................... 134

LayerDetailID .................................................. 134

LayerFileName................................................ 134

LayerGroupID.................................................. 134

LayerLoadOrder .............................................. 134

LayerName Edit.............................................................. 134

LayerName...................................................... 134

LayerOrder ...................................................... 134

Layers button .......................................... 148, 149

Layers displays list ............................................................... 148

Layers displays ............................................... 148

Layers Module................................................. 148

Layers window exit .............................................................. 148 Use ............................................................. 134

Layers window ................................................ 134

Layers window ................................................ 148

LCD Backlight ................................................... 56

LCD Contrast .................................................... 56

LCD Setup......................................................... 56

Lead Detector.................................................... 65

Lead/Lag COS.............................................................. 65

Lead/Lag ........................................................... 65

Lead/Lag ......................................................... 236

Lead/Lag Operation.........................................236

Learning Log On ............................................................7

Learning...............................................................7

Leave Alarm System Settings window...................202

Leave.................................88, 134, 163, 168, 169

Leave...............................................................202

Leave Connected ............................................163

Left....7, 10, 15, 26, 28, 30, 42, 43, 48, 51, 52, 85, 86, 97, 98, 99, 117, 120, 144, 145, 148, 163, 182, 184, 185, 186, 190, 195, 197, 200, 208, 209, 212

Left-side...................................................212, 213

Less Than........................................................153

Letting IQCentral.....................................................134

Letting..............................................................134

Level .......1, 10, 29, 33, 34, 36, 53, 81, 85, 97, 98, 117, 122, 131, 143, 153, 190, 197, 200, 202, 211, 212, 213, 216, 218, 236, 237, 238, 240

Level1 ..............................................................211

Level2 ..............................................................211

Level3 ..............................................................211

Levelicons................................................236, 240

Levels commandunder ............................236, 240

Levels Module .................................................218

Limit ...................................................................65

Line Justification ..............................................110

Line Volts.................................................113, 116

Link Icon button ..................................................231 Icons ...........................................................131 Intersection Icons..........................................86

Link .10, 19, 23, 24, 25, 34, 37, 46, 55, 76, 81, 83, 85

Link Icon Device Type ......................10, 21, 34, 152, 231 Device Type Module ...................................231

Link Icon ............................................................10

Link Icon ............................................................21

Link Icon ............................................................34

Link Icon ..........................................................152

Link Icon ..........................................................231

Linux operating system..........................5, 55, 233

Index

273

List .................................................................. 216

List button Add Object ................................................. 172

List button ....................................................... 172

Listing Layers displays .......................................... 148 Viewing....................................................... 122

Listing ............................................................. 122

Listing ............................................................. 148

Listing ............................................................. 172

Loading BMP Map Data........................................... 137 GIS Map Data ............................................ 137 Preset Configuration .................................. 105

Loading ........................................................... 105

Loading ........................................................... 137

Local ......... 26, 55, 56, 76, 80, 131, 143, 178, 216

Local Time Differential ...................................... 76

Location Changing.................................................... 186 such................................................ 53, 88, 136

Location ................................................ 10, 22, 34

Location during Custom....................................................... 178

Location during ............................................... 178

Lock .................................................................. 65

Log Configuration ........................................... 124

Log Configured ............................................... 124

Log File ................................................... 121, 223

Log Object List Device Type ............................................... 172

Log Object List................................................ 172

Log Off Use................................................................. 9

Log Off ................................................................ 7

Log Off warning window ................................... 36

Log On ................................................................ 8

Log Polling attempts ....................................... 175

Log Polling data .............................................. 171

Log polling list ................................................. 172

Log Polling section.......................................... 161

Log Polling tools ............................................. 171

Log Polling windows ............................... 171, 175

Log Sample Period ........................................... 65

Log Table ........................................................ 124

Logged In User.............................. 10, 26, 33, 216

Logging ........................................................... 171

Logging Options .......................... 10, 34, 175, 223

Logging Options menu.................................... 223

Look Device List .................................................... 51

Looks like .......................................................... 90

Loop .................................................................. 56

Loop Length ................................................ 56, 65

M M3000 ............................................................. 236

M3000 Master Parameter Fields .......................................... 76

M3000 Master ................................................... 76

MAC Address .................................................. 236

Main St .............................................................. 65

Main Street Clearance .................................... 237

Maintenance choose ........................................................ 213 Tim42.......................................................... 213

Maintenance............................ 112, 152, 211, 212

Maintenance.................................................... 240

Maintenance Icons.......................... 152, 236, 240

Maintenance Level .......................................... 212

Maintenance list .............................................. 213

MaintenanceIcons................................... 236, 240

Malfunction Management Unit ........ 234, 237, 240

Manage Traffic Signs Controls ...................................................... 107

Manage Traffic Signs ...................................... 107

Management 1, 5, 10, 21, 28, 37, 38, 39, 46, 103, 122, 137, 178, 227, 237, 238

Management Module ........................................ 10

Manager .......................................... 26, 28, 33, 37

Manages using NTCIP communciations protocol ..... 1, 10, 161, 175, 229

Managing Devices......................................................... 37 Open............................................................. 33 User ............................................................ 212

Managing Device Groups............................ 47, 48

Managing Devices............................. 1, 37, 47, 48


274

Managing IQCentral Security .......................... 212

Managing User Accounts ................................ 216

Manual ....................1, 56, 65, 114, 171, 233, 236

Manual Control Enable.................................... 236

Manual Coord Plan ........................................... 56

Manual Poll ............................................. 113, 114

Manufacturer Specific ..................................... 232

Manufacturer Specific Object Groups ............. 232

Map Setting......................................................... 134

Map Area......................................................... 138

Map Configuration toolbar...........20, 81, 163, 169

Map Data Storing ........................................................ 137

Map Data...........................1, 19, 20, 34, 131, 134

Map Data......................................................... 137

Map Data......................................................... 143

Map Data......................................................... 145

Map Data......................................................... 163

Map Data button clicking........................................................ 163

Map Data button.............................................. 163

Map Data Storage ........................................... 137

Map Display Area.................................... 157, 158

Map displays ....................................................... 1

Map Dynamic Objects ....................................... 34

Map File ..................................134, 138, 139, 159

Map icon.................................................. 157, 158

Map Layer Detail ............................................. 134

Map loading activity................................. 157, 158

Map Management Overview..................................................... 137

Map Management ........................................... 137

Map Management icon clicking........................................................ 139 Press........................................................... 137

Map Management icon.................................... 137

Map Management icon.................................... 139

Map Management Module With ...................... 143

Map Management Module With GIS Maps ..... 143

Map Manager Use ............................................................. 134

Map Manager .................................................. 134

Map Module.................................................10, 34

Map Name ...............................................139, 160

Map Open uses ............................................................165

Map Open........................................................165

Map Open polling interval................................165

Map Paths Setting.........................................................134

Map Paths .......................................................134

Map Polling Configuring..................................165, 168, 169 utilizing ........................................................161

Map Polling......................................5, 86, 88, 136

Map Polling AND .............................................175

Map Polling Configuration Open ...........................................................168 Opening ......................................................163 Opens ...........................................................10

Map Polling Configuration .................................10

Map Polling Configuration ...............................161





Map Polling Configuration button ....................168

Map Polling Configuration window ..165, 168, 169

Map polling data ........................................88, 161

Map Polling in ..................................................161

Map polling list...........................................88, 163

Map polling objects............................................86

Map Polling section .........................................161

Map View Creation ..........................................145

Map Viewer Module.............5, 157, 158, 159, 165

MapFiles ..................................................134, 137

Maps > GIS Zoom Levels ................................153

Maps > Map Management...............................134

Maps List .........................................................160

Maps opens .............................................159, 165

Marginal.........42, 43, 83, 122, 175, 234, 236, 238

Marginal Count Set...............................................................175

Marginal Count ................................................175

Marginal Poll Skip Set...............................................................175

Index

275

Marginal Poll Skip ........................................... 175

MaskLabels..................................................... 134

Master 1, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 53, 55, 65, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 98, 99, 101, 104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114, 117, 118, 120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 133, 136, 138, 150, 152, 153, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 178, 182, 184, 186, 205, 207, 209, 213, 221, 223, 225, 227, 229, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

Master Address........................................... 38, 39

Master Fonts............................................. 23, 117

Master Fonts Module ...................................... 117

Master Identification.......................................... 65

Master Port ....................................................... 65

Master Table....................................... 46, 86, 169

Match .................................. 92, 95, 134, 213, 214

Max Hold Time.................................................. 56

Max II ................................................................ 56

Max Initial.................................................... 65, 76

Max Presence................................................... 76

Max Queue Time .............................................. 56

Max Recall .................................................. 56, 65

Max Time .......................................................... 56

Max Vehicle Recall ........................................... 76

Maximum Ambient Temperature .................... 113

Maximum Cabinet Temperature ..................... 113

Maximum Init Time ........................................... 56

Maximum Limit.................................................. 56

Maximum Step.................................................. 56

MCE.................................................... 56, 65, 236

Mdb file ........................................................... 225

MDI item ......................................................... 218

Media Access Control..................................... 236

Medium Small Size ......................................... 153

Member........................... 37, 48, 51, 52, 213, 218

Memory......... 76, 90, 92, 114, 184, 186, 235, 238

Memory Management..................................... 114

Menu item ....................................... 157, 158, 218

Menus ............................................................... 10

Message Commands...................................... 109

Message Defaults ........................... 112, 113, 114

Message Defaults Tab .................................... 114

Message Editor ............................................... 110

Message List ................................... 109, 110, 129

Message Number.................... 109, 114, 118, 176

Message Page Displaying ........................................... 111, 112

Message Page ................................................ 111

Message Page ................................................ 112

Message Requestor ........................................ 114

Message Sign Bulk Operations....................... 207

Message Sign Control 23, 25, 113, 117, 118, 120, 121, 176

Message Sign Log Retrieval ................... 161, 207

Message Sign Management .. 109, 113, 117, 118, 120, 121, 176

Message Sign Schedules window Opening .............................................. 118, 176

Message Sign Schedules window .................. 118

Message Sign Schedules window .................. 176

Message Sign Scheduling utilizing........................................................ 161

Message Sign Scheduling .............................. 161

Message Sign Summary 109, 117, 118, 120, 121, 176

Message Sign toolbar ............... 23, 107, 122, 127

Message Type................................................. 109

Messages SME-Displaying .......................................... 111

Messages........................................................ 111

Methods/tools.................................................. 207

Microsoft Office application................................. 1

Microsoft Windows™ Services.......................... 28

Microsoft® Paint.............................................. 139

Middle................................ 33, 81, 83, 85, 92, 190

MIlitary Time.................................................... 237

Military’ ............................................................ 184

Min .............................................................. 56, 65

Min Cycle Length .............................................. 56

Min Duration...................................................... 76

Min Ext Time ..................................................... 56

Min Gap....................................................... 65, 76

Min Green ................................................... 65, 76

Min Length ........................................................ 65


276

Min Presence .................................................... 65

Min Recall ................................................... 56, 65

Min Red Revert ................................................. 65

Min Time ........................................................... 56

Min Vehicle Recall............................................. 76

Min Walk ........................................................... 76

Minimized Windows .......................................... 15

Minimum............................................................ 56

Minimum Ambient Temperature...................... 113

Minimum Cabinet Temperature....................... 113

Misc................................................................... 56

Missing and/or.......................................................... 127

Missing ............................................................ 127

MMU................................................ 234, 237, 240

MMU/Secondary Enables ................................. 65

MOD PHS ......................................................... 65

Mode ....56, 65, 76, 101, 113, 114, 216, 234, 237, 240

Mode during .................................................... 216

Mode/Value/Exceeded .................................... 120

Model .5, 55, 76, 92, 99, 114, 165, 178, 207, 233, 236, 238, 240

Modem Init ........................................................ 65

Modem Init String .............................................. 56

Modifying Existing Device Group ..........47, 48, 50, 51, 52 Existing Group .............................................. 51 IQCentral .................................................... 221 Layer's ........................................................ 148 Scheduled Task.......................................... 185

Module Managing ...................................................... 15

Module Control ................................................ 218

Module Navigation ............................................ 33

Module Windows Managing .................................................. 7, 15

Module Windows................................................. 7

Module Windows............................................... 15

Module Windows............................................... 92

Module Windows............................................... 99

MOE .......................................................... 65, 237

Monitor ...1, 29, 39, 47, 56, 65, 85, 103, 107, 120, 161, 165, 168, 171, 189, 195, 200, 216, 233, 234, 237, 239, 240

Monitor Polarity..................................................56

Monitor Port .......................................................65

Monitoring Alarms....189, 190, 195, 197, 200, 202

Monthly ............................................................184

Months...........................56, 65, 76, 118, 176, 184

More roadways ....................................53, 88, 136

Mouse Uses..............................................................15 Using.............................................................14

Moving Text .....................................................111

Moving Text Editing .........................................111

Mr 4

MSCLR ............................................................237

MULTI Msg ......................................................111

MULTI Msg window.................................109, 112

MULTI string ....................................................110

Multifunction Management Unit ...............234, 237

Multisonics number....................................5, 178, 233, 238

Multisonics...........................................................5

Multisonics.........................................................55

Multisonics.........................................................56

Multisonics.......................................................178

Multisonics.......................................................233

Multisonics.......................................................237

Multisonics.......................................................238

Multisonics 820A support ............................................................5

Multisonics 820A .................................................5

Multisonics 820A Controllers .............................55

Multisonics OSAM ...........................................178

Multisonics OSAM-32 Master Controllers..55, 178

My Computer ...........................................178, 186

N Name -- Entered ................................................38

Name suggests................................................161

Naming Convention .........................................178

National Electrical Manufacturers Association234, 237

National Transportation ....1, 5, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55, 81, 104, 120, 122, 157, 158, 159, 163, 169, 172, 184, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

Index

277

Navigating IQCentral ...................................................... 34 Message Signs................................... 118, 176

Navigation......................................................... 33

NEMA ....................................................... 65, 237

New.... 5, 7, 10, 19, 25, 34, 39, 45, 46, 48, 50, 51, 55, 56, 83, 85, 88, 92, 99, 101, 104, 109, 110, 111, 112, 114, 120, 122, 129, 130, 131, 133, 138, 139, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 153, 157, 158, 160, 163, 172, 178, 184, 186, 189, 197, 202, 207, 209, 212, 213, 214, 229, 233

New Alarm Setting Up .................................................. 190

New Alarm ...................................................... 189

New Alarm ...................................................... 190

New Alarm ...................................................... 197

New Alarm Condition Creating...................................................... 197

New Alarm Condition ...................................... 197

New BMP Map Adding ........................................................ 138

New BMP Map................................................ 138

New Connection ............................................... 45

New Device....................... 5, 34, 39, 46, 104, 131

New Device Group Creating............................................ 47, 48, 52

New Device Group............................................ 47

New Device Group............................................ 47

New Device Group............................................ 48

New Device Group............................................ 52

New Device Type.............................................. 46

New GIS Map Adding ........................................................ 144

New GIS Map ................................................. 144

New Group button press ...................................................... 48, 50

New Group button............................................. 48

New Group button............................................. 50

New Icon Select Add.................................................. 229

New Icon................................................. 228, 229

New Icon......................................................... 229

New Layer button Press .......................................................... 149

New Layer button............................................ 149

New Line ......................................................... 110

New listing....................................................... 209

New Map......................................... 138, 139, 145

New Map button .............................................. 138

New Message Add ............................................................. 109

New Message ................................................. 109

New Message ................................................. 114

New Message button ...................................... 109

New Page........................................ 110, 111, 112

New Page button............................................. 112

New Row......................................................... 163

New Row button.............................................. 163

New Shape File Adding ........................................................ 149

New Shape File............................................... 149

New Task button ............................................. 184

New User Adding ........................................................ 212

New User ................................................ 7, 19, 25

New User ........................................................ 212

New User ........................................................ 212

New User Account Adding ........................................................ 212

New User Account .......................................... 212

New Year's Day ................................................ 56

New Year's Eve................................................. 56

Next.. 5, 10, 15, 33, 39, 48, 51, 65, 76, 81, 86, 88, 116, 118, 120, 124, 136, 139, 145, 152, 153, 175, 176, 184, 186, 189, 197, 205, 209, 216, 223, 231

Next On Outputs ............................................... 65

Next Preempt .................................................... 76

Nl 110

No selecting ..................................................... 148

No..... 1, 10, 26, 28, 29, 36, 39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 48, 50, 56, 65, 76, 80, 92, 99, 105, 114, 118, 120, 122, 124, 128, 144

No.................................................................... 148

No Early ............................................................ 65

No Early Coord Ped .......................................... 65

No Early Release .............................................. 65

No Error........................................................... 122


278

No PCL Offset Adj............................................. 65

No Skip........................................................ 56, 65

Node Icon........................................................ 190

Non Lock Detector Memory .............................. 76

Non-Actuated .................................................... 56

Non-Actuated II Phase ...................................... 56

None................................................ 134, 172, 186

Non-Locking Memory ........................................ 76

Non-NEMA88, 101, 165, 172, 174, 175, 184, 236, 238

Non-NTCIP........................................................ 55

Normal return ............................................................ 26

Normal operating....................................... 32, 114

Normal operating mode................................... 101

Normal Operation.................................... 101, 236

Normal/Dynamic.............................................. 163

Normally, syncing.............................................. 26

Northbound Thru ............................................... 56

NOT..................................................... 48, 50, 212

Not Accessible ................................................ 218

NOT create........................................................ 48

Notes About Configuring Map Polling Alarm Monitoring......................................... 165

Notes About Configuring Map Polling ............. 165

Np.................................................................... 110

NTCIP Camera Connecting.................................................. 103

NTCIP Camera.................................................. 10

NTCIP Camera................................................ 103

NTCIP Camera Browser Opens ........................................................... 10

NTCIP Camera Browser ................................... 10

NTCIP communciations protocol manages using .................1, 10, 161, 175, 229

NTCIP communciations protocol......................... 1

NTCIP Data Tells ............................................................ 172

NTCIP Data..................................................... 172

NTCIP Data..................................................... 190

NTCIP Device ................................................. 122

NTCIP Device Status ............................ 30, 42, 43

NTCIP Device Status window

switch ............................................................33 NTCIP Device Status window............................33

NTCIP MIB ........................................................46

NTCIP Server Double-clicking..............................................28 Quick History.................................................28 Tooltip ...........................................................28

NTCIP Server ....................................................26

NTCIP Server ....................................................28

NTCIP Server ....................................................30

NTCIP Server icon.............................................28

NTCIP Server Quick History Viewing .........................................................28

NTCIP Server Quick History..............................28

NTCIP Server Status .........................................28

NTCIP Server Status Icon .........26, 29, 30, 32, 33

NTCIP Service...................................................28

NTCIP-capable ..................................................10

NTCIP-compatible .............................................24

Num Cycles ...........................................................56 Minutes .........................................................56

Num ...................................................................56

O O/L Card Enable................................................65

O/L Sig Heads ...................................................65

Object ALL..............................................................168

Object .1, 5, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55, 81, 83, 86, 88, 97, 98, 104, 107, 120, 122, 124, 136, 157, 158, 159, 161, 163, 165

Object – Shows ...............................................163

Objects list populate ......................................................169

Objects list ...............................................163, 165

Objects list .......................................................169

Objects list .......................................................172

Occupancy.................................................76, 165

October 2006.......................................................5

Oeprator allows ..........................................................110

Oeprator ..........................................................110

Off Logging .................................................8, 9, 36

Index

279

Offline Count Set .............................................................. 175

Offline Count................................................... 175

Offset ............................ 56, 65, 76, 101, 114, 239

Offset Entry....................................................... 65

Offset Reference............................................... 56

Offset Seek ....................................................... 65

Offset Seeking Mode ........................................ 65

OID ................................................. 163, 169, 238

OID Length ..................................................... 169

OL A-P .............................................................. 65

OLA................................................................. 238

OLP................................................................. 238

Omit Strategy Max ............................................ 56

ON .................................... 85, 101, 202, 235, 238

On/off ............................................ 56, 76, 85, 163

On/off switch ................................................... 163

On/Off/TOD....................................................... 65

Onboard.......................................................... 114

Once source .......................................................... 99

ONE ................................................................ 175

Only marks device........................................................... 30

Only marks........................................................ 30

Only polling ..................................................... 163

Only want.......................................................... 81

Onto Logging ................................................ 8, 9, 36

Onto .................................................................... 8

Onto .................................................................... 9

Onto .................................................................. 36

Onto ................................................................ 137

Open button press .......................................................... 149

Open button .................................................... 138

Open dialog .................................................... 149

Open file dialog open ........................................................... 202

Open file dialog............................................... 202

Open IQCentral....................................... 134, 181

Open Microsoft Excel...................................... 208

Open Modules

Managing........................ 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33 Opening

Managing...................................................... 33 Opening............................................................. 33

Opens BlockBuilder........................................... 34

Opens FormBuilder ........................................... 34

Operating Manual IQCentral ........................................................ 1

Operating Manual................................................ 1

Operations.... 1, 10, 26, 30, 34, 37, 51, 53, 81, 85, 92, 101, 107, 113, 114, 116, 122, 127, 182, 207, 211, 212, 213, 218, 223, 227, 233, 234, 235, 237, 239

Operations, Maintenance................ 212, 213, 218

Operations/Maintenance/Administration ......... 214

Operator, Manager............................................ 33

Operators1, 10, 29, 33, 36, 47, 53, 101, 103, 105, 107, 110, 114, 118, 130, 131, 145, 148, 152, 176, 182, 190, 205, 218, 221, 224, 232

Option opens window.......................................................... 40

Option opens..................................................... 40

Option opens................................................... 195

Options dialog ................................................. 186

Options submenu.................................... 104, 171

Options window open............................................................ 186

Options window............................................... 178

Options window............................................... 186

Order .... 10, 48, 92, 101, 131, 143, 152, 159, 169, 178, 212, 218, 221, 239

OS............................................................. 10, 238

OSAM................................................................ 56

OSAM 32............................................................. 5

OSAM masters................................................ 178

OSAM-32 ............................................ 56, 64, 238

OSAM-32 Master Parameter Fields .......................................... 64

OSAM-32 Master .............................................. 56

OSAM-32 Master .............................................. 64

Other Error Description ................................... 114

Other polling.............................................. 10, 174

Other Traffic Sign Management ...................... 122

Other, Local..................................................... 114


280

Other, None..................................................... 114

Out ...9, 10, 29, 34, 53, 65, 92, 98, 104, 121, 122, 149, 152, 153, 161, 163, 165, 178, 207, 213

Outline....................................................... 33, 143

OutlineColorBlue ............................................. 134

OutlineColorGreen .......................................... 134

OutlineColorRed.............................................. 134

Output ....................................................... 65, 124

Output Actions row.............................................................. 124

Output Actions................................................. 124

Over Hovering ..................................... 26, 28, 29, 30

Overhead Sign .................................................. 42

Overlap..................................56, 65, 76, 165, 238

Overlap Dont Walk ............................................ 65

Overlap Min....................................................... 65

Overlap Min Walk.............................................. 65

Overlap Red ................................................ 56, 65

Overlap Setup ................................................... 76

Overlaps A-P..................................................... 65

Override FDW ................................................... 56

Override Max Recall.......................................... 56

Override Min Greens......................................... 56

Override Min Recall........................................... 56

Override Pattern.............................................. 101

Overview Devices Module ............................................ 38 Map Management....................................... 137

Overview - GIS Map Layers ............................ 134

P PA ................................................................... 238

Page...5, 56, 65, 76, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 110, 111, 112, 114, 153, 171, 205

Page Justification ............................................ 110

Page Off .................................................. 111, 112

Page On .................................................. 111, 112

Page On/Off .................................................... 110

Parameters Setting......................................................... 202

Parameters ...1, 5, 7, 8, 10, 20, 37, 39, 43, 46, 56, 64, 65, 76, 80, 81, 88, 90, 92, 95, 98, 99, 109, 114, 118, 120, 130, 131, 133, 134, 138, 143, 145, 150, 153, 159, 160, 161, 163, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 178, 182, 184, 186

Parameters Required Connection Type...........................................45

Parameters Required ........................................45

Parity .................................................................65

Passage Sequence/ Red Revert .......................65

Password Change .......................................................214 Changing.....................................................212 Setting.........................................212, 213, 215

Password...........................8, 10, 34, 56, 122, 211

Paths ...............................................................134

Pattern Selection .............................................101

Patterns .............................1, 47, 65, 76, 101, 165

PC's .................................................................174

PDF file..............................................................10

PE..............................................................65, 238

Ped ................................................56, 65, 76, 165

Ped Assignments...............................................65

Ped Clearance...................................................56

Ped Detector Diag .............................................65

Ped Detectors..............................................65, 76

Ped Don't Walks ................................................56

Ped O/L Sig Heads............................................65

Ped Omit............................................................65

Ped Perm...........................................................65

Ped Recall ...................................................56, 65

Ped Recycle ................................................56, 65

Ped Signal Heads..............................................65

Pedestrian either ...............................................................4

Pedestrian ...........................................................4

Pedestrian Call ..................................................83

Pedestrian Clearance ........................................83

Pedestrian Detectors 1-8...................................76

Pedestrian Permissive End..............................................................235

Pedestrian Permissive.....................................235

Pedestrian Recall ..............................................76

Peek 3000

Index

281

support ........................................................... 5 Peek 3000........................................................... 5

Peek 3000E Controllers...................... 55, 65, 178

Peek Hardware ................................................. 65

Peek M3000 Master Controllers ....................... 55

Peek M3000E ................................................. 178

Peek M3000E Master Controller..................... 178

Peek Traffic.... 1, 4, 55, 64, 76, 80, 233, 236, 238, 240

Peek Traffic Corporation......... 233, 236, 238, 240

Performing Batch Update ..................... 163, 165, 168, 169 Central Override........................................... 53

Period ............................................................... 65

Period/State ...................................................... 76

Perm Strategy................................................... 56

Permissive End............................................................. 235

Permissive .................................................. 65, 92

Permissive ...................................................... 235

Phase... 56, 65, 76, 83, 85, 86, 92, 165, 172, 202, 212, 233, 234, 235, 236, 238, 239

Phase Allocation ............................................... 65

Phase Association ............................................ 56

Phase Input....................................................... 92

Phase NEXT ..................................................... 83

Phase ON ................................................... 65, 83

Phase Signal Heads ......................................... 65

PHases ............................................................. 76

PhaseStatusGroup ................................... 86, 172

PhaseStatusGroupGreens.............................. 172

PhaseStatusGroupGreens object ................... 172

PhaseStatusGroupGreens.1............................. 86

Phone ............................................................... 65

Physical Address .............................................. 65

Pick ......................... 50, 81, 97, 98, 160, 165, 178

Piece hardware .......................... 1, 10, 161, 175, 229

Piezo......................................... 83, 172, 233, 234

Pixel Fail Type ................................................ 114

Pixels Tab ....................................................... 114

Place............................................................... 153

Place Icon

Opens ..................................................... 10, 34 Place Icon ......................................................... 10

Place Icon ......................................................... 34

Place Icon ......................................................... 95

Place Icon ....................................................... 152

Place Icon on Map ........................ 10, 20, 34, 152

Place On ................................... 83, 107, 153, 231

PlaceAbove..................................................... 134

PlaceBelow ..................................................... 134

PlaceOn .......................................................... 134

Plan ................................................... 65, 118, 176

Plan Phase........................................................ 65

Plans 1-3 Inhibits Det 1-12........................................................ 65

Plans 1-3 Inhibits............................................... 65

Play Wave File ................................................ 202

Point Alarm .......................................................... 165 CMU ................................................... 234, 240

Point1, 5, 10, 20, 28, 34, 81, 92, 97, 98, 131, 133, 134, 137, 139, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 152, 153, 158, 159, 160, 163

Point ................................................................ 165

POL A-H............................................................ 65

Poll Data Configuration Message Signs ................................... 118, 176

Poll Data Configuration ..................................... 20

Poll Data Configuration ................................... 118

Poll Data Configuration ................................... 176

Poll Frequency .......................................... 10, 163

Poll Persistence Set .............................................................. 175

Poll Persistence .............................................. 175

Poll When........................................................ 165

Poll When Map Closed.................................... 165

Polling Assistant ..................................................... 163 choosing ..................................................... 163 Configuration ................................................ 19 Devices....................................................... 123 Intro ............................................................ 171 IQCentral Alarms ........................................ 165 open............................................................ 169 Opens ..................................................... 10, 34 Options ......................................................... 10 Rate ............................................................ 159


282

row.............................................................. 163 Polling Assistant

Caution - Using ........................................... 165 Using........................................................... 195

Polling Assistant.......................................... 5, 163

Polling Assistant tool ....................................... 165

Polling Assistant window corner.......................................................... 165

Polling Assistant window................................. 165

Polling Configuration ......................... 10, 163, 168

Polling Objects list populates .................................................... 165

Polling Objects list ........................................... 163

Polling Objects list ........................................... 165

Polling Options choosing ..................................................... 163

Polling Options .................................................. 34

Polling Options ................................................ 163

Polling Options ................................................ 168

Polling Options submenu ................................ 169

Populate Objects list .................................................. 169 Polling Objects list ...................................... 165

Populate ................................81, 88, 99, 104, 143

Populate Polling .......................................... 81, 88

Populate Polling Tool ........................................ 88

Populate Pooling tool ........................................ 88

Popup show ........................................................... 202

Popup.............................................................. 200

Popup.............................................................. 202

Popup menu In................................................................. 200

Popup menu.................................................... 200

Port.................................................................... 76

Portable, Overhead ......................................... 159

Portion Configure Intersection window ..................... 85 Error Logs ................................................... 120 Map Viewer window............................ 157, 158

Position ..109, 129, 131, 144, 152, 153, 157, 158, 195

Post-Flash ......................................................... 56

Post-Flash Phases ............................................ 56

Post-Flash Red Time ........................................ 56

Power Supplies................................................116

Pre-Configured ................................................211

Pre-configured User Accounts.........................211

Preempt Output .................................................56

Preemption ..........................65, 76, 101, 235, 238

Preemption Override .........................................65

Preemption Override Stop Time ........................65

Pre-Flash Phases ..............................................56

Preload need ............................................................137

Preload ............................................................137

Prepare stop .............................................................233

Prepare............................................................129

Prepare............................................................233

Preprogrammed...............................................109

Pre-programmed .............................................109

Present tooltip ............................................................30

Preset ..............................105, 111, 123, 124, 211

Preset Configuration Loading .......................................................105 Saving .........................................................105

Preset Configuration........................................105

Preset Times ...................................................111

Press Alt-F.........................................................36

Press Alt-F4...................................................9, 36

Press Alt-m ......................................137, 148, 153

Press Remove .................................................214

Preview..........................81, 83, 85, 109, 118, 176

Preview button.................................................109

Preview window.................................................85

Previous...............39, 50, 118, 129, 176, 178, 195

Print Coord Plans ..............................................56

Print Det Plans...................................................56

Print Form Controls ...........................................56

Print TIC Day Plans ...........................................56

Print TIC Events ................................................56

Printer Setup......................................................56

Priority ...........................29, 56, 65, 109, 124, 129

Priority Preempt.................................................56

Procedures ..............124, 128, 129, 130, 150, 200

Index

283

Profiles Opens..................................................... 10, 34

Profiles Module ..................................... 10, 34, 36

Protocol 1, 5, 9, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55, 56, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101, 104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114, 118, 120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 136, 152, 153, 157, 158, 159, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 184, 205, 229, 231, 232, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

Provides1, 5, 7, 10, 14, 19, 20, 22, 23, 25, 26, 32, 37, 38, 43, 45, 46, 48, 53, 55, 83, 85, 90, 92, 99, 105, 107, 113, 114, 120, 122, 123, 130, 131, 134, 143, 146, 157, 158, 163, 169, 178, 195, 197, 200, 202, 208, 218, 234

Ptxoy............................................................... 110

Public .............................................................. 122

Purple ............................................................... 95

Pushing Color........................................................... 149

Pushing........................................................... 149

Q Queue Detector Presence ................................ 56

Queue Limit ...................................................... 76

Quick History Data Manager .............................................. 26 NTCIP Server............................................... 28

Quick History .................................................... 26

Quick History .................................................... 28

Quick History display .................................. 26, 28

R Radio button ................................................... 109

RAM................................................................ 114

Range ............... 92, 109, 124, 149, 186, 195, 224

Rate Polling ........................................................ 159

RCU ................................................................ 238

Read.......................................... 34, 104, 218, 238

Read Only ............................................... 218, 238

Read Only Memory ......................................... 238

Read-Only allows............................................ 218

Read-Write .............................................. 211, 218

Realtime Map Polling open.............................................................. 88

Realtime Map Polling .................................. 86, 88

Realtime Map Polling ........................................ 88

Realtime Map Polling ...................................... 136

Realtime Map Polling ...................................... 163

Realtime Map Polling window ......................... 163

Realtime Polling Opens ........................................................... 34

Realtime Polling ................................................ 34

Receive ... 4, 90, 92, 107, 123, 169, 172, 175, 195

Record This Event........................................... 120

Red.................................................................... 65

Red Overlap ...................................................... 83

Red Revert ........................................................ 76

Red Revert Override ......................................... 65

Red Revert Time......................................... 56, 65

Red Time........................................................... 56

Red/green ....................................................... 109

Reduce.................................................. 56, 65, 76

Reduce By......................................................... 76

Reduced Green Band ..................................... 238

Ref end................................................................ 65

Ref..................................................................... 65

Reference Lost............................................ 26, 28

Referencing Data Manager............................................... 26

Referencing....................................................... 26

Refresh button clicking........................................................ 113

Refresh button........................................... 98, 113

Refresh button................................................. 113

Refresh button................................................. 114

Refresh From Controller.................................... 97

Refresh Server Polling button ......................... 172


284

Refresh View button........................................ 195

Release IQCentral ................................................ 5, 101

Release notes all .................................................................... 5 update......................................................... 225

Release notes ..................................................... 5

Release notes ................................................. 225

Remaining Administration ............................................. 212

Remaining ....................................................... 212

Remember Save............................................................ 148

Remop............................................................... 56

Remop Options ................................................. 56

Remop Protocol ................................................ 56

Remop Tel......................................................... 56

Remote Communications Unit ........................ 238

Remove Row................................................... 163

Remove View button ....................................... 144

Repeat 86, 88, 118, 129, 134, 136, 138, 152, 153, 172, 175, 176, 178, 184, 186, 202

Repeat Interval ................................................ 202

Report Data Exporting..................................................... 208

Report Data..................................................... 208

Report Filters Applying...................................................... 205

Report Filters................................................... 205

Report Selection........................10, 205, 208, 209

Report Selection Module................................. 205

Reports Generating Data ......................................... 207

Reports............................................................ 205

Reports............................................................ 207

Reports Interface............................................. 205

Reports takes .................................................. 209

Reports. Opens IQCentral Reports......................................... 10

Reports. Opens ................................................. 10

Representations ........................99, 131, 163, 202

Request login ................................................................ 4

Require consulting .......................................... 114

Reset ...........................................65, 76, 114, 128

Responding .................................................26, 30

Responding Devices..................26, 28, 29, 32, 33

Response Time Default .....................................45

Rest IQCentral.....................................................178

Rest ...............................56, 65, 76, 148, 169, 172

Rest .................................................................178

Rest .................................................................178

Rest .................................................................221

Rest .................................................................227

Rest-in-Walk ......................................................56

Restore Module ...............................5, 10, 34, 225

Restore’ ...........................................................225

Restoring .......................................10, 21, 34, 221

Result detector ...........................................................4

Result ..................................................................4

Retrieve Selected Msg button .........................109

Retrieved during ........................................10, 195

Retry Count Default ...........................................45

Return Veh Calls ...............................................56

Returned advising............................................122

Revert-if-Green Phases.....................................56

Revert-in-Queue Phases ...................................56

RGB...........................................................65, 238

RGB Percentage ...............................................65

Right-click .....10, 14, 90, 129, 178, 186, 190, 195, 197, 202, 209

Rings 1-4 ...........................................................76

ROM ................................................................238

Routing SNMP..........................................................104

Routing ............................................................104

Row Output Action ..............................................124 Polling .........................................................163

Row ...................................42, 45, 88, 97, 98, 104

Rows Allocated................................................120

Rows Used ......................................................120

RS-232 ............................................................236

RTF..................................................................208

RTS ...................................................................65

Index

285

RTS/CTS Delay ................................................ 56

Rules................... 86, 92, 122, 134, 175, 190, 208

Run Diagnostics button................................... 116

S Sample screen shown below .......................... 110

Save All............................................. 48, 137, 163

Save All button press .......................................................... 163

Save All button.................................................. 48

Save All button................................................ 163

Save As .................................................. 152, 208

Save Changes button press .................................................. 184, 186

Save Changes button ..................................... 184



Save Group button Press ...................................................... 50, 51

Save Group button............................................ 48



Save Icon Position .......................................... 159

Save Row ....................................................... 163

Save Row button choose........................................................ 163

Save Row button ............................................ 163

Save View....................................... 144, 145, 160

Saved during................................................... 235

Scenario Activating.................................................... 127 Configuring................................................. 127 Creating...................................................... 129 Displaying................................................... 129 Expand ............................................... 128, 129 launch......................................................... 127 open ........................................................... 129 Opens..................................................... 10, 34 trigger ......................................................... 124 type ............................................................ 127

Scenario.............................................................. 1

Scenario............................................................ 10

Scenario............................................................ 34

Scenario.......................................................... 124

Scenario.......................................................... 127

Scenario.......................................................... 128

Scenario .......................................................... 129

Scenario .......................................................... 129

Scenario .......................................................... 130

Scenario Administration .................................. 127

Scenario Group............................................... 129

Scenario occurring .......................................... 130

Scenario Sign Group....................................... 129

SCENARIOS................................................... 129

Scenarios & Amber Alerts ........................... 23, 25

Scenarios/Amber Alerts .................................... 34

Schedule Number ................................... 118, 176

Scheduled Task Adding ........................................................ 184 Deleting ...................................................... 186 Modifying .................................................... 185

Scheduled Task ...................................... 178, 182

Scheduled Task .............................................. 184

Scheduled Task .............................................. 185

Scheduled Task .............................................. 186

Scheduled Task Editor .................................... 182

Scheduler adds scheduled ................................................... 178

Scheduler adds ............................................... 178

Scheduler Interface Launching ................................................... 181 Using .......................................................... 182

Scheduler Interface......................................... 178

Scheduler v1.0 ................................................ 178

Scheduler window................................... 178, 182

Scheduler’s Complete ..................................... 182

Scheduler’s Toolbar ........................................ 182

Schedules ............................................... 118, 176

Schedules Module............................. 34, 118, 176

Scheduling Events .............................. 1, 161, 195

Screen Peek 3000E .................................................. 92

Screen..................................... 5, 8, 10, 42, 43, 45

SDLC............................................................... 239

Search................................................................. 1

Second meaning database 1, 7, 8, 20, 39, 46, 81, 90, 92, 95, 98, 99, 109, 114, 118, 120, 131, 133, 138, 150, 153, 159, 160, 161, 163, 171, 172, 176, 178, 182, 184, 186, 205, 207, 209, 213, 221, 223, 225, 227, 229, 232, 235, 240


286

Secondary 1-16................................................. 65

Second-by-Second.......................................... 165

Second-by-Second Status .............................. 165

Section1, 5, 10, 32, 43, 53, 85, 86, 161, 163, 171, 178, 189, 209, 221

Security Managing .................................... 122, 211, 216

Security ...1, 8, 9, 10, 33, 34, 36, 56, 65, 101, 107

Security Code.................................................... 65

Security issues ................................................ 202

Security Level Changing ............................212, 213, 214, 215 Select.......................................................... 214 Setting......................................................... 213

Security Level.............................................. 10, 33

Security Management ..................................... 101

Security Module .............................................. 122

See Adding Icon ............................................................. 231

See Adding...................................................... 231

See 'Force Off ................................................. 235

See 'Split ......................................................... 239

Select Add New Icon..................................................... 229

Select Add....................................................... 229

Select All .......................................48, 97, 98, 165

Select Create New Map View ......................... 144

Select Day Plan....................................... 118, 176

Select Form..................................................... 218

Select New ........................46, 104, 129, 130, 146

Select None....................................................... 48

Select Objects ......................................... 124, 172

Select OK ................................................ 178, 186

Select Open .................................................... 186

Selected Cell ..................................................... 97

Selected Device ...43, 81, 92, 104, 120, 163, 195, 205

Selected Device Type ............................... 81, 163

Selected Event Group Only............................. 120

Selected Group ................................................. 48

Selected Msg button ....................................... 109

Selecting Copy Devices .................................... 99

Self-explanatory .............................................. 182

Semi-Actuated .........................................233, 239

Send And Display button .................................109

Send button Press...........................................................101

Send button .......................................................98

Send button .....................................................101

Send Only........................................................109

Sending Data ..............................................................98

Sending .............................................................98

Separate states ..9, 109, 113, 117, 118, 122, 128, 131, 163, 176, 234

September 15 ......................................................1

September 2007 ..................................................5

September 2008 ..................................................5

Seq ....................................................................56

Sequence device which manages.1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 129, 152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178, 182, 184, 207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 240 manages .....................................152, 165, 178

Sequence/Startup..............................................65

Serial Interface ................................................239

Serv ...................................................................65

Set 1-4 ...............................................................65

Set Up Basic Steps ...................................................81 New Alarm ..................................................190

Set Up................................................1, 10, 54, 81

Set Up..............................................................227

Setting Map .............................................................134

Setting .............................................................134

Setting Device Addresses ...............................104

Setting Device Zoom Levels............................153

Setting Up Map Polling Intersection Icons..................................88, 136

Setting Up Map Polling ......................................88

Setting Up Map Polling ....................................136

Setting up polling .....................................165, 195

Settings Between Controllers Copying.........................................................99

Settings Between Controllers ............................99

Index

287

Settings button................................................ 202

Settings window...................................... 197, 202

Setup ................................................................ 65

Several... 15, 26, 47, 90, 113, 114, 120, 159, 161, 171, 172, 174, 209, 216, 227

Severity Choose....................................................... 197

Severity............................................. 29, 190, 195

SF1-6 Feedback Detected................................ 56

Shape ............... 56, 134, 143, 146, 148, 149, 150

Shape file................ 134, 143, 146, 148, 149, 150

ShapeDot.......................................................... 85

Short ............................................................... 165

Short Alarms ................................................... 165

Short Error Status - This ................................. 114

Show Popup ................................................... 202

Shows About window......................................... 10, 34 COM............................................................. 38 IP.................................................................. 38 popup ......................................................... 202 Standard View.............................................. 33

Shows ............................................................. 159

Showthe.................................................. 236, 240

Shp ................................................................. 134

Sign current displaying ....................................... 109 detail display .............................................. 153 Icon .................................................... 157, 158 Send........................................................... 117

Sign.. 1, 5, 8, 9, 10, 23, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101, 104, 105, 107

Sign Access .................................................... 113

Sign Brightness Control Opens........................................................... 10

Sign Brightness Control .................................... 10

Sign Configuration .......................................... 113

Sign Control Form........................................... 109

Sign Control Module open ........................................................... 110

Sign Control Module ................................. 10, 109

Sign Control Module ....................................... 110

Sign Group.............................................. 129, 130

Sign Housing Maximum Temperature ............ 113

Sign Housing Minimum Temperature ............. 113

Sign Information ...................................... 113, 114

Sign Message Edit .................................. 110, 129

Sign Message Edit Screen.............................. 110

Sign Message Edit window open............................................................ 109

Sign Message Edit window ............................. 109

Sign Message Edit window ............................. 110

Sign Message Editor ............................... 110, 111

Sign Scheduler................................................ 107

Sign Status...................................... 113, 157, 158

Sign Status window move................................................... 157, 158

Sign Status window......................................... 157

Sign Status window......................................... 158

Sign Summary/Diagnostics............................. 116

Sign Summary/Sign Status ............................. 116

Sign Type................................................ 110, 113

Sign View ........................................................ 159

Sign Volts ........................................................ 113

Sign Zoom....................................................... 159

Signal activation.................................................. 4

Signal Group Corporation ............................... 238

Signshave ............................................... 236, 240

Simple .... 10, 34, 43, 48, 50, 83, 85, 92, 103, 104, 120, 122, 137, 153, 157, 158, 169, 172, 184, 190, 202, 209, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239

Simple binary ON/OFF...................................... 85

Simple binary ON/OFF operation described ..... 85

Simple listing only ............................................................... 48

Simple listing..................................................... 48

Simple Numeric Data ........................................ 92

Simple ON/OFF................................................. 85

Simulation ....................................................... 114

Simult ................................................................ 65

Simultaneous Gap Disable ............................... 76

Simultaneous Gap Out...................................... 65

Simultaneous Gap Phases ............................... 56

Simultaneous Max Phases ............................... 56


288

SINCE MODIFICATION TO ANY OTHER TABLE IN THE DATABASE WHILE YOU ARE WORKING IN THE FILE COULD RENDER YOUR ......................................................... 221

Single Device ..............................42, 43, 163, 165

Single Device Status ................................... 42, 43

Size Changing ............................................ 157, 158

Size .....................................34, 99, 134, 149, 153

Size Event Log .................................... 10, 21, 223

Size Event Log Module ................................... 223

SME-Advanced ............................................... 110

SME-Displaying Message ..................................................... 111

SME-Displaying............................................... 111

SME-Displaying............................................... 112

SME-Moving Text............................................ 111

SNMP Device Security editing ......................................................... 122 Use ............................................................. 122

SNMP Device Security.10, 21, 23, 107, 109, 113, 117, 118, 120, 121

SNMP Device Security.................................... 122



SNMP Device Security Module launch ......................................................... 122

SNMP Device Security Module ....................... 122

SNMP Device Security Module ....................... 122

Soft Recall ................................................... 56, 65

Soft Return ........................................................ 65

Soft Vehicle Recall ............................................ 76

Software company owned................. 55, 233, 238

Software Versions Device......................................................... 114

Software Versions ........................................... 114

Solid ................................................................ 233

Some IQCentral ................................................ 15

SOP define .......................................................... 130

SOP................................................................. 124

SOP................................................................. 130

Sound.............................................................. 202

Source Once ............................................................. 99

Source .............................................10, 65, 76, 95

Source Data Generating ..................................................207

Source Data.....................................................207

Source Data.....................................................209

Southbound Thru...............................................56

SP....................................................................239

Special Function 1-4 Polarity.............................56

Speed ....................5, 14, 53, 56, 65, 99, 234, 235

Speed Trap........................................................65

Speed Trap Type...............................................56

SPL..................................................................239

Split..........56, 65, 76, 92, 101, 172, 212, 233, 239

Split Coord Phase..............................................76

Split Inhibits .......................................................65

Split Matrix.........................................................65

Splits/Cycle........................................................65

Spreadsheet ............................................123, 124

Spreadsheet Column Selection .......................124

Spreadsheet Column Selection window Devices .......................................................124

Spreadsheet Column Selection window..........124

Spring Weed.............................................................56

Spring ................................................................56

Standard ...1, 5, 10, 19, 25, 33, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55, 56, 81, 104, 120, 122, 123, 124, 130, 145, 157, 158, 159, 163, 169, 172, 184, 186, 202, 205, 211, 223, 228, 233, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

Standard Operating .................................124, 130

Standard Operating Procedure Creating ......................................................129

Standard Operating Procedure........................124



Standard Preempt .............................................56

Standard toolbar Buttons..........................................................19

Standard toolbar ................................................19




Standard View

Index

289

showing ........................................................ 33 Standard View .................................................. 33

Standard, Hide................................................ 159

Start Absence Mon Hour .................................. 65

Start building report .......................................................... 209

Start building................................................... 209

Start Date........................................................ 205

Start Perm......................................................... 56

Start Permissive.............................................. 239

Start Veh Calls.................................................. 56

Started Green ......................................................... 239

Started ... 1, 7, 26, 28, 32, 56, 65, 76, 81, 92, 118, 133, 134, 149, 153, 163, 175, 176, 178, 181, 189, 205, 207, 209, 213, 237, 239

Started ............................................................ 239

Started With Maps Getting........................................................ 133

Started With Maps .......................................... 133

Startup Red Time.............................................. 65

Startup, Card .................................................... 65

State Traffic .................................................... 233

Status All Devices ................................................... 42 Central judges ............................................ 171 Devices Responding .................................... 30 expect......................................................... 161 select.......................................................... 195 Viewing............................................... 157, 158

Status...................... 1, 5, 7, 10, 14, 15, 26, 28, 29

Status Bar ................................................... 26, 33

Status Bar Overview ........... 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33

Status Module. 30, 34, 42, 43, 189, 195, 200, 202

Status window open ................................................... 157, 158

Status window............................................. 29, 33

Status window................................................. 157

Status window................................................. 158

Status window................................................. 195

Status window................................................. 200

Stay Logged On’ button .................................... 36

STMP Polling Opens..................................................... 10, 34

STMP Polling .................................................... 10

STMP Polling .................................................... 20

STMP Polling .................................................... 34

STMP Polling .................................................. 169

Stop................................................................. 233

Stop Bits............................................................ 56

Stop Test......................................................... 202

Storing bitmap......................................................... 137 Map Data .................................................... 137

Storing............................................................. 137

Storing............................................................. 163

Str/Stp ............................................................... 65

Straight-forward............................................... 185

Structure... 1, 5, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55, 81, 104, 120, 122, 157, 158, 159, 163, 169, 172, 184, 208, 232, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

Structured Export ............................................ 208

Style ............................................ 10, 85, 134, 148

Submenu......................................................... 169

Subsystem ................................................ 26, 116

Subsystem Status Bar....................................... 26

Such location ........................................... 53, 88, 136

Such.................. 1, 7, 8, 10, 20, 22, 34, 37, 39, 46

Such.................................................................. 53

Summary............................. 10, 34, 113, 114, 200

Super Password.............................................. 122

Super Password.............................................. 122

Support Multisonics 820A ............................................ 5 Peek 3000 ...................................................... 5 Traconex 390CJ ............................................. 5 Transyt 1880EL .............................................. 5

Supported Traffic Controllers ............................ 55

SW Reset ........................................................ 114

Switching Between Open Modules ............................... 15 comms ........................................................ 175 IQCentral ...................................................... 34 NTCIP Device Status window....................... 33 Thumbnail..................................................... 85

Switching........................................................... 15

Symbol Characteristics set............................................................... 149

Symbol Characteristics ................................... 149


290

Symbols ............................................ 95, 148, 149

SymbolSize ..................................................... 134

SymbolType .................................................... 134

Sync Pulses ...................................................... 65

Sync Reference................................................. 65

Synced ........................26, 37, 47, 56, 65, 76, 171

Synchronization....................................... 174, 236

Synchronous Data Link Control ...................... 239

Syntax Error .................................................... 114

System choose ........................................................ 197 event log records ........................................ 223

System .1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 21, 30, 32, 33, 34, 36, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 48, 53, 55, 56, 64, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83, 85, 88, 90, 92, 95, 98, 99, 101, 103, 104, 105, 107, 109, 110, 113, 114, 116, 117, 118, 120, 122, 124, 127, 129, 131, 133, 134, 136, 137,�138, 139, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 152, 153, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 163, 165, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 178, 181, 182, 184, 186, 189, 190, 195

System Date...................................................... 32

System Maintenance toolbar..................... 21, 223

System Scheduler ........................................... 178

System Sensor Assignments ............................ 65

System Sound................................................. 202

T T/F................................................................... 239

Tab select .......................................................... 113

Tab ..........................1, 48, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 112

Tab Icons .......................................................... 95

Table Cells Color Coding................................................. 95

Table Cells ........................................................ 95

Table menu ..................................................... 208

Task ........................178, 181, 182, 184, 185, 186

Task Database ................................................ 186

Task list ................................................... 182, 184

Task’s .............................................................. 182

TBC ................................................................. 239

TblLayers Open ........................................................... 134

TblLayers ........................................................ 134

TblMapLayerDetail Open ...........................................................134

TblMapLayerDetail ..........................................134

TCP/IP .............................................................239

[email protected] .........................4

Tenth .........................................................65, 111

Test..........................................................138, 228 Pixel ............................................................114

Test........................................................10, 53, 65

Test – This button............................................202

Test Condition .................................................197

Test Icon button clicking ........................................................229

Test Icon button...............................................228

Test Icon button...............................................229

Test Icon button...............................................229

Test Map Button ..............................................138

Text Table ...........................................................208

Text.....83, 85, 109, 111, 112, 114, 143, 146, 149, 157, 158, 163, 172, 182, 184, 189, 195, 197, 202

Text..................................................................208

Text..................................................................209

Text Editing Screen Moving ........................................................111

Text Editing Screen .........................................111

Thanksgiving .....................................................56

The ..................................................................182

The Administration...................................211, 232

The Alarm Status.............................................200

The Chapters.......................................................1

The communications .........................................38

The Delete Group button ...................................52

The Device Add/Edit window.............................38

The Device Connection/Responding .................30

The Device Groups window...............................48

The Device List right .........................................................50, 51

The Device List..................................................50

The Device List..................................................51

The Device List window.....................................48

The Device Specific...........................................81

Index

291

The Device's 9, 10, 26, 30, 33, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, 81, 83, 86, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 103, 104, 109, 113, 117, 118, 120, 122, 124, 128, 129, 131, 152, 153, 157, 158, 159, 161, 163, 165, 168, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 184, 190, 197,�200, 205, 207, 231, 234, 236, 238

The Error Logs................................................ 120

The left .............................................................. 99

The MDI .......................................................... 218

The Message Sign10, 23, 34, 113, 114, 118, 120, 122, 161, 176

The message sign Bulk Operations.................. 34

The NTCIP. 1, 5, 9, 10, 28, 30, 33, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101, 104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114, 118, 120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 136, 152, 153, 157, 158, 159, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 184, 205, 229, 231, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

The NTCIP communciations protocol .. 1, 5, 9, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101, 104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114, 118, 120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 136, 152, 153, 159, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 184, 205, 229, 231, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

The NTCIP Server ...................................... 28, 30

The NTCIP Server functions............................. 28

The NTCIP Server up ....................................... 28

The only ............................................................ 48

The other ........................................................ 189

The parameters .............................................. 175

The Polling Assistant ...................................... 165

The second ..................................................... 161

The Test Map button....................................... 138

The Upload/Download 1, 5, 56, 65, 76, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98

The Upload/Download Interface ....................... 92

The Upload/Download module ......................... 90

Theicons ................................................. 236, 240

These represent.............................................. 131

This button ........................................ 48, 139, 172

This button serves .......................................... 172

This checkbox................................................. 202

This Connections list....................................... 104

This control ............................................. 114, 163

This defines..................................................... 163

This error......................................................... 114

This field.......................................................... 114

This icon.................................................... 85, 190

This list38, 48, 149, 157, 158, 159, 160, 163, 195, 197, 212

This shows ...................................................... 163

Thismanual structure.......................................................... 1

Thismanual.......................................................... 1

Thresholds ...................................................... 153

Thumbnail switching....................................................... 85

Thumbnail ......................................................... 85

TIC .................................................................... 56

Tile Horizontal ............................................. 10, 34

Tile Vertical ................................................. 10, 34

Tiled Windows................................................... 15

Tiling Horizontally................................................... 15 Vertically ....................................................... 15

Tiling.................................................................. 15

Tim42 Maintenance ............................................... 213

Tim42 .............................................................. 212

Tim42 .............................................................. 213

Time .................................................................. 32

Time Base Schedules 1-32............................... 76

Time Before Red............................................... 76

Time Before Reduction ............................... 56, 65

Time Clock ........................................................ 65

Time Dep Ref HH.............................................. 65

Time Dep Ref MM............................................. 65

Time Per Actuation............................................ 56

Time Plans CS................................................................. 65

Time Plans ........................................................ 65

Time Reference Point ..................................... 239

Time Reference Signal.................................... 239

Time Synchronization............................ 1, 10, 174

Timebase .......................................................... 76

Timebase Action ............................................... 76

Timebase Setup ................................................ 76


292

Time-of-Day operations..................................... 37

Timeout ........................................... 10, 34, 36, 56

Timer intersection ................................................... 85

Timer ................................................................. 85

Timer button .................................................... 111

Title .............................................15, 39, 131, 153

Title Bar............................................. 15, 131, 153

TMM500 .............................................................. 5

TMM-500........................................................... 80

TMM-500........................................................... 80

TMM-500......................................................... 240

TMM-500 Master Parameter Fields .......................................... 80

TMM-500 Master ............................................... 80

TMM-500 Master ............................................... 80

TO Location....................................................... 56

TO Reference.................................................... 56

To/From........................................................... 149

TOD COS/F........................................................... 65

TOD................................................................... 65

TOD................................................................. 239

TOD Circuits Cycle/Offset/Split/Free.................................. 65

TOD Circuits...................................................... 65

TOD Revert ....................................................... 65

Toggle Size ............................................. 157, 158

Tool sets number........................................................ 223

Tool sets.......................................................... 223

Toolbar Save button................................................. 153

Toolbar ...5, 10, 19, 22, 23, 25, 26, 107, 122, 139, 145

Toolbar button ................................................. 214

Tooltip generates.................................................... 197 Icon ................................................... 26, 28, 30 NTCIP Server ............................................... 28 present.......................................................... 30 remove........................................................ 200

Tooltip popup display......................................................... 200

Tooltip popup .................................................. 200

Tooltip window.................................................202

Tooltips ........................................................14, 28

Top .....10, 45, 46, 48, 50, 81, 92, 95, 97, 98, 104, 114, 120, 134, 145, 146, 148, 153, 160, 163, 169, 175, 178, 182, 184, 197, 209, 212, 213, 214

Traconex..........................................................240

Traconex 390CJ support ............................................................5

Traconex 390CJ ..................................................5

Traconex 390CJ Controllers..............................55

Traconex Corporation days .............................233

Traconex Hardware ...........................................80

Traconex TMM-500 Master Controllers.............55

Traffic Control .......1, 5, 53, 54, 55, 161, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237

Traffic Control Management ................................1

Traffic Controller Log Retrieval Scheduling ..................................................178

Traffic Controller Log Retrieval........................161

Traffic Controller Log Retrieval........................178

Traffic Controller Management ..................53, 101

Traffic Controller Scheduler.....................118, 176

Traffic Controllers/Masters ..............................152

Traffic equipment...............................55, 233, 238

Traffic equipment brand owned ...............233, 240

Traffic log.........................................................161

Traffic Network ......................................1, 54, 101

Traffic Scheduler .....................................118, 176

Traffic Sign Management ............................1, 107

Traffic signals duration .......................................152, 165, 178

Traffic signals ..................................90, 97, 98, 99

Trail Red ............................................................76

Trailing Detector ........................................................65

Trailing...............................................................65

Translator Firmware ........................................178

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol....................................104, 122, 236, 237, 239

Transmitting Block 98 ........................................................92

Transmitting.......................................................92

Transport Type ..................................................45

Index

293

Transyt number ................................................... 5, 233

Transyt................................................................ 5

Transyt.............................................................. 55

Transyt.............................................................. 80

Transyt............................................................ 233

Transyt............................................................ 233

Transyt............................................................ 240

Transyt 1880EL support ........................................................... 5

Transyt 1880EL .................................................. 5

Transyt EL Controllers ...................................... 55

Transyt EL Master Controllers .......................... 55

Tree ................................................................ 128

Trigger Scenario ..................................................... 124

Trigger .......................................... 1, 10, 101, 123

Trigger Camera Preset ................................... 124

Trigger Scenario ............................................. 124

Trigger Scenario SOP..................................... 124

TS ..................................................................... 76

TS2 working....................................................... 165

TS2 ................................................................. 165

TS-2 ................................................................ 234

TS-2 ................................................................ 240

Turns................... 56, 92, 159, 163, 195, 202, 223

TXT file ........................................................... 208

Type Connection ................................................. 103 couple........................................................... 85 Device ........................................................ 159 Display ....................................................... 159 Grid Display................................................ 159 Message..................................................... 197 Scenario ..................................................... 127 Traffic Controller......................................... 178 use files ........................................................ 85

Type1, 5, 9, 10, 29, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 48, 50, 51, 56, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83

Type ALL viewing files.................................................. 85

Type ALL .......................................................... 85

Type Polling ............................................ 172, 174

Type polling interval ........................................ 175

Type Polling window ....................................... 171

Types Module.................................................... 46

Typical Settings Critical Alarm .............................................. 202 Informational Alarm .................................... 202 Warning Alarm............................................ 202

Typical Settings............................................... 202

U U.S. ..................................................................... 4

UCF................................................................... 65

UCF Exit............................................................ 65

UCF Last ........................................................... 65

UCF Override Hold............................................ 65

UCF Soft Flash.................................................. 65

UCF/Soft Flash.................................................. 65

Uncheck ...................................................... 51, 92

Undelete............................................................ 48

Under Device Action ....................................... 120

Unit - Also........................................................ 234

Unit Config ........................................................ 65

Universal Serial Bus........................................ 240

Unsupported.................................................... 114

Up Setting ................................................ 103, 197

Up... 1, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 26, 28, 33, 34, 38, 39, 42, 43, 45, 46, 50, 53, 56, 65, 76, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101

Up Map Polling Setting .................................................. 88, 136

Up Map Polling.................................................. 88

Up Map Polling................................................ 136

Update Controller ...................................................... 98 release notes .............................................. 225

Update................. 5, 10, 26, 51, 64, 76, 80, 81, 86

Update button.................................................. 139

Update Database Table .................................. 172

Update Device................................................... 26

Update Excel Spreadsheet button .................. 124

Update History IQCentral ........................................................ 5

Update History .................................................... 5


294

Update Sign and/or Save choose ........................................................ 120

Update Sign and/or Save ................................ 120

Updated polling ................................................. 10

Upload Download Module ................................. 95

Upload/download window ................................. 10

Uploading/Downloading .................................... 53

USB................................................................. 240

Use files type ............................................................... 85

Use files ............................................................ 85

Use Fixed .......................................................... 65

UseDefault ...................................................... 134

User Managing .................................................... 212

User................................................................. 212

User................................................................. 213

User................................................................. 224

User Access Levels............................... 10, 34, 36

User Accounts Adding.................................212, 213, 214, 215 Deleting...............................212, 213, 214, 215 Managing ......................8, 9, 36, 122, 211, 212 remove........................................................ 212 Select.......................................................... 214

User Administration choosing ..................................................... 212 open.................................................... 212, 214 Opens ........................................................... 10 selecting...................................................... 212

User Administration menu displays................. 216

User Administration Module .....10, 212, 213, 214, 215

User Administration submenu ......................... 212

User Comments open............................................................ 224 Opens ..................................................... 10, 34 selecting...................................................... 224

User Comments ................................................ 10

User Comments ................................................ 34

User Comments .............................................. 221

User Comments .............................................. 224

User Comments Module ................................. 224

User Icon........................................................... 33

User losing ...................................................... 216

User Maintenance

open ............................................................213 User Maintenance ...........................................213

User Management choosing......................................................213

User Management ...............................8, 211, 212

User Name ..........................................10, 33, 211

User Password Setting.........................................................214

User Password ................................................214

User-customizable...........................................227

User-customizable application.........................227

Users list..........................................................205

Users watch.....................................................165

Using Alarm Configuration Window ......................190 Alarm Status Window..................................195 BlockBuilder Module ...................................232 Device Groups window .................................48 Font Editor Interface ...................................117 Interface ..........................................................7 IQCentral.......................................................53 Layers .........................................................148 Mouse ...........................................................14 Polling Assistant..........................................195 Scheduler Interface.....................................182

Using Groups.............................47, 48, 50, 51, 52

Using IQCentral ...............................................109

Using Maps..................................................1, 131

Using Multisonics Hardware ..............................56

Using Peek Hardware........................................65

Using Traconex Hardware.................................80

Using Transyt Hardware....................................80

USTraffic..........................................................240

Utilizing Log Polling ..................................................161 Map Polling .................................................161 Message Sign Scheduling ..........................161

Utilizing ............................................................161

V V1.4 .................................................................216

V2.22 ...............................................................178

V2.8.2 ..............................................................178

V3.6.2 ..............................................................178

Value Cycle Timer...................................................85 Editing ...........................................................92

Index

295

WidthFrom.................................................. 134 Value................................... 10, 32, 34, 45, 51, 83

Values set ....................................................... 134

Variable Message Sign.... 1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 129, 152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178, 182, 184, 207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 240

Veh Assignments.............................................. 65

Vehicle ................................................................ 4

Vehicle Detectors.............................................. 76

Vehicle Omit ..................................................... 65

Verification .......... 10, 34, 118, 129, 139, 150, 176

Verify Amber Alert ................................................ 128

Verify... 36, 39, 40, 45, 48, 52, 101, 104, 118, 120

Verify button.................................................... 129

Verify OID Device Type ............................................... 169

Verify OID ....................................................... 169

Version 1.5............................................ 5, 47, 189

Vertical.............................................................. 38

Vertical Border ................................................ 113

Vertical Pitch................................................... 113

Vertically Tiling............................................................. 15

Vertically ........................................................... 10

Vertically ........................................................... 15

Video Configuration .......................................... 34

Video Connections.................................... 24, 103

View Alarm Details ................................................ 29 Data Manager Quick History ........................ 26 Device Connection Details ........................... 30 Device's NTCIP Status................................. 37 List.............................................................. 122 Map View ................................................... 133 NTCIP Server Quick History ........................ 28 Status ................................................. 157, 158 View Recorded Events............................... 120

View ........................................................ 5, 10, 19

View By Type Display ..................................... 190

View Maps Opens........................................................... 10

View Maps ........................................................ 10

View Maps ...................................................... 159

View menu .............................. 157, 158, 159, 224

View Name.............................................. 144, 145

View Recorded................................................ 120

View Recorded Events viewing........................................................ 120

View Recorded Events.................................... 120




View, Management ............................................. 5

Viewing files type ALL ....................................................... 85

Viewing files ...................................................... 85

Visual Settings ................................................ 202

Vol Log Sample Period ..................................... 65

Vol/Occ.............................................................. 76

Vol/Occ Report.................................................. 76

Vol/Occ Setup ................................................... 76

Volume...................................................... 76, 165

VSL ................................................................. 159

W Wag................................................................... 65

Wait Connection ................................................... 45

Walk ........ 56, 65, 76, 83, 104, 118, 128, 176, 240

Walk Rest Modifier .................................... 65, 240

Warning..................................................... 29, 202

Warning Alarm Typical Settings .......................................... 202

Warning Alarm .................................................. 29

Warning Alarm ................................................ 202

Warning settings ............................................. 202

Watchdog................................................ 237, 240

Wav file ........................................................... 202

Ways couple ................................................... 81, 157

Ways ..................................... 1, 15, 33, 47, 48, 81

Ways ................................................................. 81

Weather Station ...................................... 152, 159

Weather Status ............................................... 159

Weather View.................................................. 159

Weed


296

Spring ........................................................... 56 Weed................................................................. 56

Week ................................................... 56, 65, 184

Week Plans ................................................. 56, 65

Weekly .................................................... 107, 184

Welcome IQCentral ........................................................ 1 IQCentral Operating Manual........................... 1

Welcome ............................................................. 1

Westbound Thru................................................ 56

Which fails indicate ....................................................... 234

Which fails ....................................................... 234

Which generates ............................................. 235

Which manipulates data..................................................... 123, 124

Which manipulates.......................................... 123

Which manipulates.......................................... 124

Which responds calling.......................................................... 233

Which responds .............................................. 233

Which senses controller ............................................. 234, 240

Which senses.................................................. 234

Which senses.................................................. 240

Why ......................................................... 169, 207

WidthFrom values ......................................................... 134

WidthFrom....................................................... 134

WidthNamesFrom ........................................... 134

WidthNamesTo ............................................... 134

WidthShapeFrom ............................................ 134

WidthShapeTo ................................................ 134

WidthTo 100.............................................................. 134 set ............................................................... 134

WidthTo........................................................... 134

Wig .................................................................... 65

Window hosting............................................... 216

Window menu ............................................. 10, 15

Windows............................................................ 15

Windows Paint ................................................ 229

Windows Scheduler ................................ 184, 186

Windows Service.........................26, 28, 178, 189

Windows Services tool ......................................28

With Interacting .....................................................98

With Maps........................................................133

Wmf ...................................................................85

Word ................................................109, 205, 208

Word file save ............................................................208

Word file ..........................................................205

Word file ..........................................................208

Word window...........................................205, 208

Working 3000E TS2 ..................................................165 Controller assigned .........................53, 88, 136 TS2 .............................................................165

WRM................................................................240

Www.peektraffic.com.........................................55

Www.quixtraffic.com......................................4, 55

X XML .........................................................186, 208

XON Char ..........................................................56

XPed..................................................................65

Y Y/N.....................................................................65

Year ...................................................................65

Year Plans ...................................................56, 65

Yellow 56, 65, 76, 83, 95, 197, 202, 233, 234, 237

Yellow Arrow Omit .............................................56

Yellow Limit .......................................................56

Yellow Overlap ..................................................83

Yes ....................................39, 120, 150, 163, 212

Yes/No...................................................56, 65, 76

Yield Percentage ...............................................65

Yield, Single.......................................................92

Your Own Password Changing.....................................................215

Your Own Password........................................215

Your Password Changing.................................................8, 213

Your Password ....................................................8

Your Password ................................................213

Your Password ................................................214

Index

297

Z Zones................................................ 10, 103, 105

Zoom Select ........................................................... 81 set .............................................................. 153

Zoom............................................... 10, 34, 53, 81

Zoom................................................................. 81

Zoom Areas editing......................................................... 139

Zoom Areas .................................................... 139

Zoom Level exit.............................................................. 153

Zoom Level ........................... 10, 81, 83, 145, 152

Zoom Level ..................................................... 153

Zoom Level ..................................................... 236

Zoom Level ..................................................... 240

Zoom level display another ......................................................... 81

Zoom level display ............................................ 81

Zoom Level Icons Configuring ................................................. 131 Managing.................................................... 152

Zoom Level Icons associatedwith ........... 236, 240

Zoom level increases number ......................................................... 83

Zoom level increases ........................................ 83


298

81-1105

Peek Traffic CorporationPeek Traffic Corporation

2511 Corporate WayPalmetto, FL 34221ph: (941) 845-1200toll free in U.S.: (800) 245-7660fax: (941) 845-1504email: [email protected]

2511 Corporate WayPalmetto, FL 34221ph: (941) 845-1200toll free in U.S.: (800) 245-7660fax: (941) 845-1504email: [email protected]

81-1105